Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual

Add to my manuals
358 Pages

advertisement

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual | Manualzz

Q Corresponding Serial

Communication Module

User's Manual (Basic)

U

Q Corresponding Serial

Communication Module

User's Manual

(Basic)

MODEL

QJ71C24-U-KI-E

MODEL

CODE

13JL86

SH(NA)-080006-F(0301)MEE

HEAD OFFICE : 1-8-12, OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO-KU 104-6212,JAPAN

NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5 , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the

Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Mitsubishi Programmable

Logic Controller

QJ71C24N

QJ71C24N-R2

QJ71C24N-R4

QJ71C24

QJ71C24-R2

GX Configurator-SC

(SW2D5C-QSCU-E)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Always read these instructions before using this equipment.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.

The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system, please read the user's manual of the CPU module to use.

In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

!

DANGER

!

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

Note that the

!

CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances.

Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[Design Instructions]

!

DANGER

See manuals of each data link for the operating status of each station when there is a communication error in the data link.

There is the risk of an accident occurring due to output error or malfunctioning.

When using the notification function, the pager receiver may not be contacted due to the frequency transmission status from the system setup environment and error on the receiver side.

To ensure the safety of the PLC system, install a call circuit with a lamp display or buzzer sound.

When performing the control of the PLC in operation (changing data) by connecting a peripheral devices to the CPU module or personal computer, etc. to the intelligent device module, configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so the safety of the overall system is always maintained.

Also when performing other controls of the PLC in operation (changing program and operation status (status control)), read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained.

Especially, when this control is performed to a remote PLC from an external device, troubles that have occurred on the PLC side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data communication error.

Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the PLC CPU for data communication error occurrences, as well as construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program.

Do not write data into the "system area" of the buffer memory of intelligent function modules.

Also, do not use any "prohibited to use" signals as an output signal to an intelligent function module from the PLC CPU.

Writing data into the "system area" or outputting a signal for "prohibited to use" may cause a

PLC system malfunction.

A - 1 A - 1

[Design Instructions]

!

CAUTION

Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires, or install them close to each other.

They should be installed 100mm(3.9inch) or more from each other.

Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction.

When using the module while values, such as buffer memory set values, are registered in the

Flash ROM, do not turn off the power supply for the module loading station nor reset the PLC

CPU.

If the power supply for the module loading station is turned off or the PLC CPU is reset while any values are registered, the data contents in the Flash ROM become inconsistent and as a result the values must be set again in the buffer memory, etc. and reregistered to the Flash ROM.

Also, this may cause failure and malfunction of the module.

[Installation Instructions]

!

CAUTION

Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the user's manual of the CPU module to use.

Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock, fire, malfunction, and damage to or deterioration of the product.

While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module, insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops. Then, securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point.

If the module is not installed properly, it may cause the module to malfunction, fail or fall off.

Secure the module with screws especially when it is used in an environment where constant vibrations may occur.

Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque.

If the screws are loose, it may cause the module to fallout, short circuits, or malfunction.

If the screws are tightened too much, it may cause damage to the screw and/or the module, resulting in fallout, short circuits or malfunction.

Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module.

Not doing so may cause damage to the module.

Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module.

Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the module.

A - 2 A - 2

[Wiring Instructions]

!

CAUTION

When turning on the power and operating the module after installation and wiring are completed, always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product.

There is a risk of electric shock if the terminal cover is not attached.

Perform correct pressure-displacement, crimp-contact or soldering for external wire connections using the tools specified by the manufactures.

Incorrect connection may cause short circuits, fire, or malfunction.

Attach connectors to the module securely.

Be sure to fix communication cables or power supply cables leading from the module by placing them in the duct or clamping them.

Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may hang or shift, allowing them to be accidentally pulled, which may cause a module malfunction and cable damage.

Before connecting the cables, check the type o f interface to be connected.

Connecting or erroneous wiring to the wrong interface may cause failure to the module and external devices.

Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque.

If the terminal screws are loose, it may result in short circuits or malfunction.

If the screws are tightened too much, it may cause damage to the screw and/or the module, resulting in fallout, short circuits or malfunction.

When removing the communication cable or power supply cable from the module, do not pull the cable. When removing the cable with a connector, hold the connector on the side that is connected to the module.

When removing the cable connected to the terminal block, first loosen the screws on the part that is connected to the terminal block.

Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the module or cable.

Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module.

They may cause fires, failure or malfunction.

The top surface of the module is covered with protective film to prevent foreign objects such as cable offcuts from entering the module when wiring.

Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete.

Before operating the system, be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation.

A - 3 A - 3

[Startup/Maintenance Instructions]

!

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify each module.

Doing so could cause failure, malfunction injury or fire.

Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module.

Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module.

Do not mount/remove the module onto/from base unit more than 50 times (IEC61131-2compliant), after the first use of the product.

Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector.

Do not touch the connector while the power is on.

Doing so may cause malfunction.

Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning or retightening terminal screws and module installing screws.

Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module.

If the screws are loose, it may cause the module to fallout, short circuits, or malfunction.

If the screws are tightened too much, it may cause damages to the screws and/or the module, resulting in the module falling out, short circuits or malfunction.

Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body, etc., before touching the module.

Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module.

[Operation Instructions]

!

CAUTION

When performing the control of the PLC in operation (especially changing data, program, and operation status (status control)) by connecting a personal computer, etc. to the intelligent function module, read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained.

Failure to perform correct operation s to change data, program, or the status may result in system malfunction, machine damage, or an accident.

[Disposal Instructions]

!

CAUTION

When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.

A - 4 A - 4

REVISIONS

The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date Manual Number

Dec., 1999 SH (NA)-080006-A First Printing

Revision

Oct., 2000 SH (NA)-080006-B Add the contents of the function version B.

Correction

Contents, Entire manual (change MELSECNET/10H to MELSECNET/H),

About Manuals, About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations, Product

Configuration, Section 1.2, 1.2(8), 1.3 POINT, Section 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.6,

Section 3.1, 3.6, 3.9, Section 4.2, 4.4.1(2)(a)(Figure), 4.6(1), Chapter

5(all), Section 6.1.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, Section 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.2.2, Section 8.1,

8.2.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 8.3.2, Section 9.2 to 9.7, Section 10.1.1, 10.2.1,

10.3.8, 10.3.18, Appendix 1.1(2), Appendix 2(all), appendix 3(2),

Appendix 7, appendix 8

Addition

Entire manual (add the explanation on MELSECNET/H remote I/O station), The Manual's Use and Structure, Section 2.1, Section

3.1(Table), Section 4.4.2(1)(d), 4.9.2, Section 8.3.2 POINT, Section

10.2.1 (7164

H

, 7E70

H

), Appendix 3(1)

Jun., 2001 SH (NA)-080006-C Put Windows

®

base software product together from Mitsubishi

Programmable Logic Controller MELSEC Series to Mitsubishi integrated

FA Software MELSOFT Series.

Standardize the name from software package (GPP function) to Product name (GX Developer).

Standardize the name from utility package (QSCU) to Product name (GX

Congifurator-SC).

Correction

Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction, About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations, Product Configuration, Program

Examples (Section 6.1.4, 6.2.3, Section 7.2.3, Section 9.3, 9.5, Appendix-

8), Section 1.2(1)(d), 1.2(4)(b)(Diagram), 1.2(8)(b), 1.3, Section 2.1, 2.3,

2.4, 2.5, 2.7, Section 3.1(Table), 3.2.1(3), 3.3.3(2), 3.4(Table), 3.9,

Section 4.3, 4.5.2, Section 5.1.5(3), 5.2, Section 6.1.4, Section 8.2, 8.3.2

POINT, 8.4.2, 8.4.9(Table), 8.6.3(Table), 8.6.7(Table), Section 10.1.2(b),

10.3(Table), Appendix 1.1, 2.1, 6, 7, 9

Addition

Section 2.6, Section 8.4.4, 8.6.2(Table), Section 10.2.1(716F

H,

7FEF

H

),

10.2.3(7FE9

H

), 10.3.14, Appendix 3

Feb., 2002 SH (NA)-080006-D

Addition

About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations, Section 1.2, Section 2.1,

2.7, Section 4.5.2, Section 8.2.1, 8.2.2, Section 10.2.1, Appendix 1.1, 6

Oct., 2002 SH (NA)-080006-E

Addition

The Manual’s Use and Structure, About The Generic Terms and

Abbreviations, Section 1.2(1)(4), Section 2.1, 2.4, Section 5.2, Section

6.1.4, Section 9.8, Appendix 7

Jan., 2003 SH (NA)-080006-F

Addition model

QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4

A - 5 A - 5

Print Date Manual Number

Jan., 2003 SH (NA)-080006-F

The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Revision

Addition

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, About Manuals, About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations, Product Configuration, Section 1.3, Section 2.1, 2.2,

2.3, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, Section 3.1, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.6, 3.8, 3.9, Section 4.1, 4.3,

4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7.1, Section 6.1.1, 6.1.2, Section 7.1, 7.2.2, Chapter 8(all),

Section 9.1, 9.6, Section 10.1.2(b), 10.1.3(1), 10.2, Appendix 1, Appendix

2.1, Appendix 3, Appendix 5, Appendix 9

Jun., 2004 SH (NA)-080006-G

Correction

About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations, Product Configuration,

Chapter 2 (all), Section 3.8, Section 4.2.2 (1), Section 5.1.3 POINT,

Section 5.1.4, Chapter 8 (screen change), Section 8.6.10, Section 10.1.1,

Section 10.2

Addition

Appendix 9

Sep., 2004 SH (NA)-080006-H

Correction

Section 1.3, Section 2.5, 2.6, Section 3.5, 3.6, 3.9, Section 4.1, Chapter 8

(screen change), Section 8.6.9, 8.6.10, Section 10.1, 10.2, Appendix 1.1

Addition

Appendix 9.12

Japanese Manual Version SH-080001-L

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A - 6 A - 6

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC-Q series PLC.

Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased, so as to ensure correct use.

Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user.

CONTENTS (This manual)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS..............................................................................................................................A- 1

REVISIONS ....................................................................................................................................................A- 5

CONTENTS....................................................................................................................................................A- 7

About Manuals ...............................................................................................................................................A-15

Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction ................................................................A-15

The Manual’s Use and Structure ...................................................................................................................A-16

About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................A-19

Definitions and Descriptions of Terminology.................................................................................................A-21

Product Configuration ....................................................................................................................................A-23

1 OVERVIEW 1- 1 to 1-11

1.1 Overview of the Serial Communication Module..................................................................................... 1- 1

1.2 Features of the Serial Communication Module...................................................................................... 1- 2

1.3 About Added/Changed Functions in Function Version B ...................................................................... 1-10

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS 2- 1 to 2-14

2.1 Applicable Systems................................................................................................................................. 2- 1

2.2 Combinations of PLC CPU and External Device, and Available Functions.......................................... 2- 3

2.3 For Use in Multiple CPU System ............................................................................................................ 2- 6

2.4 For Use with Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU .......................................................................................................... 2- 7

2.5 For Use at MELSECNET/H Remote I/O Station.................................................................................... 2- 8

2.6 Checking the Function Version, Serial No., and Software Version....................................................... 2-12

3 SPECIFICATIONS 3- 1 to 3-31

3.1 Performance Specifications .................................................................................................................... 3- 1

3.2 RS-232 Interface Specification ............................................................................................................... 3- 3

3.2.1 RS-232 connector specifications ..................................................................................................... 3- 3

3.2.2 RS-232 cable specification .............................................................................................................. 3- 5

3.3 RS-422/485 Interface Specifications ...................................................................................................... 3- 6

3.3.1 RS-422/485 terminal block specifications ....................................................................................... 3- 6

3.3.2 RS-422/485 cable specifications ..................................................................................................... 3- 7

3.3.3 Precautions when transferring data using RS-422/485 circuit ....................................................... 3- 8

3.4 Serial Communication Module Function List.......................................................................................... 3-11

3.5 Dedicated Instruction List........................................................................................................................ 3-12

3.6 Utility Package (GX Configurator-SC) Function List .............................................................................. 3-13

3.7 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Serial Communication Modules............................................... 3-14

3.8 List of Input/Output Signals for the PLC CPU ........................................................................................ 3-15

3.9 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory ................................................................. 3-17

A - 7 A - 7

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION 4- 1 to 33

4.1 Handling Precautions.............................................................................................................................. 4- 1

4.2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation .......................................................................................... 4- 2

4.3 Part Names and Functions ..................................................................................................................... 4- 3

4.4 External Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 4- 5

4.4.1 Connecting the RS-232 interface (full-duplex communications) .................................................... 4- 6

4.4.2 Connecting the RS-422/485 interface ............................................................................................. 4- 8

4.5 Settings for GX Developer ...................................................................................................................... 4-12

4.5.1 I/O assignment settings.................................................................................................................... 4-12

4.5.2 Switch settings for I/O and intelligent functional module ................................................................ 4-13

4.5.3 The Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting ................................................................. 4-20

4.6 Settings with the Utility Package (GX Configurator-SC)........................................................................ 4-22

4.7 Individual Station Test............................................................................................................................. 4-25

4.7.1 ROM/RAM/switch tests .................................................................................................................... 4-25

4.7.2 Individual station loopback test........................................................................................................ 4-28

4.8 Loopback Test......................................................................................................................................... 4-30

4.9 Maintenance and Inspection................................................................................................................... 4-32

4.9.1 Maintenance and inspection ............................................................................................................ 4-32

4.9.2 When mounting/dismounting the module........................................................................................ 4-33

5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL 5- 1 to 5- 6

5.1 Data Communication Functions ............................................................................................................. 5- 1

5.1.1 Accessing the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol ........................................................................... 5- 1

5.1.2 Message format and control procedure for data communication ................................................... 5- 2

5.1.3 PLC CPU setting for performing data communication.................................................................... 5- 2

5.1.4 Support of multiple CPU system or redundant system ................................................................... 5- 3

5.1.5 Support for the QCPU remote password function .......................................................................... 5- 4

5.2 Utilizing the MX Component ................................................................................................................... 5- 6

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL 6- 1 to 6-31

6.1 Data Reception from the External Device .............................................................................................. 6- 2

6.1.1 Receiving methods........................................................................................................................... 6- 2

6.1.2 The receive area and the received data list .................................................................................... 6- 6

6.1.3 Sequence program for data reception............................................................................................. 6-11

6.1.4 Receive data clear............................................................................................................................ 6-14

6.1.5 How to detect reception errors......................................................................................................... 6-17

6.1.6 Received data count and receive complete code settings ............................................................. 6-20

6.2 Sending Data to the External Device ..................................................................................................... 6-22

6.2.1 Transmission methods..................................................................................................................... 6-22

6.2.2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data........................... 6-23

6.2.3 Sequence program for transmission data ....................................................................................... 6-25

6.2.4 How to detect transmission errors ................................................................................................... 6-28

6.3 Data Communications Precautions ........................................................................................................ 6-30

A - 8 A - 8

7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 7- 1 to 7-28

7.1 Data Reception from the External Device .............................................................................................. 7- 2

7.1.1 Receiving methods........................................................................................................................... 7- 2

7.1.2 Arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data ............................................ 7- 4

7.1.3 Sequence program for data reception............................................................................................. 7-10

7.1.4 How to detect reception errors......................................................................................................... 7-13

7.1.5 Receive data clear............................................................................................................................ 7-14

7.2 Sending Data to the External Device ..................................................................................................... 7-15

7.2.1 Transmission methods..................................................................................................................... 7-15

7.2.2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data........................... 7-16

7.2.3 Sequence program for data transmission ....................................................................................... 7-19

7.2.4 How to detect transmission errors ................................................................................................... 7-22

7.3 Processing when Simultaneous Transmission Performed During Full-Duplex Communications ....... 7-24

7.3.1 Processing when simultaneous transmissions occur ..................................................................... 7-24

7.3.2 Communication data processing when simultaneous transmissions occur................................... 7-25

7.4 Data Communications Precautions ........................................................................................................ 7-27

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX CONFIGURATOR-SC) 8- 1 to 8-51

8.1 Functions Available with Utility Package................................................................................................ 8- 2

8.2 Installing and Uninstalling Utility Package.............................................................................................. 8- 3

8.2.1 Usage precautions ........................................................................................................................... 8- 3

8.2.2 Operating environment..................................................................................................................... 8- 5

8.3 Explanation of Utility Package Operation............................................................................................... 8- 6

8.3.1 Operation overview .......................................................................................................................... 8- 6

8.3.2 Starting the intelligent function module utility

(displaying the [select parameter setting module] screen)........................................................................ 8-10

8.3.3 Performing common utility operations ............................................................................................. 8-13

8.4 System Registration to Flash ROM ........................................................................................................ 8-16

8.4.1 User frame registration..................................................................................................................... 8-18

8.4.2 Data for modem initialization registration ........................................................................................ 8-19

8.4.3 Data for modem connection registration ......................................................................................... 8-20

8.4.4 Modem function system setting/registration.................................................................................... 8-21

8.4.5 Transmission control and others system setting............................................................................. 8-22

8.4.6 MC protocol system setting.............................................................................................................. 8-24

8.4.7 Non procedure system setting ......................................................................................................... 8-25

8.4.8 Bidirectional system setting ............................................................................................................. 8-26

8.4.9 PLC CPU monitoring system setting ............................................................................................... 8-27

8.4.10 Transmission user frame No. designation system setting ............................................................ 8-29

8.4.11 Resetting the buffer memory/flash ROM setting values to the default values ............................. 8-30

8.4.12 Flash ROM write allow/prohibit setting .......................................................................................... 8-30

8.5 Auto Refresh Setting............................................................................................................................... 8-31

8.6 Monitor/Test ............................................................................................................................................ 8-32

8.6.1 X · Y monitor/test.............................................................................................................................. 8-33

8.6.2 Modem function monitor/test ........................................................................................................... 8-34

8.6.3 Transmission control and others monitor/test ................................................................................. 8-37

8.6.4 MC protocol monitor......................................................................................................................... 8-39

A - 9 A - 9

8.6.5 Non procedure monitor/test ............................................................................................................. 8-41

8.6.6 Bidirectional monitor......................................................................................................................... 8-43

8.6.7 PLC CPU monitoring monitor .......................................................................................................... 8-44

8.6.8 Transmission user frame No. designation monitor ......................................................................... 8-46

8.6.9 Monitor/test others............................................................................................................................ 8-47

8.6.10 Display LED off and communication error information/error code initialization ........................... 8-49

8.7 Non Procedure Protocol Receive Data Clear ........................................................................................ 8-51

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 9- 1 to 9-21

9.1 Dedicated Instruction List........................................................................................................................ 9- 1

9.2 ONDEMAND Instruction ......................................................................................................................... 9- 2

9.3 OUTPUT Instruction................................................................................................................................ 9- 5

9.4 INPUT Instruction.................................................................................................................................... 9- 8

9.5 BIDOUT Instruction ................................................................................................................................. 9-11

9.6 BIDIN Instruction ..................................................................................................................................... 9-14

9.7 SPBUSY Instruction................................................................................................................................ 9-17

9.8 CSET (Receive data clear) ..................................................................................................................... 9-19

10 TROUBLESHOOTING 10- 1 to 10-43

10.1 Checking the Status of the Serial Communication Module ............................................................... 10- 1

10.1.1 Checking the LED ON status, communications error status, and switch setting status of the serial communication module ................................................................................................ 10- 1

10.1.2 Initializing error information of the serial communication module............................................... 10- 6

10.1.3 Reading the RS-232 control signal status................................................................................... 10- 9

10.1.4 Reading the data communication status (Transmission sequence status) ............................... 10-10

10.1.5 Reading the switch setting status ................................................................................................ 10-11

10.1.6 How to read the current operation status .................................................................................... 10-13

10.2 Error Code Tables............................................................................................................................... 10-15

10.2.1 Error code table............................................................................................................................ 10-15

10.2.2 A compatible 1C frame communications error code table.......................................................... 10-24

10.2.3 Error code list while modem function is used.............................................................................. 10-25

10.3 Troubleshooting by Symptom............................................................................................................. 10-27

10.3.1 Troubleshooting when "RUN" LED is turned OFF ...................................................................... 10-29

10.3.2 Troubleshooting when "RD" LED does not blink even though an external device is transmitting a message................................................................................................................ 10-30

10.3.3 Troubleshooting when the Q series C24 does not return a response message even though an external device transmitted a message and the "RD" LED blinked.......................... 10-31

10.3.4 Troubleshooting when an external device transmitted a message and "RD" LED blinked, but the Read Request signal was not turned ON ....................................................................... 10-32

10.3.5 Troubleshooting when communication error "NAK" generates .................................................. 10-33

10.3.6 Troubleshooting when communication error "C/N" generates ................................................... 10-33

10.3.7 Troubleshooting when communication error "P/S" generates.................................................... 10-34

10.3.8 Troubleshooting when communication error "PRO." generates................................................. 10-35

10.3.9 Troubleshooting when communication error "SIO" generates ................................................... 10-36

10.3.10 Troubleshooting when communication error "CH1 ERR.", "CH2 ERR." generate .................. 10-37

10.3.11 Troubleshooting when communications is intermittently established and lost ........................ 10-38

10.3.12 Troubleshooting when data that cannot be decoded is transmitted and received .................. 10-39

A - 10 A - 10

10.3.13 Troubleshooting when it is unclear whether the communication error cause is in the Q series C24 or an external device .................................................................................... 10-40

10.3.14 Troubleshooting when data cannot be communicated via modem.......................................... 10-41

10.3.15 Troubleshooting when data cannot be communicated with the ISDN sub-address................ 10-42

10.3.16 Troubleshooting when constant cycle transmission does not operate normally...................... 10-42

10.3.17 Troubleshooting when condition agreement transmission does not operate normally ........... 10-42

10.3.18 Troubleshooting when data cannot be received by an interrupt program ............................... 10-42

10.3.19 Troubleshooting when data cannot be written to Flash ROM .................................................. 10-42

10.3.20 Troubleshooting when the "ERR" LED is lit .............................................................................. 10-43

APPENDIX APP.- 1 to APP.-58

Appendix 1 Functional Improvements of the Q Series C24 ...................................................................App.- 1

Appendix 1.1 Comparison of the Functions of Q Series C24/GX Configurator-SC...........................App.- 1

Appendix 1.2 Precautions when Updating the Module from Function Version A to B.......................App.- 5

Appendix 2 QnA/A Series Module ...........................................................................................................App.- 6

Appendix 2.1 Functional Comparison with the Q series C24 and the QnA/A Series Modules .........App.- 6

Appendix 2.2 Using Programs Designed for the QC24 (N) and Installing the Q Series C24 into Existing Systems ....................................................................................................App.- 8

Appendix 2.2.1 Using programs designed for the QC24 (N)..................................................... App.- 8

Appendix 2.2.2 Installing on existing systems ........................................................................... App.- 9

Appendix 2.3 Using Programs Designed for the Computer Link Module and Installing the Q Series C24 into Existing Systems......................................................................APP.-10

Appendix 2.3.1 Using programs designed for the computer link module .................................. App.-10

Appendix 2.3.2 Installing the Q series C24 into existing systems ............................................. App.-13

Appendix 3 Processing Time ...................................................................................................................App.-14

Appendix 4 ASCII-Code Table.................................................................................................................App.-17

Appendix 5 External Dimensions.............................................................................................................App.-18

Appendix 6 Example of Connection when a Converter is Used.............................................................App.-20

Appendix 7 Communication Support Tool (MX Component) .................................................................App.-23

Appendix 7.1 Overview of MX Component .........................................................................................App.-23

Appendix 7.2 Usage Procedure of MX Component ............................................................................App.-26

Appendix 8 Example of Clear Process Program for Receive Data ........................................................App.-30

Appendix 9 Program Examples for Using Q Series C24 at MELSECNET/H Remote I/O Station........App.-32

Appendix 9.1 System configuration and program conditions .............................................................App.-32

Appendix 9.2 When accessing buffer memory using sequence program..........................................App.-34

Appendix 9.3 When sending on-demand data ....................................................................................App.-35

Appendix 9.4 When receiving data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol ............................App.-37

Appendix 9.5 When sending data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol ..............................App.-39

Appendix 9.6 When clearing received data.........................................................................................App.-41

Appendix 9.7 When sending data using user frames .........................................................................App.-43

Appendix 9.8 When performing initial setting ......................................................................................App.-46

Appendix 9.9 When registering user frame .........................................................................................App.-48

Appendix 9.10 When reading user frame............................................................................................App.-50

Appendix 9.11 When deleting user frame ...........................................................................................App.-52

Appendix 9.12 When changing the communication protocol and transmission setting.....................App.-54

Appendix 10 Setting Value Recording Sheet ..........................................................................................App.-57

INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 2

A - 11 A - 11

(Related Manual-1) … Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)

SH-080007-G

1 OVERVIEW

1.1 Overview

1.2 Functions Added/Changed by Function

Version B

2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING

FUNCTION

2.1 Overview

2.2 About the PLC CPU Monitoring Function

2.3 Settings for Using the PLC CPU Monitoring

Function

2.4 Precautionary Notes for Using the PLC CPU

Monitoring Function

3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM

FUNCTION

3.1 Overview

3.2 System Configuration

3.3 Specifications

3.4 Start-up of the Modem Function

3.5 Sample Programs

8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF-

DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS

8.1 Half-duplex Communications

8.2 Data Transmission and Reception Timing

8.3 Changing the Communication System

8.4 Connector Connections for Half-duplex

Communications

8.5 Half-duplex Communications Precautions

9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE

USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION

9.1 User Frame Types and Contents During

Communication

9.2 Transmission/Reception Processing Using

User Frame Register Data

9.3 Precautions when Registering, Reading,

Deleting and Using User Frames

9.4 Register/Read/Delete User Frames

4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT

PROGRAM

4.1 Settings for Receiving Data Using an Interrupt

Program

4.2 Interrupt Program Startup Timing

4.3 Reception Control Method Using an Interrupt

Program

4.4 Programming

10 ON-DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS

USING USER FRAMES

10.1 User Frame Data Communications Function

10.2 User Frame Types and Registration

10.3 User Frame On-Demand Data Transmission and Buffer Memory Used

10.4 On-Demand Function Control Procedure

During User Frame Use

10.5 Example of an On-Demand Data

Transmission Program Using User Frames

5 CHANGING SEND AND RECEIVE DATA

LENGTH UNITS TO BYTE UNITS

(WORD/BYTES UNITS SETTING)

6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS

MONITORING TIMES

6.1 No-Reception Monitoring Time (timer 0)

Setting

6.2 Response Monitoring Time (timer 1) Setting

6.3 Transmission Monitoring Time (timer 2)

Setting

6.4 Message Wait Time Setting

11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER

FRAMES

11.1 Overview of Data Communication

Procedure

11.2 Data Reception

11.3 Receive Program

11.4 Data Transmission

11.5 Transmission program

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE

TRANSMISSION CONTROL

7.1 Control Contents of DTR/DSR (ER/DR)

Signal Control

7.2 Control Contents of DC Code Control

7.3 Precautions when Using the Transmission

Control Functions

12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL

CODES

12.1 Handling the Transparent Code and

Additional Code Data

12.2 Registering Transparent Codes and

Additional Codes

12.3 Handling Transparent Codes and Additional

Codes During Non Procedure Protocol Data

Communication

12.4 Example of Data Communication Using the

Non Procedure Protocol

12.5 Handling Transparent Codes and Additional

Codes During Bidirectional Protocol Data

Communication

12.6 Example of Data Communication Using the

Bidirectional Protocol

A - 12 A - 12

(Related Manual-1) … Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)

SH-080007-G

13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE (ASCII-

BIN CONVERSION)

13.1 ASCII-BIN Conversion

13.2 Settings for ASCII-BIN Conversion

13.3 Performing ASCII-BIN Conversion for Data

Communicated via Non Procedure Protocol

13.4 Example of Data Communication Using the

Non Procedure Protocol

13.5 Performing ASCII-BIN Conversion for Data

Communicated Via the Bidirectional Protocol

13.6 Example of Data Communication Using the

Bidirectional Protocol

14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL

DEVICE AND PLC CPU M : N

CONFIGURATION

14.1 Data Communications Precautions

14.2 External Devices Interlock Conditions

14.3 Examples of Procedure for Data

Communications with the PLC CPU

15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING

15.1 Mode Switching Operation and Contents that can be Changed

15.2 Mode Switching Precautions

15.3 I/O Signals for Handshake with PLC CPU and Buffer Memory

15.4 Switching the Mode from the PLC CPU

15.5 Switching the Mode from an External Device

16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA

MONITORING FUNCTION

16.1 Communication Data Monitoring Function

16.2 Communication Data Monitoring Function

Settings

16.3 Communication Data Monitoring Example

17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

17.1 Dedicated Instruction List

17.2 BUFRCVS Instruction

17.3 CSET Instruction (PLC CPU Monitoring

Register/Cancel)

17.4 CSET Instruction (Initial Settings)

17.5 GETE Instruction

17.6 PRR Instruction

17.7 PUTE Instruction

17.8 UINI Instruction

A - 13 A - 13

(Related Manual-2) … Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual

SH-080008-F

1 OVERVIEW

1.1 Overview of the MELSEC Communication

Protocol

1.2 Features of the MELSEC Communication

Protocol

3.14 Turning Off Displayed LEDs and Initializing

Communication Error Information and Error

Code: for Serial Communication Module

3.15 Turning Off the COM.ERR LED: for Ethernet

Modules

3.16 Loopback Test

3.17 Registering or Canceling PLC CPU

Monitoring: for Serial Communication

Modules

3.18 Remote Password Unlock/Lock

2 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

2.1 Types and Applications of Data

Communication Frames

2.2 Accessible Range of Each Data

Communication Frames

2.3 How to Read the Control Procedures of the

MC Protocol

2.4 Access Timing of the PLC CPU Side

2.5 Setting Method for Writing to the PLC CPU during RUN

2.6 Accessing Other Stations

2.7 Precautions on Data Communication

2.8 Time Chart and Communication Time of the

Transmission Sequence of the Serial

Communication Module

2.9 Transmission Time When Accessing Other

Stations Via MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10

2.10 Compatibility with Multiple CPU Systems

2.11 Compatibility with the Q00CPU, Q01CPU

Serial Communication Function

4 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA

COMPATIBLE 2C FRAMES

4.1 Control Procedures and Message Formats

4.2 Contents of the Data Designation Items

4.3 List of Commands and Functions for QnA

Compatible 2C Frames

4.4 Precautions on the Data Communication

4.5 Example of Data Communication Using QnA

Compatible 2C Frames

5 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A

COMPATIBLE 1C FRAMES

5.1 Control Procedures and Message Formats

5.2 Device Memory Read/Write

5.3 Extension File Register Read and Write

5.4 Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module

5.5 Loopback Test 3 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA

COMPATIBLE 3E/3C/4C FRAMES

3.1 Message Formats

3.2 List of Commands and Functions for the QnA

Compatible 3E/3C/4C Frames

3.3 Device Memory Read/Write

3.4 Buffer Memory Read/Write

3.5 Reading from and Writing to the Buffer

Memory of an Intelligent Function Module

3.6 PLC CPU Status Control

3.7 Drive Memory Defragmentation (for Other

Station QnACPU)

3.8 File Control

3.9 Registering, Deleting and Reading User

Frames: for Serial Communication Modules

3.10 Global Function: for Serial Communication

Modules

3.11 Data Transmission to an External device

(On-Demand Function): for Serial

Communication Modules

3.12 Initializing the Transmission Sequence: for

Serial Communication Modules

3.13 Mode Switching: for Serial Communication

Module

6 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A

COMPATIBLE 1E FRAMES

6.1 Message Formats and Control Procedures

6.2 List of Commands and Functions for A

Compatible 1E Frames

6.3 Device Memory Read/Write

6.4 Extension File Register Read and Write

6.5 Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module

APPENDIX

Appendix-1 Reading and Writing by Designation of the Device Memory Extension

Appendix 2 Reading from and Writing to the

Buffer Memory

Appendix-3 Processing Time of the PLC CPU

Side While Communicating Using the MC Protocol

A - 14 A - 14

About Manuals

The following table lists the manuals relating to this product. Please order the desired manual(s) as needed.

Related manuals

Manual Name

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)

This manual explains the specifications and operating procedures for the special module functions, the settings for use of special functions, and data-communication method for use with external devices.

(sold separately)

Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual

This manual explains how the external devices read and write PLC CPU data through communication with the MC protocol using the serial communication module/Ethernet module.

(sold separately)

GX Configurator-SC Version 2 Operating Manual (Protocol FB support function)

This manual explains the function and usage of the protocol FB support function that supports the creation of the data communication program of the module and set up of each parameter.

(sold separately)

Manual Number

(Model Code)

SH-080007

(13JL87)

SH-080008

(13JF89)

SH-080393E

(13JU46)

Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction

For details on making Mitsubishi PLC conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction when installing it in your product, please see Chapter 3, "EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction" of the User's Manual (Hardware) of the CPU module to use.

The CE logo is printed on the rating plate on the main body of the PLC that conforms to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction.

By making this product conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction, it is not necessary to make those steps individually.

A - 15 A - 15

The Manual's Use and Structure

How to use this manual

In this manual, details of the serial communication modules (QJ71C24N,

QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, QJ71C24 and QJ71C24-R2) are organized as shown below, according to their applications.

Please use this manual using the contents below as a reference.

(1) To learn about features, functions and component parts

(a) To learn about features and functions

• Chapter 1 describes the features of the serial communication modules.

• Chapter 3 describes the common specifications and functions of the serial communication modules.

(b) To learn about the packed items and system-configured items

• The section prior to Chapter 1, "Product Configuration", describes the parts that are packed along with the serial communication module.

• Parts and components other than those packed with the module must be prepared separately by the user.

(2) To learn about processing required to start up the serial communication module

(a) To learn about the startup procedure

• Section 4.2 describes the general procedures prior to starting the operation of the serial communication module.

(b) To learn about the connection with the external devices

• Section 4.4 describes the connection methods for each type of interface.

(c) To learn about processing required prior to operation of the serial communication module

• Section 4.5 explains the parameter settings with GX Developer in order to use the serial communication module.

• Section 4.6 and Chapter 8 describe the settings from GX Configurator-SC to perform the initial setting of the serial communication module.

To change an initial value, follow the procedure described in Chapter 8.

(d) To check for failure in the serial communication module

• Section 4.7 describes the test of the individual serial communication module.

(e) To learn how to check for a connection error with the external devices

• Section 4.8 describes how to perform the individual module test and the loopback test using MC protocol-based communication.

Details of the loopback test command are described in the reference manual.

A - 16 A - 16

(3) To learn about data communication functions and detailed explanations

(a) To learn about the communication functions

• Section 3.4 describes an overview of the serial communication module functions.

(b) To learn about detailed explanations of the communication functions

• The basic communication methods are described in Chapters 5 to 7.

• Special functions are described in the User's Manual (Application).

(4) To learn about data communication functions and programming

(a) To learn how to read data from and written to the PLC CPU

• Data is read from and written to the PLC CPU with a communication function using the MC protocol.

Details are described in the Reference Manual.

• Appendix 7 describes an overview of the communication support tool (MX

Component) that supports communication using the MC protocol.

(b) To learn how to send and receive data between the PLC CPU and the external devices

• Data communication between the PLC CPU and the external devices is performed with a communication function using the non procedure protocol or the bidirectional protocol.

• Chapter 6 explains details of the communication functions and programming using the non procedure protocol.

• Chapter 7 explains details of the communication functions and programming using the bidirectional protocol.

(5) To learn how to check for error occurrences and take corrective actions

Chapter 10 describes troubleshooting, how to check for errors, and detailed explanations of error codes.

(6) To learn about functions that have been added or changed in function version B

• Section 1.3 lists the functions that have been added or changed as well as manuals that provide detailed explanations hereof.

• Appendix 1.1 provides a breakdown of the functions of Q series C24/GX

Configurator-SC by function version/software version.

A - 17 A - 17

The structure of this manual

The module's buffer memory stores default values that are used as initial settings to execute the data send/receive functions in order to communicate with the external devices.

Data can be sent to or received from the external devices using these default values. However, it may be necessary to change the default values, depending on system specifications.

This manual explains how to perform the initial settings in order to use each function of the utility package available for this module (GX-Configurator-SC).

When changing a default value for sending and receiving data to/from an opposite device, first see the section describing the applicable function to verify the initial setting item and setting value you wish to change, then change the default value as explained in Chapter 8.

A - 18 A - 18

About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations

This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the serial communication modules, unless otherwise specified.

(1) Generic terms and abbreviations of relevant modules

In this manual, the following generic terms and abbreviations are used to indicate the PLC CPU and other modules used for the data-communication functions of the serial communication modules. Module model names are provided when relevant model names are needed to be shown.

Generic term/abbreviation

Q series C24 (C24)

QC24

QC24N

QC24(N)

QCPU

QCPU station

QnACPU

Q/QnACPU

UC24

Computer link module

Serial communication module

Description of generic term/abbreviation

Abbreviation for QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, QJ71C24 and QJ71C24-R2 type serial communication modules.

(Indicated as "C24" in the diagrams)

Generic term for AJ71QC24, AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4, A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2.

Generic term for AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, AJ71QC24N-R4, A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-

R2.

Generic term for QC24, QC24N.

Q mode

Generic term for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU,

Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU.

Abbreviation for the PLC with QCPU installed.

Generic term for Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1,

Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, Q4ARCPU.

Generic term for QCPU, QnACPU.

Generic term for AJ71UC24, A1SJ71UC24-R2, A1SJ71UC24-R4, A1SJ71UC24-PRF,

A1SJ71C24-R2, A1SJ71C24-R4, A1SJ71C24-PRF, A2CCPUC24, A2CCPUC24-PRF.

A series computer link modules.

Generic term for the module below.

QnA series

Q series

AJ71QC24, AJ71QC24-R2, AJ71QC24-R4, A1SJ71QC24, A1SJ71QC24-R2,

AJ71QC24N, AJ71QC24N-R2, AJ71QC24N-R4, A1SJ71QC24N, A1SJ71QC24N-

R2.

QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2

A - 19 A - 19

(2) Other generic terms and abbreviations

This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the data-communication devices for the serial communication module. The names/model names are provided when it is necessary to explicitly identify the model being discussed.

Generic term/abbreviation

Buffer memory

Computer

Data communication functions

GX Configurator-SC

GX Developer

I/F

Intelligent function module devices

Intelligent function modules

MELSECNET/10

MELSECNET/H

MX Component

Operating Manual

(Protocol FB support function)

Description of generic term/abbreviation

Generic term for memory of the intelligent function modules/special function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the PLC CPU (setting values, monitor values, etc.)

Generic term for one of the external devices with which data can be sent/received using the MC protocol or the bidirectional protocol.

Generic term for MC protocol, non procedure protocol, and bidirectional protocol.

Abbreviation for GX Configurator-SC (SW0D5C-QSCU-E or later).

• Initial settings for the module, monitoring and testing can be performed without using a sequence program and without considering I/O signals or buffer memory. (Intelligent function utility)

• Converting sequence programs necessary for data communication processing into FB can shorten program production man-hours.

In addition, the monitoring and analysis of the transmitted/received data by the communication network can shorten the system start-up time. (Protocol FB support function)

Abbreviation for GX Developer (SWnD5C-GPPW-E). (n in the model should be 4 or greater)

Abbreviation for interface

Generic term for buffer memory of the intelligent function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the PLC CPU (setting values, monitor values, etc.)

Generic term for the Q series PLC modules that are operated by commands from the PLC CPU

(equivalent to the A series PLC special function modules).

Examples:

• CC-Link interface module

• A/D and D/A conversion modules

• Ethernet interface module

• Serial communication module

Abbreviation for MELSECNET/10 network system.

Abbreviation for MELSECNET/H network system.

Abbreviation for MX Component (SW0D5C-ACT-E or later).

GX Configurator-SC Version 2 Operating Manual (Protocol FB support function)

Opposite devices

(external devices)

Reference Manual

RS-232 (interface)

RS-422/485 (interface)

Special function modules

Generic term for computers, indicators, measuring instruments, ID modules, bar code readers, regulators, other serial communication modules, UC24, etc. that are connected to this serial communication module for data communication.

Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual

Abbreviation for interface conforming to RS-232.

Abbreviation for interface conforming to RS-422 and RS-485.

Generic term for the A/QnA series PLC modules that are operated by commands from the PLC

CPU (equivalent to the Q series PLC intelligent function modules).

Examples:

• CC-Link interface module

• A/D and D/A conversion modules

• High-speed counter module

• Ethernet interface module

• Computer link module and serial communication module

Generic term for intelligent function module switch setting Switch setting

User's Manual (Application) or

Application

User's Manual (Basic) or Basic

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic)

A - 20 A - 20

Definitions and Descriptions of Terminology

The following table lists the definitions and descriptions of terminology used in this manual and related manuals for the Q series serial communication modules.

Terms Description

A compatible IC frame

Bidirectional protocol

Independent operation

One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data.

This is the same message format as when communicating using the protocol for the A series

(Formats 1 to 4) computer link modules. Device memory read/write operations for the QCPU are allowed within the device range of the AnACPU.

For details, see Chapter 5 of the Reference Manual.

A communication procedure for the serial communication modules and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the PLC CPU and an opposite device. Details are explained in Chapter 7.

A mode of interface operation to communicate data with external devices using a function specified in each communication protocol setting. Two interfaces of serial communication modules do not interact.

Linked operation

The operation mode of each of the two interfaces for a serial communication module that are connected to external devices and linked to one another in order to send/receive data to/from the external devices.

The two interfaces communicate data using the identical data-communication function (MC protocol (identical format) or non procedure protocol) and the identical transmission specifications. (Linked operation using the bidirectional protocol is not allowed.)

A communication procedure for the Q series serial communication modules or the Ethernet interface modules, and a name of communication method for accessing to the PLC CPU from an

MELSEC communication protocol opposite device. (This is called the MC protocol in this manual.)

(MC protocol) There are two communication methods; one uses ASCII code data and the other uses binary code data.

Details are explained in the Reference Manual.

Message send function

This function registers character data (messages) to be sent to external devices (mainly printers) in the serial communication module as an user frame in advance, and sends the registered data

(Printer function) for multiple user frames using the non procedure protocol (sent by an instruction from the PLC

CPU).

Multidrop connection

Non procedure protocol

A name of the connection when multiple external devices or other serial communication modules are connected in a 1:n or m:n mode using the serial communication module's RS-422/485 interface.

An user's communication procedure and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the PLC CPU and an opposite device. Details are explained in

Chapter 6.

One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data.

QnA compatible 2C frame This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA

(Formats 1 to 4) series serial communication modules.

• QnA compatible 2C frame (Formats 1 to 4): QnA simplified frame (Formats 1 to 4)

Details are explained in Chapter 4 of the Reference Manual.

One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication

QnA compatible 3C frame

(Formats 1 to 4)

This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA series serial communication modules.

QnA compatible 4C frame using the MC protocol and ASCII code data.

• QnA compatible 3C frame (Formats 1 to 4): QnA frame (Formats 1 to 4)

(Formats 1 to 4)

• QnA compatible 4C frame (Formats 1 to 4): QnA extension frame (Formats 1 to 4)

Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual.

A - 21 A - 21

User frame

Terms

QnA compatible 4C frame

Description

One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and binary code data.

This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA

(Format 5) series serial communication modules.

• QnA compatible 4C frame (Format 5): QnA extension frame (Format 5)

Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual.

Data name when the fixed format portion of messages to be sent or received between a serial communication module and an opposite device is registered in the module and used for sending and receiving data with the functions listed below. (The contents of an user frame data should conform to the specifications of the opposite device).

The data array of the head and tail sections of a message (transmission control code, C24 station number, sum check, fixed data, etc.) to be sent and received is registered in the serial communication module before use.

• MC protocol on-demand function.

• Data communication function using the non procedure protocol.

Details are explained in Chapter 9 of the User's Manual (Applications).

A - 22 A - 22

Product Configuration

The following lists the product configuration of the Q series serial communication modules.

Model

QJ71C24N or QJ71C24

QJ71C24N-R2 or

QJ71C24-R2

QJ71C24N-R4

SW2D5C-QSCU-E

SW2D5C-QSCU-EA

Item name

QJ71C24N serial communication module or QJ71C24 serial communication module

Terminal resistor 330 1/4 W (for RS-422 communication)

Terminal resistor 110 1/2 W (for RS-485 communication)

QJ71C24N-R2 serial communication module or QJ71C24-R2 serial communication module

QJ71C24N-R4 serial communication module

RS-422/485 plug-in connector socket block

Terminal resistor 330 1/4 W (for RS-422 communication)

Terminal resistor 110 1/2 W (for RS-485 communication)

Plate terminal (for connecting a braided shield cable)

GX Configurator-SC Version 2 (1-license product) (CD-ROM)

GX Configurator-SC Version 2 (Multiple-license product) (CD-ROM)

Quantity

1

2

2

1

4

1

1

1

2

4

4

A - 23 A - 23

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

1 OVERVIEW

1

This manual describes the specifications for the QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2,

QJ71C24N-R4, QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2 serial communication module (hereinafter referred to as "Q series C24"), as well as the procedures prior to starting the operation, maintenance, inspection, data communication methods for use with external devices and troubleshooting.

When applying the following program examples to the actual system, make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems.

1.1 Overview of the Serial Communication Module

The Q series C24 is a module that connects the Q series PLC CPU and an external device using an RS-232 or RS-422/485 line for serial communication, in order to achieve the data communication described below.

By using a modem/terminal adapter, a public line (analog/digital) can be used for data communication with a remote location.

• PLC data collection/change from the external devices

(See the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual.)

• PLC monitoring and control from the external devices (See Chapter 2 of the User's

Manual (Application).)

• Data receiving and sending in any formats that conform to the external device specifications (See (2) and (3) of Section 1.2.)

• Collection of measured data from a measuring device (See (2) of Section 1.2.)

• Operation of a PLC CPU that is connected to a personal computer (hereinafter abbreviated as PC) installed with GX Developer (SW4D5C-GPPW-E or later, hereinafter abbreviated as GX Developer). (See the GX Developer Manual.)

• Collection of measured

data

QJ71C24-R2

RUN

NEU

ERR.

NEU

CH.1

SD

RD

SD

RD

CH.2

CH. 1

• PLC data collection/change

• PLC monitoring and control from an

external device

• Data receiving and sending in any

formats that conform to the external

device specifications

• Collection of read data

• GX Developer

• File writing/reading

• Device monitoring/testing

Being a convenient means of connection among different devices (PCs, display devices, printers, etc.), the serial communication line is the most widely used medium on the market today.

1 - 1 1 - 1

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

1.2 Features of the Serial Communication Module

The following describes the features of the Q series C24.

(1) Data communication based on the MELSEC communication protocol (hereinafter referred to as the MC protocol)

(Details are explained in the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference

Manual.)

(a) External devices can read/write the PLC device data and sequence programs, and can monitor PLC equipment status.

With the exception of the on-demand function described below, the PLC does not require a sequence program because the PLC sends and receives data based solely on commands from external devices.

(b) Using the on-demand function, data can be sent from the PLC CPU to the external devices in each frame format of the MC protocol.

(c) Data communication can be performed using a program at the external device side that has been created for communicating data with conventional

A/QnA series computer link module/serial communication modules.

(d) If the external device is a PC running one of the basic operation systems below, it is possible to create a communication program for the external device without considering the detailed MC protocol (transmission/reception procedures) using one of the following separately sold communication support tools.

(Supported basic operation systems)

• Microsoft

®

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

Windows

®

95 Operating System

• Microsoft

®

• Microsoft

®

98 Operating System

Windows NT

®

Workstation Operating System Version 4.0

• Microsoft

®

• Microsoft

®

• Microsoft

®

Windows

Windows

Windows

Windows

®

®

®

®

Millennium Edition Operating System

2000 Professional Operating System

XP Professional Operating System

XP Home Edition Operating System

Depending on the version of MX Component used, different operating systems are supported.

See the manual of MX Component for the details.

(Separately sold communication support tools)

• MX Component (SW0D5C-ACT-E or later, hereinafter abbreviated as MX

Component)

See Appendix 7 for the overview of MX Component.

1

1 - 2 1 - 2

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

MELSEC

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

PULL

MITSUBISHI

USB

RS-232

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

RS-232

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

1

7

3

5

10BASE

+

12V

12G

MELSEC

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

PULL

MITSUBISHI

USB

RS-232

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

RS-232

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

10BASE

Command

Command request data

MELSECNET/H

(MELSECNET/H mode)

MELSEC

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

PULL

MITSUBISHI

USB

RS-232

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

RS-232

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

3

5

7

1

10BASE

+ 12V

12G

In the MELSECNET/10 mode, other stations (including the A/QnA series PLC

CPUs) can be accessed during data link operation.

The MC protocol is equivalent to the communication function using a dedicated protocol that is supported by the A/QnA series computer link module/serial communication modules.

(2) Data communication using the non procedure protocol

(Details are explained in Chapter 6 and the User's Manual (Application).)

(a) Data can be transferred in any message formats that conform to the specifications of external devices (measuring devices, PCs, etc.).

(b) Fixed or variable length messages can be received in accordance with the external device specifications.

• How to receive the variable length data

The external device sends data by adding at the end of the message the end-code data (CR+LF or any one-byte data) that is set for the Q series C24.

• How to receive the fixed length data

The external device sends the amount of data equivalent to the size of the end data that is set for the Q series C24.

MELSEC

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

10BASE

Reception data

End code

(When receiving variable length data)

PULL

MITSUBISHI

USB

RS-232

+12 V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS -422

/485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

(c) ASCII code data can be used for communication using the ASCII-BIN conversion function.

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

QJ71C24

ASCII-BIN conversion

ASCII data

USB

RS-232

10BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

SG

SDB

RDB

RS -422

/485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

Binary data

Binary data

1 - 3 1 - 3

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

(d) It is necessary to create a sequence program for communication control that conforms to the external device.

(e) Communication can be performed using an user frame by registering the fixed format portion of the head and tail sections of a message as an user frame.

• When sending data, the Q series C24 adds an user frame to any data specified by the user.

• When receiving data, the Q series C24 transfers any data excluding the user frame to the PLC CPU.

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

QJ71C24

ERR.

COM.ERR

CH1.

RD

10BASE-T

CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

5

7

1

3

STX

When receiving data

Any data format ETX

ETX

Any data format

When sending data

STX

(f) It is possible to clear the current reception data without interrupting the transmission processing by using the dedicated instruction "CSET."

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

(3) Data communication using the bidirectional protocol

(Details are explained in Chapter 7 and the User's Manual (Application).)

(a) In communication between PLC CPUs and communication with an external device for which transmission/receive control programming is allowed, data communication is performed in a sequence of "data transmission and response receipt".

(b) Error check of received data can be performed using the sum-check code, while the occurrence of a reception error at an external device can be checked via an ACK/NAK response.

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

ENQ

Data length

Any data

Sum check code

10BASE

USB

RS-232

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

Sending completed normally

ACK

Error code

NAK

Sending completed abnormally

QCPU

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

(c) ASCII code data can be used for communication using the ASCII-BIN conversion function.

QJ71C24

ASCII-BIN conversion

ASCII data

Binary data

USB

RS-232

Binary data

1 - 4 1 - 4

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

(4) Monitoring the PLC CPU

(Details are explained in the User's Manual (Application).)

(a) The self-station's PLC CPU can be monitored at time intervals set by the user without using a sequence program.

1) The following monitoring information can be sent/notified as the result of monitoring the PLC CPU.

• Transmission of information on devices and the PLC CPU status to be monitored. (It is also possible to send the monitoring information through combined use of the modem function.)

• Notification of a notification message (string data) registered as the connection data of the modem function, through combined use of the modem function.

2) The user can select either one of the following timing choices at which to send the PLC CPU monitoring result to the external device.

• Send/notify every time the PLC CPU is monitored (periodic transmission).

• Send/notify when the information read from the PLC CPU matches the conditions set by the user (conditional transmission).

(b) The PLC CPU monitoring function can be used in communication using the

MC or non procedure protocol.

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RU N

IN IT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

Data

USB

RS-232

10BA SE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

3

5

7

1

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RU N

IN IT.

OPEN

SD

QJ71C24

ERR.

COM.ERR

CH1.

RD

10BASE-T

CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

10BA SE

USB

RS-232

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

3

5

7

1

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

Modem

Notification message

Pager

(5) Remote communications using the modem function

(Details are explained in the User's Manual (Application).)

(a) Data communication can be performed with a remotely located external device.

(b) Modem initialization and line connection/disconnection can be performed.

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

(c) Data communication can be performed using the MC, non procedure or bidirectional protocol.

RS-232

Modem Modem

USB

RS-232

10BASE

+

12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

5

7

1

3

(6) Initial settings and communication settings without using a sequence program

Various initial settings can be performed using the GX Congifurator-SC

(SW0D5C-QSCU-E or later, hereinafter abbreviated as GX Configurator-SC).

1 - 5 1 - 5

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

(7) Connecting the GX Developer and the GOT

(a) Connecting the GX Developer (Details are explained in the GX Developer

Operating Manual.)

• By connecting a PC installed with a GX Developer to the interface of the Q series C24 at the same time, operations such as programming, monitoring and testing for the PLC CPU can be performed.

• By connecting multiple PCs installed with GX Developers to the PLC CPU or Q-series C24 at the same time, operations such as programming and monitoring can be performed simultaneously by multiple operators.

Operating the GX Developers using these simultaneous connections can improve program performance.

• Operations can be performed from a GX Developer by setting the communication protocol of the Q series C24 interface to which a PC is connected to "0" with the switch setting using the GX Developer.

(b) Connecting the GOT (Details are explained in the GOT User's Manual

(Connection).)

• By connecting a GOT (graphic operation terminal) to the interface for the

Q series C24 operations such as monitoring the PLC CPU can be performed.

• Operations such as monitoring the PLC CPU can be performed by setting the communication protocol of the Q series C24 interface to which a GOT is connected to "0" with the switch setting using a GX Developer.

(c) Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT

• It is possible to connect a PC with GX Developer and the GOT to two interfaces of the Q series C24 at the same time. It is thus possible for more than one user to perform programming, monitoring, etc. simultaneously.

• When the GOT and the PC with GX Developer are connected at the same time, the two interfaces of the Q series C24 cannot perform an interlock operation.

GX Developer

GOT

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71C24-R2

CH1.

CH2.

CH1.

RS-232 cable

USB

RS-232

CH2.

GX Developer or or

GOT

POINT

When GX Developer and/or the GOT is connected directly to the Q series C24, switching settings using GX Developer need not be made to perform access to the

QCPU, monitoring and other operations. (They can also be performed when the communication protocol is set to "0" by making switch settings using GX

Developer.)

1 - 6 1 - 6

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

(8) Functions supporting multiple CPU systems (Details are explained in the Reference Manual.)

(a) When accessing QCPUs in a multiple CPU system using the MC protocol or through GX Developer, it is possible to perform data communication such as reading/writing device data by specifying the QCPU to be accessed.

• When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system, a QCPU controlling the Q series C24 (hereinafter referred to as the control PLC) should be specified using GX Developer.

It is also possible to mount a Q series C24 of function version A in a multiple CPU system and access to the only control PLC (PLC No.1).

External device

Peripheral device

Q series C24 control PLC

1) 2) 3) 4) 1 2 1

C24

Setting from

GX Developer

Use the input/ output signal as a contact

Q series C24 non-control PLCs

Communication through GX Developer

Communication using the MC protocol

1) : PLC No.1

2) : PLC No.2

3) : PLC No.3

4) : PLC No.4

1 : Module controlled by

PLC No.1

2 : Module controlled by

PLC No.2

(b) When a Q series C24 CPU of function version B is used in a multiple CPU system, the following forms of data communication can be performed with the Q series C24.

1) It is possible to perform data communication using the non procedure/bidirectional protocols from the control PLC

2) It is possible to read the buffer memory from non-control PLCs.

Input/output signals can be used as contacts.

Non-control PLC Control PLC Q series C24

External device

Buffer memory

FROM/TO instruction

Dedicated instruction

Data communication

FROM instruction

Use the input/ output signal as a contact

It should be output to an output signal

X

Y

1 - 7 1 - 7

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

3) It is possible to access the control PLC and non-control PLCs using the

MC protocol and through GX Developer from the external device.

In addition, data communication with the control PLC of the Q series C24 can be performed using the non procedure/bidirectional protocol.

(Example) When communicating with the MC protocol

Non-control PLC Control PLC Q series C24

External device

03E0

H

to 03E3

H

03FF

H

Communication using the

MC protocol (read/write)

Specify the QCPU to be accessed by the I/O number of the requested module.

Command message transmitted using a

QnA compatible 4C frame

Response message

Data

Device memory, etc.

Data

Device memory, etc.

If the MC protocol, GX Developer is used to access other stations, it is possible to access the control PLC and non-control PLCs of the station to be accessed even if the relay station and the accessed station are multiple CPU systems.

(Example)

It is possible to access other stations regardless of whether the control PLC of the module to be routed through is the same or different.

External device

Peripheral device

Local station

1) 2) 3) 4) 1 2 1'

Communication through GX Developer

Communication using the MC protocol

Setting from GX Developer

MELSECNET/H

Relay station

1) 2) 3) 4) 2 2

1) : PLC No.1

2) : PLC No.2

3) : PLC No.3

4) : PLC No.4

Station to be accessed

1) 2) 3) 4)

MELSECNET/H

2

1 : Module used for routing, controlled

by PLC No.1

1'

2

: Q series C24 controlled by

PLC No.1

: Module used for routing, controlled

by PLC No.2

The modules used for the routing are MELSECNET/H network modules

The QnA compatible 4C frame should be performed for access to noncontrol PLCs when communicating using the MC protocol.

However, the available functions differ depending on the QCPU to be accessed (whether it is a control PLC or a non-control PLC).

See the Reference Manual for the available functions and accessible range.

A module used for routing can access the following modules when accessing other stations:

• MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network module

• Q series C24 • Ethernet interface module

If there is a module of function version A among the modules for routing, it is possible to access the control PLC of that particular module only. In addition, it is possible to access other stations via a module controlled by the same control PLC.

1 - 8 1 - 8

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

(9) Remote password check function

(Details are explained in the User's Manual (Application) and the Reference Manual.)

(a) The remote password check function of the Q series C24 prevents users at a remote location to access QCPUs illegally using the modem function of the

Q series C24.

(The remote password is checked in the following forms of data communication)

• Communication using the MC protocol

(The remote password check is not carried out in data communication using the non procedure/bidirectional protocols.)

• Access to the PLC through GX Developer

The remote password function is one of the QCPU functions and used for preventing illegal access to the QCPU by other users.

Use GX Developer to set a remote password for the QCPU in order to activate the remote password function of the QCPU.

(b) If the Q series C24 is specified in the parameters of a QCPU as being subject to the remote password check, the remote password can be unlocked (canceled) using either one of the methods below, to allow data communication from the external device. It is necessary to connect a line to the modem first.

• When communicating using the MC protocol

Use the dedicated command for communication using the MC protocol to unlock the remote password from the external device.

• When accessing the PLC through GX Developer

Unlock the remote password using GX Developer at the start of online operation.

The remote password is automatically locked by disconnecting the line to the modem.

Set the parameters to make the Q series C24 as a subject to the remote password check.

Accessing external device

QCPU

Remote password

Q series C24

Remote password check

Modem

Dialup line

Modem

Communication using the MC protocol

Communication through GX Developer.

GX Developer

1 - 9 1 - 9

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

1.3 About Added/Changed Functions in Function Version B

Simultaneous connection of

GX Developer and GOT

Control of RS and DTR signal states

Support for 230,400 bps

Data transmission/reception at low speed

Clearing reception data by a dedicated instruction

Transmission of the PLC

CPU monitoring information through combined use of the modem function

Remote password check

Automatic initialization for modem

Callback

Function

Addition of non reception monitoring time format in non procedure protocol

Transmission control start/end free area designation

Addition of changeable data to the user frame

(05

H

, 0B

H

, 11

H

, 17

H

)

Addition of changeable data to the user frame

(04

H

, 0A

H,

E5

H,

EB

H

)

The table below lists the functions that have been added or changed in the Q series

C24 of function version B.

See Section 2.6 for the function version, serial NO. and software version of products

(CPU module, GX Developer, GX Configurator-SC) related to the Q series C24 which can use added/changed functions.

See Appendix 1.1 concerning a comparison of functions in the different Q series C24 function versions.

QJ71C24N

(-R2/R4)

QJ71C24

(-R2)

Outline of function Reference section

This function allows access to the PLC from a PC with GX Developer and a

GOT connected to two different interfaces of the Q series C24 at the same time.

This function allows the control of the on or off state of the RS and DTR signals with the PLC program.

This function allows data communication with an external device at a transmission speed of 230,400 bps.

This function allows data communication with an external device at a transmission speed of 50 bps.

This function allows clearing reception data using the CSET instruction during data communication using the non procedure protocol.

It is possible to clear the data even when data is being transmitted.

Section 1.2 of

User’s Manual

(Basic)

Remark of section

3.2.1

Chapter 4 of

User’s Manual

(Basic)

Chapter 6, Section

9.8 of User’s

Manual (Basic)

When the PLC CPU monitoring function is active, this function sends the monitoring information of the PLC CPU to the external device through the modem.

This function allows data communication after the external device completes the unlock processing of the remote password set at a QCPU. It is executed when the QCPU is accessed from a remote location using the modem function of the Q series C24 in the following forms of data communication:

• Communication using the MC protocol

• Communication using GX Developer

Initializes the modem automatically when Q Series C24 starts up.

After line connection from the GX Developer, access to the QCPU from the

GX Developer is made possible through line reconnection from the Q Series

C24 (callback). Transmission costs after line connection from the Q Series

C24 side are borne by the Q Series C24 side.

This function allows messages to be received in the non reception protocol by time-out in non reception monitoring time (timer 0) if the received complete code and received data count have been not determined.

This function allows the designation of the available capacity of the OS area that notifies the data reception failure at the time of transmission control

(DTR/DSR signal control and DC code control).

Chapter 2 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

Chapter 3 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

Section 3.18 of

Reference Manual

Chapter 3 of the

User’s Manual

(Application)

Chapter 6 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

Chapter 7 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

These functions allow the following codes to be registered as the changeable data of user frames for data communication.

• Horizontal parity code

• Sum check code of two’s-complement number

Chapter 9 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

Adding a reception function through the use of user frames

This function allows reception of a message consisting of the head frame and any data field when receiving data by specifying the head frame.

The data length of the data field can be specified freely for each combination of user frames for reception set by the user.

(Receiving 1 byte providing ACK/NAK only is also possible by setting the data length of the data field to “0.”)

Chapter 11 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

1 - 10 1 - 10

1 OVERVIEW

MELSEC-Q

Support for multiple CPU system

Function

Multiple specification of transparent codes for transmission

Switching to the GX

Developer connection mode by switching the mode

Communication data monitoring function

UINI instruction

QJ71C24N

(-R2/R4)

QJ71C24

(-R2)

Outline of function Reference section

This function allows specification of a maximum of 10 types of transparent codes for transmission per interface when sending data using one of the following protocols:

• Non procedure protocol

• Bidirectional protocol

Chapter 12 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

This functions allows the GX Developer connection mode to be switched by an external device or the PLC CPU.

This function allows the monitoring of communication data transmitted on the communication network of the Q series C24 and an external device.

Chapter 15 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

Section 3.13 of

Reference Manual

Chapter 16 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

Operating Manual

(Protocol FB support function)

Chapter 17 of

User’s Manual

(Application)

The UINI instruction allows change of the mode, transmission specifications and host station No. of the Q series C24.

This function allows access to the control/non-control PLCs specified by the user when performing the following forms of data communication with a multiple CPU system:

• Communication using the MC protocol

• QCPU access from GX Developer

Section 2.10 of

Reference Manual

1 - 11 1 - 11

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

This Chapter describes the system configuration and available functions.

2.1 Applicable Systems

The following describes applicable systems.

(1) Applicable modules and number of modules that can be mounted

The following table lists the CPU module and network modules (for remote I/O stations) that the Q series C24 can be mounted and the number of modules which can be mounted.

Applicable module

Number of modules that can be installed

Maximum 8

Remarks

CPU module

Network module

Q00JCPU

Q00CPU

Q01CPU

Q02CPU

Q02HCPU

Q06HCPU

Q12HCPU

Q25HCPU

Q12PHCPU

Q25PHCPU

QJ72LP25-25

QJ71LP25GE

QJ72BR15

Maximum 24

Maximum 64

Maximum 64

Maximum 64

(

(

(

1

)

Can be installed in Q mode only

1

)

1

)

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O station (

2

)

1 See User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) for the CPU module to use.

2 See Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O network).

(2) The base module to which the Q series C24 can be mounted

The Q series C24 can be mounted into any I/O slot ( 1) of the base module.

1 Limited to within the range of I/O points for the CPU module and network module (for remote I/O station)

(3) Multiple CPU systems

When using the Q series C24 on a multiple CPU system, refer to the QPU User's

Manual (Multiple CPU System) before operation.

(a) Applicable Q series C24

If using the Q series C24 on a multiple CPU system, use function version B of the Q series C24.

(b) Intelligent function module parameter

To write the intelligent function module parameter on a PLC, be sure to write it in the Q series C24 control PLC only.

2

2 - 1 2 - 1

2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

(4) Applicable software packages

(a) Software/setting & monitor tools ( 1) for the PLC

The following table lists the systems and software packages applicable for the Q series C24.

When using the Q series C24, GX Developer is required.

Q00J/Q00/Q001CPU

Q02/Q02H/Q06H/

Q12H/Q25HCPU

Q12PH/Q25PHCPU

Single CPU system

Multiple CPU system

Single CPU system

Multiple CPU system

Single CPU system

Multiple CPU system

GX Developer

Software packages

GX Configurator-SC

Version 7 or later

Version 8 or later

Version 4 or later

Version 6 or later

Version 7.10L or later

Version 1.0 or later

(Versions prior to SW0D5C-

QSCU-E 40E are not usable.)

SW0D5C-QSCU-E 00A or later

SW0D5C-QSCU-E 20C or later

Version 1.13P or later

(Versions prior to SW0D5C-

QSCU-E 40E are not usable.)

When installing an MELSECNET/H remote I/O station

Version 6 or later SW0D5C-QSCU-E 30D or later

1 See section 2.6 for the versions of the GX Developer and GX Configurator-SC that support the functions added through improvements in the Q series C24.

(b) Communication support tools for external devices

Item Name Model

MX Component SWnD5C-ACT -E

Remark

ActiveX control library.

The "n" in the model name is 0 or greater. (

1

)

1 Depending on the version of MX Component used, different versions of Q series C24 are supported.

See the manual of MX Component for the details.

2 - 2 2 - 2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

2.2 Combinations of PLC CPU and External Device, and Available Functions

The following describes the system configurations and available functions when using the Q series C24.

(1) System configurations

System configurations (combinations of PLC CPU and external device) for data communication are shown below.

(a) External device and Q series C24 with 1:1 system configuration

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

RS-232/422

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH2.

CH1.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10BASE

+12V

12G

C H.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

(FG)

R DA

R DB

R S-422

/485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

(b) External device and Q series C24 with n:1 system configuration

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

INIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH2.

CH1.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10BASE

+12V

12G

C H.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

(FG)

R DA

R DB

R S-422

/485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

RS-485

2 - 3 2 - 3

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

(c) External device and Q series C24 with 1:n system configuration

RS-485

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

I NIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

6

2

4

1

3

5

7

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

I NIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH2.

CH1.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+ 12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

6

2

4

1

3

5

7

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

I NIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH2.

CH1.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

6

2

4

1

3

5

7

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

I NIT.

OPEN

SD

QJ71C24

ERR.

COM.ERR

CH1.

RD

10BASE-T CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

6

2

4

1

3

5

7

RS-232 RS-485

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71 QJ71C24

RUN

I NIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

CH1.

CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71 QJ71C24

RUN

I NIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

CH1.

RD

10BASE-T CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/ 485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71 QJ71C24

RUN

I NIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

CH1.

CH2.

CH1.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/ 485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71 QJ71C24

RUN

I NIT.

OPEN

SD

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

10BASE-T

CH1.

CH2.

CH1.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

(d) External device and Q series C24 with m:n system configuration

RS-485

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

I NIT .

O PEN

SD

QJ71C24

ERR.

COM.ERR

RD

CH1.

10BASE-T CH1.

CH2.

RS -232

USB

RS-232

10BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

6

2

4

5

7

1

3

RS-485

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

I NIT.

ERR.

COM.ERR

OPEN

SD RD

QJ71C24

CH1.

10BASE-T

CH2.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+ 12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

(FG)

RDA

RDB

RS-422

/ 485

6

2

4

1

3

5

7

RS-485

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

I NIT.

ERR.

COM.ERR

OPEN

SD RD

QJ71C24

CH1.

10BASE-T

CH2.

CH1.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

6

2

4

1

3

5

7

MELSEC

PULL

MITSUBISHI

POWER

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

US ER

BAT.

BOOT

QJ71E71

RUN

I NIT.

ERR.

COM.ERR

OPEN

SD RD

QJ71C24

CH1.

10BASE-T

CH1.

CH2.

RS-232

USB

RS-232

10 BASE

+12V

12G

CH.2

SDA

SG

(FG)

SDB

(FG)

RDA

RDB

RS-422

/485

6

2

4

1

3

5

7

2 - 4 2 - 4

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

(2) Correspondence between the data communication functions and system configurations

The following shows system configurations that can use the data communication functions of the Q series C24.

The manual names shown in the reference section column in the table below are as follows:

• Application

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)

• Reference

Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual

(a) Communication using the MC protocol ( : Available, : Not available)

Functions of the Q series C24

System configuration

1 : 1 n : 1 1 : n m : n

Reference section

PLC CPU device memory read/write

Intelligent function module buffer memory read/write

Sequence program read/write

PLC CPU status control (remote RUN, STOP, etc.)

On-demand function

Reference

Application

Section 3.3

Section 3.5

Section 3.8

Section 3.6

Section 3.11

Chapter 10

Section 3.10

Global function

Accessing the PLC of other stations in the MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10

PLC CPU monitoring function

Reference

Application

Section 2.7

Chapter 2

(b) Communication using the non procedure protocol

( : Available, : Not available)

Functions of the Q series C24

System configuration

1 : 1 n : 1 1 : n m : n

Reference section

Data transmission/receiving in arbitrary format

Data transmission/receiving with user frames

PLC CPU monitoring function

Reading received data using interrupt programs

Sending/receiving ASCII data using ASCII-BIN conversion

This manual

Application

Chapter 6

Chapter 11

Chapter 2

Chapter 4

Chapter 13

(c) Communication using the bidirectional protocol

( : Available , : Not available)

Functions of the Q series C24

System configuration

1 : 1 n : 1 1 : n m : n

Reference section

Data transmission/receiving

Reading received data using interrupt programs

Sending/receiving ASCII data using ASCII-BIN conversion

This manual

Application

Chapter 7

Chapter 4

Chapter 13

In general, if data communication is performed using a system configuration of other than 1:1 connection mode, the following points should be well noted.

• Avoid simultaneous transmission.

• Discard data received other than that addressed to the local station.

2 - 5 2 - 5

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

2.3 For Use in Multiple CPU System

This section explains the use of the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system.

(1) When making access from the external device to the non-control CPU of the Q series C24 using either of the following functions, use the Q series C24 of function version B.

When the Q series C24 of function version A is used, only the control CPU can be accessed. (Access to the non-control CPU will result in an error.)

• Communication using MC protocol

• Communication using GX Developer

External device

Multiple CPU system

Communication using MC protocol

Communication using GX Developer

Q series C24 of function version B

(2) If the other stations to be accessed belong to the multiple CPU system, the modules used for routing and QCPUs at the local station, all the relay stations, and the accessed station should be modules of function version B or later. This has to hold in all cases of accessing the non-control PLC of the module used for routing and the accessed station. 1

(Example)

It is possible to access other stations regardless of whether the control PLC of the module to be routed through is the same or different.

External device

Peripheral device

Local station

1) 2) 3) 4) 1 2 1'

Communication through GX Developer

Communication using the MC protocol

Setting from GX Developer

MELSECNET/H

Relay station

1) 2) 3) 4)

Station to be accessed

1) 2) 3) 4) 2

2 2

MELSECNET/H

1) : PLC No.1

2) : PLC No.2

3) : PLC No.3

4) : PLC No.4

1 : Module used for routing, controlled

by PLC No.1

1'

2

: Q series C24 controlled by

PLC No.1

: Module used for routing, controlled

by PLC No.2

The modules used for the routing are MELSECNET/H network modules

1 When accessing other stations, a module used for routing can access the following modules:

MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network modules

Q series C24

Ethernet interface modules

2 - 6 2 - 6

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

2.4 For Use with Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU

This section describes the use of the Q series C24 with the Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU.

(1) Available functions

The following table indicates the functions that can be used when the Q series

C24 is mounted in the Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU.

Function

Communications using the MC protocol (

1

)

Availability

Communications using non procedure protocol

Data reception by interrupt program

Communications using the bidirectional protocol

Data reception by interrupt program

Communications using dedicated instructions

Communications via public line, etc. (modem function)

Remote password check

(

(

(

2

2

2

)

)

)

Transmission DC code control (including Xon/Xoff control)

Control

DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control

Communications protocol switching

Independent/linked operation of each interface

Initial setting and monitoring/testing of setting values by the utility package

Connecting the GX Developer and GOT

: Available : Not available

1 Communications are according to the MC protocol. See the Reference Manual concerning the number of devices that can be accessed and the processing time.

The range of devices that can be accessed differs depending on the frame used in data communications.

2 Use Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU (function version B) or later.

When using the function, version 8 or later of the GX Developer is required.

2 - 7 2 - 7

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

2.5 For Use at MELSECNET/H Remote I/O Station

This section describes the use of the Q series C24 at a MELSECNET/H remote I/O station.

It is not necessary to read this section if the Q series C24 is used with the QCPU.

(1) System configuration

(Example)

(Remote master station)

QCPU

QJ71

LP21

-25

(Remote I/O station)

QJ72

LP25

-25

QJ71

C24

MELSECNET/H

Remote I/O network

External device

QJ72

LP25

-25

(Remote I/O station)

(2) Available functions

The following table indicates the functions that can be used when the Q series

C24 is mounted on a MELSECNET/H remote I/O station.

Function

Communications using the MC protocol

PLC CPU monitoring (PLC CPU monitoring function)

Communications using non procedure protocol

Data reception by interrupt program

PLC CPU monitoring (PLC CPU monitoring function)

Availability

(

(

(

1

)

2

)

2

)

Communications using the bidirectional protocol

Data reception by interrupt program

Communications using dedicated instructions

Communications via public line, etc. (modem function)

Remote password check

Transmission

DC code control (including Xon/Xoff control)

Control DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control

(

(

3

4

)

)

Communications protocol switching

Independent/linked operation of each interface

Initial setting and monitoring/testing of setting values by the utility package

Connecting the GX Developer

(See (4))

: Available : Not available

2 - 8 2 - 8

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

1 The following functions are available when communicating with the

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station using the MC protocol.

Available function Function

Device memory read/write

Buffer memory read/write

Reading/writing buffer memory of an intelligent function module

Batch read and batch write

Random read, test (random write)

Monitor data registration, monitoring

Batch read of multiple blocks, batch write of multiple blocks

Reading/writing from/to the buffer memory of the Q series C24

Reading/writing from/to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent function module

Device name

Special relay

Special register

Input relay

Output relay

Internal relay

The following devices of a MELSECNET/H remote I/O station can be accessed by the device memory read/write function. Note that the accessible devices and the ranges vary depending on the type of frames used for the data communication.

See the Reference Manual for a detailed explanation.

Device symbol

SM

SD

X

Y

M

Device name

Link relay

Data register

Link register

Link special relay

Link special register

Device symbol

B

D

W

SB

SW

REMARK

It is only possible to read/write from/to the buffer memory of an intelligent function module for the MELSECNET/10 remote I/O station compatible with the QnA/A series.

2 PLC CPU monitoring can be registered using the MC protocol or GX

Configurator-SC.

The dedicated instruction CSET cannot be used for registration.

The device to be monitored can be registered within the device range of the

MELECNET/H remote I/O station.

2 - 9 2 - 9

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

3 The dedicated instructions are unavailable for the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station.

For the functions that use the dedicated instructions to make communication, perform programming by the following methods.

Dedicated instruction

FROM, TO

ONDEMAND

INPUT

OUTPUT

BIDIN

BIDOUT

SPBUSY

Method

Perform programming using the REMFR/REMTO instruction.

Perform programming using the REMFR/REMTO instruction and I/O signal.

CSET (Receive data clear)

BUFRCVS

PRR

CSET (Initial setting)

CSET (PLC CPU monitoring function)

No method

Perform programming using the receive data clear request area of the buffer memory.

No method

(Data cannot be received using an interrupt program)

Perform programming using the REMFR/REMTO instruction and I/O signal.

No method

(Register/delete the PLC CPU using the MC protocol or GX

Configurator-SC.)

Explanation section

Appendix 9.2

Appendix 9.3

Appendix 9.4

Appendix 9.5

Appendix 9.4

Appendix 9.5

Appendix 9.6

Appendix 9.7

Appendix 9.8

PUTE

GETE

Perform programming using the REMFR/REMTO instruction and I/O signal.

Appendix 9.9

Appendix 9.11

Appendix 9.10

UINI

Perform programming using the REMFR/REMTO instructions and I/O signals. (However, the station No. cannot be changed.)

Appendix 9.12

4 Available for the MELSECNET/H remote I/O station of function version D or later.

GX Developer Version 8.18U or later is required to use the function.

2 - 10 2 - 10

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

(3) Setting from GX Developer

The following parameters should be set through GX Developer in order to use the Q series C24 mounted to a MELECNET/H remote I/O station.

Each of setting is the same way as when setting the parameters for the Q series

C24 mounted to a QCPU station: see Section 4.5 and after.

See the operating manual for GX Developer for how to display each setting screen.

(Parameter setting items for the Q series C24 mounted to a MELECNET/H remote I/O station)

Parameter setting item

I/O Assignment

Switch setting for I/O and intelligent function module

Setting

Set the module mounting information

Set the transmission specification and the communication protocol for communication with the external device

Remarks

See Section 4.5.1

See Section 4.5.2

Remote password setting Perform settings for the remote password.

User's Manual (Application)

Section 3.3.3

POINT

(1) Connect GX Developer to a MELECNET/H remote I/O station and set the parameters.

(2) Reset the MELECNET/H remote I/O station after changing the setting.

(4) When monitoring/setting with GX Configurator-SC

(a) About the automatic refresh setting

1) When reading/writing data created by the automatic refresh setting using PLC, the read/write operation should be performed by GX

Developer. It cannot be performed from GX Configurator-SC.

2) The devices used for the automatic refresh setting must be of the types

M, B, D, or W.

POINT

(1) GX Configurator-SC should be connected to a MELECNET/H remote I/O station before the monitoring/setting.

(2) The MELECNET/H remote I/O station should be reset after changing the setting.

2 - 11 2 - 11

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

2.6 Checking the Function Version, Serial No., and Software Version

This section explains how to check the the function version, serial No. and software version of related products that can use the functions added by the improvement of the

Q series C24.

(1) Correspondence of related products for use additional functions of

Q series C24

Additional function

Function version of the Q series C24

QJ71C24N

(-R2/R4)

QJ71C24 (-R2)

Function version B

CPU module

Version of related product

GX Developer

GX Configurator-

SC

Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT

Transmission specifications

RS and DTR signal status designation

Support for 230400 bps

Data transmission/ reception at low speed (50 bps)

Clearing reception data by a dedicated instruction

Communication via modem function

Transmission of the PLC CPU monitoring information through combined use of the modem function

Automation initialization of modem

Callback

Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format designation

Transmission control start/end free area designation

Function version B

Function version B

Function version B

Function version B or later whose first

5 digits of the serial

No. are 03043

Version 2 or later

Version 7 or later

SW0D5C-QSCU-E

20C or later

Version 1.0 or later

(Versions prior to

SW0D5C-QSCU-E

40E are not usable.)

Version 2 or later

05

H

, 0B

H

, 11

H

, 17

H

Addition of changeable data to the user frame

04

H

, 0A

H

E5

H

, EB

H

Function version B or later whose first

5 digits of the serial

No. are 06062

Function version B

Version 2 or later

SW0D5C-QSCU

20C or later

Version 2 or later

Version 2.06G or later

Reception according to user frames

(reception according to format 1)

Multiple specification of transparent codes for transmission

Switching the GX Developer connection mode by switching the mode

Communication data monitoring function

Function version B

Function version B

SW0D5C-QSCU-E

20C or later

SW0D5C-QSCU-E

20C or later

UINI instruction

Remote password check

Version 8 or later Version 2 or later

Function version B or later whose first

5 digits of the serial

No. are 06062

Function version B

Function version A or later whose first

5 digits of the serial

No. are 02092

Version 6 or later

SW0D5C-QSCU-E

20C or later

: Usable (no restrictions depending on the version) : Not usable

(2) Checking the version and serial No. of Q series PLC functions

(a) Using the rated plate on the side of the module to check

The serial No. and function version of the corresponding module is shown in the SERIAL column of the rated plate.

Serial No. (first 5 digits)

Function version

Compliant standard

2 - 12 2 - 12

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

(b) Using the GX Developer to check

The method of checking the serial No. and function version of the corresponding module with the GX Developer is shown.

The serial No. and function version are displayed on the GX Developer

"Product Information List" or "Module's Detailed Information" screen.

The method of checking the serial No. and function version on the "Product

Information List" screen is shown below. (See Section 10.1.1 for details about the "Module's Detailed Information" screen.)

[Start Procedure]

"Diagnostics" "System monitor" "Product Inf. List"

[Serial No., Ver.]

• The corresponding module's serial No. is shown in the Serial No. column.

• The function version of the corresponding module is shown in the Ver. column.

(3) Checking the software version of the GX Configurator-SC

The GX Configurator-SC software version can be checked on the "Product

Information List" screen of the GX Developer.

[Start Procedure]

"Help" Product Information

Software version

2 - 13 2 - 13

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

REMARK

The version indication for the GX Configurator-SC has been changed as shown below from the SW0D5C-QSCU-E 40E upgrade product.

Previous product

SW0D5C-QSCU-E 40E

Upgrade and subsequent versions

GX Configurator-SC Version 1.10L

2 - 14 2 - 14

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3 SPECIFICATIONS

The following shows the Q series C24 performance specifications.

See the User's Manual of the QCPU (Q mode) for general specifications.

3.1 Performance Specifications

The following shows the Q series C24 performance specifications. For the transmission specifications when communicating via the modem function, see this section and Chapter 3 of User's Manual (Application).

(1) Transmission specification

Interface

Item

CH1

CH2

QJ71C24N

QJ71C24

RS-232-compliance

(D-sub 9 pin)

RS-422/485-compliance

(2-piece terminal block)

Specifications

QJ71C24N-R2

QJ71C24-R2

QJ71C24N-R4

RS-232-compliance

(D-sub 9 pin)

RS-232-compliance

(D-sub 9 pin)

Full-duplex/half-duplex communications

RS-422/485-compliance

(2-piece plug-in connector socket block)

RS-422/485-compliance

(2-piece plug-in connector socket block)

Communications system ( 1)

Line

MC protocols communication

Non procedure protocol communication

Bidirectional protocol communication

Synchronization method

Transmission speed

Data format

Half-duplex communications

Full-duplex/full-duplex communications

Full-duplex/full-duplex communications

Start bits

Data bits

Parity bits

Stop bits

MC protocol communication

Start-stop synchronization method

[QJ71C24N(-R2/R4)]

50 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600

14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 230400 (bps)

Transmission speed 230400 bps is available for only CH1. (Not available for CH2)

Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 230400 bps.

Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 115200 bps when the communication data monitoring function is used.

[QJ71C24(-R2)]

50 300 600 1200 2400 4800

14400 19200 28800 38400 57600

Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 115200 bps.

115200

9600

(bps)

1

7/8

1 (vertical parity) or none

1/2

Processes one request during installed PLC CPU END processing.

Number of scans that must be processed/number of link scans depends on the contents of the request.

(See Reference Manual.)

Access cycle

Non procedure protocol communication

Bidirectional protocol communication

Parity check

Sends each time a send request is issued. Can receive at any time.

Error detection

Sum check code

All protocols and when ODD/EVEN is selected by parameter.

MC protocol/bidirectional protocol selected by parameter.

Non procedure protocol selected by user frame.

(Continued on next page)

3

3 - 1 3 - 1

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3

Item

QJ71C24N

QJ71C24

Specifications

QJ71C24N-R2

QJ71C24-R2

(Continued from preceding page)

QJ71C24N-R4

Transmission control

RS-232

DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control

RS/CS control

Enabled

Enabled

CD signal control Enabled

DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) control

DC2/DC4 control

Enabled

DTR/DSR signal control and DC code control are selected by the user.

1:1 1:1

1:1, 1:n, n:1, m:n —

RS-422/485

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

(

Line configuration RS-232

(Connection) ( 2)

RS-422/485

MC protocols communication

Line configuration

(Data communication)

2)

RS-

232

Non procedure protocol communication

Bidirectional protocols communication

MC protocols communication

RS-

422/

485

Non procedure protocol communication

Bidirectional protocols communication

1:1, 1:n, m:n

1:1, 1:n, n:1

1:1

1:1, 1:n, m:n

1:1, 1:n, n:1

1:1

1:1

1:1

1:1

1:1, 1:n, n:1, m:n

1:1, 1:n, m:n

1:1, 1:n, n:1

1:1

Transmission distance (Overall distance)

Flash ROM write count

Number of occupied I/O points

Recommended cable

RS-232

RS-422/485

RS-232

RS-422/485

Applicable connector for external wiring

5V DC internal current consumption

External dimensions

Weight

Maximum 15 m

(49.2 ft.)

Maximum 1200 m (4592.4 ft.)

(overall distance)

Maximum 15 m

(49.2 ft.)

Maximum 100,000 times to the same area

32 points per slot (I/O assignment: Intelli: 32 points) ( 3)

Maximum 1200 m (4592.4 ft.)

(overall distance)

7/0. 127 P HRV-SV Outside diameter 8.5mm (0.33in.) or more

(Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Applicable number is specified in .)

SPEV (SB)-MPC-0.2 3P Outside diameter approx. 6.5mm (0.26 in.) (Mitsubishi Cable Industries, LTD.)

SPEV(SB)-0.2 3P Outside diameter approx. 7.5mm (0.3 in.) (Mitsubishi Cable Industries, LTD.) ( 4)

D-sub 9 pin (male) screw type ( 5)

0.31A

0.26A

0.39A

98 (3.86 in.) (H) 27.4 (1.08 in.) (W) 90 (3.54 in.) (D)[mm]

0.20kg (0.44lb)

1 Set to transfer data with external devices using a full-duplex communication system when the Q series C24 is started. For switching to a half-duplex communication system, refer to the User’s Manual (Application).

2 Indicates possible combinations when connecting the PLC CPU and external devices (external device side: PLC CPU side). The total number of n and m+n is up to 32 stations.

3 In order to use the Q series C24, it is necessary to set the GX Developer switches.

To set the GX Developer switches, refer to section 4.5.

4 Recommended cables SPEV (SB)-MPC-0.2 3P and SPEV (SB)-0.2 3P are equivalent in the electrical characteristics, but partially different in the outside diameter, internal wire colors, etc.

5 See Section 3.2.1 (3) for the recommended connector.

3 - 2 3 - 2

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.2 RS-232 Interface Specification

The following shows the RS-232 interface specifications.

3.2.1 RS-232 connector specifications

The following shows the specifications of the RS-232 connector that connects the Q series C24 to an external device.

1

4

5

2

3

Full-duplex communication

Half-duplex communication

8

9

6

7

Pin number

Signal abbreviation

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

RI(CI)

Signal name

Carrier detect

Receive data

Send data

Data terminal ready

Signal ground

Dataset ready

Request to send

Clear to send

Call Indicate

C24

Signal direction

External device

(1) The control signals are described below. (The pin numbers of the connector are enclosed in parentheses.)

1) CD signal (1)

• The Q series C24 operates according to the setting CD terminal check (see

Section 8.4.5) of the Q series C24.

CD terminal check enabled CD terminal check disabled

• The Q series C24 performs send and receive processing when the CD signal (receive carrier detection) is ON.

• If the CD signal is turned off during data communication, the Q series C24 initializes the transmission sequence.

• The Q series C24 performs send and receive processing regardless of the ON/OFF status of the CD signal.

• Data communications is possible with an external device that cannot turn the CD signal ON/OFF.

See Chapter 8 of User's Manual (Application) Setting impossible.

2) RD signal

This is a signal to receive data.

3) SD signal

This is a signal to send data.

3 - 3 3 - 3

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

4) DTR signal (4)

• When communicating data using the non procedure protocol, the Q series

C24 turns on or off (on when data is receivable) depending on the amount of unused memory in the OS area allocated for receive data storage, if

DTR/DSR control is being performed.

Read the receive data from the sequence program, as the receive data is stored in the OS area when the DTR signal is OFF.

If DTR/DSR control is not implements, the DTR signal is always ON.

• If an MC protocol or bidirectional protocol is performing data communication, the Q series C24 turns ON when communications is enabled.

5) DSR signal (6)

• During DTR/DSR control, if this signal is OFF, the Q series C24 does not send data to the external device.

Be sure that this signal is always turned ON when the external device is ready to receive.

• If DTR/DSR control is not implemented, the DSR signal status is ignored.

6) RS signal (7)

• The Q series C24 turns ON/OFF the RS signal as shown below.

• When the communication system is full-duplex communications, if the Q series

C24 ready signal (X1E) is ON, the Q series C24 turns ON the RS signal.

• When the communication system is half-duplex communications, when the

Q series C24 sends data to an external device, it turns ON the RS signal.

• The RS signal is not turned OFF even when the receive data cannot be stored in the Q series C24.

7) CS signal (8)

• The Q series C24 does not send data to an external device when this signal is OFF.

• Be sure that this signal is always turned ON when the external device is ready to receive.

8) RI signal (9)

• The RI signal is used when the modem status is monitored on the Q series

C24 side. It should be connected as needed. The RI signal is not needed to be connected when the modem is not connected.

(2) The ON and OFF states of each signal indicate the following conditions:

(Output side) (Input side)

ON ……… 5 V DC to 15 V DC, 3 V DC to 15 V DC

OFF ……… –5 V DC to –15 V DC, –3 V DC to –15 V DC

(3) Interface connector

The Q series C24 uses the following type of RS-232 interface connector.

9-pin D sub (female) screw fixing type

Use one of the following as a connector shell for the connection cable of the Q series C24 side.

• 3M

Plug model: 8209-6009

• Tyco Electronics AMP K.K.

Plug model: 747904-2

Shell model: 3702-2209 M2.6

Shell model: 747515 or 174469-2

3 - 4 3 - 4

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

REMARK

(1) Confirmation of RS-232 control signal status

The control signal status of DTR, DSR, RS, and CD can be confirmed during data communication by the RS-232 control signal status storage area (address

254

H

, 264

H

) of the GX Configurator-SC or Q series C24 buffer memory.

Buffer memory address

Bit position CH1 side

254

H

CH2 side

264

H b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 to b15

1 System area for QJ71C24 (-R2)

RS

DSR

DTR

CD

CS

1

RI

(2) Designation of RS and DTR signal status

When the Q series it turned on or off, the on and off states of the RS and DTR signals can be designated when the buffer memory of the RS and DTR signal status designation area (address: 92

H

, 132

H

) for the corresponding bit is turned on or off by the RS signal or DTR signal.

1 2 3

Buffer memory address 92

H

/132

H b15 b3 b2 b1 b0

1/0 1/0

[Default 0005

H

]

System

RS

DTR

1:ON

0:OFF

1 The RS signal is controlled by the Q series C24 in the following cases. (Ignore setting contents.)

• When data is communicated with half-duplex communication

• When communication time and the RS and CS signals are controlled by the modem function

2 The DTR signal is controlled by the Q series C24 in the following cases. (Ignore setting contents.)

• When the DTR and DSR signals are controlled

• When data is communicated by the modem function

3 After writing in the buffer memory, a lag of 0 to 20 ms occurs until it is reflected in the signal.

POINT

Be sure to control the RS and DTR signals with the Q series C24. Control of the RS and DTR signals by the user is a prime factor for data communication errors.

3.2.2 RS-232 cable specification

• Use a 15 m (49.21 ft.), or shorter, cable conforming to the RS-232 standard as the

RS-232 cable.

(Recommended cable)

7/0. 127 P HRV-SV… : Designates the number of pairs. (For 13 pairs 7/0.127

13P HRV-SV)

(Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd)

3 - 5 3 - 5

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.3 RS-422/485 Interface Specifications

The following shows the RS-422/485 interface specification.

3.3.1 RS-422/485 terminal block specifications

The following shows the specifications of the RS-422 connector and RS-422/485 terminal block that connect to an external device.

(FG)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

QJ71C24N-R4

SG

SDA

SDB

Signal abbreviation

Signal name

Signal direction

C24

External device

(FG)

(FG)

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

FG

Send data (+)

Send data (–)

Receive data (+)

Receive data (–)

Signal ground

Frame ground

Frame ground

QJ71C24N

QJ71C24

(1) The following describes the control signals.

1) SDA, SDB signals

These are signals to send data from the Q series C24 to the external device.

2) RDA, RDB signals

These are signals for the Q series C24 to receive data from the external device.

(2) The following shows the function block diagrams.

(RS-422/485 interface)

Send data

+

SDA

SDB

1

Receive data

+

RDA

RDB

1 The following shows the terminal resistor connection.

Connect the terminal resistor according to Section 4.4.2 or the User's Manual

(Hardware) of the Q series C24 used.

3 - 6 3 - 6

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.3.2 RS-422/485 cable specifications

The following shows the RS-422/485 cable specification.

(1) Use a 1200 m (3937 ft.), or shorter, cable that satisfies the following specification for the RS-422/485 cable (cable to connect the Q series C24 terminal block).

(2) Make the total distance within 1200 m (3937 ft.) when two or more device are connected in a 1:n or m:n configuration.

(3) The RS-422/485 cable specification is shown below.

Item

Cable type

Number of pairs

Conductor resistance (20 C

°

)

Insulation resistance

Dielectric strength

Electrostatic capacitance (1 kHz)

Characteristic impedance (100 kHz)

Description

Shielded cable

3P

88.0

/km or less

10000 M - km or more

500 V DC, 1 minute

60nF/km or less on average

110 ± 10

(Recommended cable)

SPEV (SB)-MPC-0.2 3P ..... (MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, Ltd.)

SPEV (SB)-0.2 3P

..............

(MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, Ltd.)

SPEV (SB)-MPC-0.2 3P and SPEV (SB)-0.2 3P have the same electrical characteristics, but different external diameter and internal wire colors.

3 - 7 3 - 7

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.3.3 Precautions when transferring data using RS-422/485 circuit

The following precautions must be observed when transferring data with an external device through the Q series C24 RS-422/485 interface.

Take the following into account when the transferring data with the external device.

(1) Error receive data countermeasures at external device during RS-

422/485 connection

If the external device may receive erroneous data, install a pull-up or pull-down resistor to the external device as follows.

Installing a pull-up or pull-down resistor (resistance value criteria: approx. 4.7 k

1/4 W) can prevent the reception of erroneous data.

RDA

4.7k

1/4W

RDB

Terminating resistor

4.7k

1/4W

+

-

Receive data

External device

POINT

When there is a pull-up or pull-down resistor at the external device, erroneous data is not received.

REMARK

The following describes the case when a pull-up or pull-down resistor is not installed to the external device.

When no station is sending, the send line becomes high impedance and noise, etc.

may cause the send line to change and the external device to receive erroneous data.

In this case, there is probably a parity error or framing error.

Therefore, skip the erroneous data.

Since the first data during data reception is fixed in the following cases, also skip the receive data until the fixed head data is received.

• When using an MC protocol to send data, the first data is fixed according to the frame and format the user uses.

• When transferring data using user frames with non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol, the first data is selected according to the user frame that the user registers to the Q series C24.

3 - 8 3 - 8

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

(2) RS-422/485 interface operation

1) RS-422-485 interface construction

The following illustration shows the construction of the Q series C24 RS-

422/485 interface driver (send)/receiver (receive).

SDR

Driver

Send data

SDB

RDA

Output control input ( 1)

Receiver

Receive data

RDB

1 "Output control input" (also called send gate) of the driver (send) section of the illustration at the left determines whether or not data from

SDA/SDB is output to the outside.

2) RS-422/485 interface operation

When the "Output control input" in the illustration above is ON, the interface enters the low impedance state (state in which data can be sent).

When the "Output control input" is OFF, the interface enters the high impedance state (state in which data cannot be sent).

3) Timing to start sending and to complete the transmission processing for the Q series C24

• Timing to start sending

During data transmission, the Q series C24 outputs the actual data after sending a mark for 2 characters, or longer, after the high impedance set by the operations described in 1) and 2) above is reset.

• Transmission processing completion timing

The following times are necessary as H/W gate OFF time from the time that data transmission is completed until transmission processing is completed

(the state changes to the high impedance state). (The transmission rate set in the Q Series C24 is the object.)

When the transmission rate is 600 bps or higher

When the transmission rate

: Time for 0 to 1 bits of data to be sent is 50 bps, 300 bps : several ms

(Output control input)

External device

Q series C24

Data

Data

(Output control input)

Outputs a mark for 2 characters, or longer

Data send time range

"Output control input"

ON time range

(Low impedance state)

Q series C24 is in the data transmission and data reception enable status

H/W gate OFF time

(See explanation above)

"Output control input"

OFF time range

(High impedance state)

Q series C24 is in the data reception enable state.

3 - 9 3 - 9

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) When the external device and the Q series C24 connected in n:1 and m:n configurations

When the send signal of each device is connected as shown below, if the "Output control input" is turned ON at two or more devices, the relevant devices output (send) data at the same time.

For the external device to transfer data normally,

• "Output control input" must be turned ON only when sending data.

• "Output control input" must be turned OFF when not sending data.

External device or converter

SDA

Send data

SDB

Output control input

RDA

Receive data

RDB

SDA

Send data

SDB

RDA

Output control input

RDB

Receive data

Q series C24

SDA

Send data

SDB

RDA

Output control input

RDB

Receive data

Q series C24

(2) When the Q series C24 is used, if operation of the two interfaces is linked (see Section 4.5.2 (2)), the time to send one character becomes the Q series C24 H/W gate OFF time.

(The Q series C24 turns OFF the gate after the one-character send time.)

3 - 10 3 - 10

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.4 Serial Communication Module Function List

The following table lists the functions of the Q series C24.

(

Communication using MC protocol

1)

Communication with

ASCII code

Function

Communication with QnA compatible 3C frame

Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame

Communication with QnA compatible 2C frame

Communication with A compatible 1C frame

Communication with binary code

Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame

Batch read/write in bit/word units

Read/write of device memory

Monitoring of device memory

Batch read/write of multiple blocks

Read/write by extension designation

Accessing other stations via network system

Reading/writing from/to the buffer memory of the Q series C24

Reading/writing from/to the buffer memory of intelligent function modules

Reading/writing from/to sequence program files

Monitoring the PLC CPUs (PLC CPU monitoring function)

Formats 1 to 4 exist for each.

Format 5

(

Communication using non procedure protocol

2)

Status control of the PLC CPUs (remote RUN/STOP, etc.)

Turning on/off input signals of the Q series C24 from an external device (global function)

Data transmission from a PLC CPU to an external device (on-demand function)

Data transmission/reception in any format

Data transmission/reception using user frames

Data reception by interrupt programs

Monitoring the PLC CPUs (PLC CPU monitoring function)

ASCII data transmission/reception by ASCII-BIN conversion

Data transmission/reception by specifying transparent code

Communication using bidirectional

Data transmission/reception in any format

Data reception by interrupt programs

ASCII data transmission/reception by ASCII-BIN conversion protocol ( 1)

Data transmission/reception by specifying transparent code

Communication via public network, etc.

(modem function)

Communication with MC Protocol/non procedure protocol/bidirectional protocol

PLC access from GX Developer

Transmission control

DC code control (including Xon/Xoff control)

DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control

Reference section

Chapter 5

Reference Manual

Chapter 6

User's Manual

(Application)

Chapter 7

User's Manual

(Application)

Independent/linked operation of each interface Section 4.5.2

Monitoring/testing of initial settings and setting values with utility software

Supporting multiple CPU system

Remote password check

Chapter 8

Section 2.10 of

Reference Manual

Section 3.3.3 of

User's Manual

(Application)

1 If the external device is capable of incorporating a program and communicating data using a protocol of the MELSEC PLC, it is possible to access the PLC CPU using the above mentioned MC protocol. Furthermore, it is possible to transfer any data using the bidirectional protocol.

2 When it is necessary to communicate using the protocol of an external device, such as a measuring instrument or a bar code reader, the above-mentioned non procedure protocol is used for data communication. In that case, the processing of the communication data becomes easier by using the user frame communication function.

3 - 11 3 - 11

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.5 Dedicated Instruction List

The following table lists dedicated instructions that can be used in the Q series C24.

Classification Instruction

ONDEMAND

OUTPUT

INPUT

BIDOUT

BIDIN

For data communication

SPBUSY

CSET

Setting value registration/ reading

BUFRCVS

PRR

PUTE

GETE

PLC CPU monitoring instructions

CSET

Initial value setting instruction

Mode switching instruction

UINI

Description

Sends data with the on-demand function

Sends designated number of data

Receives data (reads received data)

Sends data

Receives data (reads received data)

Reads the status of data sent/received with each dedicated instruction

Allows clearing data received up to the present without interrupting the data transmission processing.

Receives data with an interrupt program (reads received data)

Sends data with user frames using transmission schedule table

Stores user frames in flash ROM of the Q series

C24 (writing)

Reads user frames stored in flash ROM of the Q series C24

Performs PLC CPU monitoring registration

Cancels PLC CPU monitoring

For PLC

CPU monitoring function

Sets the unit for the number of communication data (words/bytes) and the data communication area

Changes the mode, transmission specifications and host station No. of the Q series C24.

: Available : Not available

Protocol

MC Non Bi

Reference section

Chapter 9

Chapter 17 of

User's Manual

(Application )

Abbreviations used in the

Protocol column

MC : MC protocol

Non : Non procedure protocol

Bi : Bidirectional protocol

3 - 12 3 - 12

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.6 Utility Package (GX Configurator-SC) Function List

The following table lists the utility package function for the Q series C24.

( : Protocol for which setting is valid)

Function

Auto refresh setting

User frame

Refresh the Q series C24's error codes and set devices on the PLC

CPU side.

Register the user frame in the flash ROM.

Data for modem initialization Register the data for modem initialization in the flash ROM.

Data for modem connection Register the data for model connection in the flash ROM.

Modem function system setting

CHn Transmission control and others system setting

CHn MC protocol system setting

Register the system setting values for model function in the flash

ROM.

Set the transmission specifications with the other device.

(DTR/DSR control, DC code control, communication method, data communication monitoring timer value, etc.)

Assign the buffer memory for on-demand function, set the user frame number, etc.

CHn Non procedure system setting

Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the non procedure protocol, and change the setting values, etc.

System setting

CHn Bidirectional system setting

Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the bidirectional protocol, and change the setting values, etc.

CHn PLC CPU monitoring system setting

Set the PLC CPU monitoring function.

CHn Transmission user frame No.

designation system setting

Set the user frame number to be transmitted, etc.

System setting default

Reset the setting values in the buffer memory to their default values.

Write the setting values in the buffer memory to the flash ROM.

System setting write

Flash ROM write allow/prohibit designation

Set whether to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM.

X · Y monitor/test Perform the monitoring/testing of I/O signals to/from the PLC CPU.

Modem function monitor/test Monitor the execution status of the modem function.

CHn Transmission control and others monitor/test

CHn MC protocol monitor

Monitor the status of interface control signals, values set from the

GX Developer, etc.

CHn Non procedure monitor/test

Monitor the data communication result, I/O signal status, and setting values in the buffer memory.

Monitor

CHn Bidirectional monitor

Monitor the setting values and operating status of the PLC CPU monitoring function.

CHn PLC CPU monitoring monitor

CHn User frame

No. designation monitor for transmission

Monitor the setting value for user frame to be transmitted.

Monitor/test others

ERR LED off

Non procedure protocol receive data clear

Monitor the data reception result, error occurrence status, etc.

Turn off the ERR LEDs on the front face of the module.

Clear the currently received data.

MC

Nonprocedure protocol

Bidirectional protocol

Explanation page

Section 4.6

Section 8.4.1

Section 8.4.2

Section 8.4.3

Section 8.4.4

Section 8.4.5

Section 8.4.6

Section 8.4.7

Section 8.4.8

Section 8.4.9

Section 8.4.10

Section 8.4.11

Section 8.4.11

Section 8.4.12

Section 8.6.1

Section 8.6.2

Section 8.6.3

Section 8.6.4

Section 8.6.5

Section 8.6.6

Section 8.6.7

Section8.6.8

Section 8.6.9

Section 8.6.10

Section 8.7

Remarks

Can be used via online operation.

Can be used via offline operation.

Can be used only via online operation.

3 - 13 3 - 13

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.7 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Serial Communication Modules

The following table lists the parameters that are set using the GX Developer.

Reference section Parameter setting item Parameter description Set data

I/O assignment setting

Switch setting

Interrupt pointer setting

Remote password settings

Performs I/O assignment for the Q series C24 and

Type

Model name enables the switch settings

Points listed below.

Start X/Y

Switch 1

CH1 Transmission setting

CH1 Communication rate setting

Switch 2 CH1 Communication protocol setting

CH2 Transmission setting

Switch 3

Switch 4

Switch 5

CH2 Communication rate setting

CH2 Communication protocol setting

Station number setting

Interrupt pointer Start No.

Performs setting for

CPU side reading reception date with

Intelligent interrupt programs.

module side

Interrupt pointer No. of units

Start I/O No.

Start SI No.

Sets the remote password and the Q series C24 that performs the check.

Password settings

Password Model name active module settings

Start XY

Section 4.5.1

Section 4.5.2

Section 4.5.3

Section 3.3.3 of

User's Manual

(Application)

3 - 14 3 - 14

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.8 List of Input/Output Signals for the PLC CPU

This section describes the input/output signals of the Q series C24.

For assignments of the input/output signals shown in the table below, it is assumed that the Q series C24 is mounted in slot 0 of the basic base unit.

Device numbers starting with X indicate input signals from the Q series C24 to the PLC

CPU, and device numbers starting with Y indicate output signals from the PLC CPU to the Q series C24.

The following table lists the input/output signals for the PLC CPU.

Reference section

Device number

Signal description

X0

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

X7

X8

X9

XA

XB

XC

XD

XE

XF

X10

X11

X12

1

1

1

2

2

3

1

1

1

2

2

3

6

6

6

CH1 Transmission normal completion

ON: Normal completion

CH1 Transmission abnormal completion

ON: Abnormal completion

CH1 Transmission processing

ON: Transmission in progress

CH1 Reception data read request

ON: Requesting read

CH1 Reception abnormal detection

ON: Abnormal detection

(For system)

CH1 Mode switching

ON: Switching

CH2 Transmission normal completion

ON: Normal Completion

CH2 Transmission abnormal completion

ON: Abnormal completion

CH2 Transmission processing

ON: Transmission in progress

CH2 Reception data read request

ON: Requesting read

CH2 Reception abnormal detection

ON: Abnormal detection

(For system)

CH2 Mode switching

ON: Switching

CH1 ERR. occurrence

ON: Error occurring

CH2 ERR. occurrence

ON: Error occurring

Modem initialization completion

ON: Initialization completed

Dialing

ON: Dial in progress

Connection

ON: Connection in progress

X13

X14

X15

X16

6

6

6

6

Initialization/connection abnormal completion

ON: Initialization/ connection abnormally completed

Modem disconnection complete

ON: Disconnection completed

Notification normal completion

ON: Normal completion

Notification abnormal completion

ON: Abnormal completion

X17 1 Flash ROM read completion ON: Completed

X18 1 Flash ROM write completion ON: Completed

X19

Flash ROM system setting write completion

ON: Completed

Reference section

Section 8.6.4

Section 8.6.5

Section 8.6.6

Section 6.1

Section 7.1

Section 8.6.5

Section 8.6.6

Application,

Chapter 15

Section 8.6.4

Section 8.6.5

Section 8.6.6

Section 6.1

Section 7.1

Section 8.6.5

Section 8.6.6

Application,

Chapter 15

Section 8.6.10

Section 10.1.2

Section 8.6.2

Application,

Chapter 3

Device number

Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y7

Y8

Y9

YA

YB

YC

YD

Y17

Y18

Y19

CH1 Transmission request

ON: Requesting transmission

CH1 Reception data read completion

ON: Data read completed

CH1 Mode switching request

ON: Requesting switch

CH2 Transmission request

ON: Requesting transmission

CH2 Reception data read completion

ON: Data read completed

CH2 Mode switching request

ON: Requesting switch

Flash ROM read request ON: Requesting

Flash ROM write request ON: Requesting

Flash ROM system setting write request

ON: Requesting

Signal description

Use prohibited

Use prohibited

YE

YF

Y10 6

Y11 6

Y12 6

CH1 ERR.clear request

ON: Requesting error clear

CH2 ERR. clear request

ON: Requesting error clear

Modem initialization request (standby request)

ON: Requesting initialization

Connection request

ON: Requesting connection

Modem disconnection request

ON: Requesting disconnection

Y13

Y14 6

Notification- issued request

OFF: Requesting notification issuance

Y15

Y16

Use prohibited

Use prohibited

Application,

Chapter 15

Application,

Chapter 15

Section 8.6.10

Section 10.1.2

Section 8.6.2

Application,

Chapter 3

3 - 15 3 - 15

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Device number

X1A

X1B

X1C

Signal description

CH1 Global signal ON: Output instructed

CH2 Global signal ON: Output instructed

System setting default completion

ON: Completed

(For system) X1D

X1E 4 Q series C24 ready ON: Accessible

X1F 5

Watchdog timer error (WDT error)

ON : Module error occurred

OFF: Module being normally operated

Reference section

Section 3.10,

Reference

Section 8.4.11

Device number

Y1A

Y1B

Y1C

Y1D

Y1E

Y1F

Signal description

Use prohibited

System setting default request

ON: Requesting

Use prohibited

Reference section

Section 8.4.11

1 The device does not turn on/off by execution of a dedicated instruction when a function that corresponds to the input signal is used.

2 The device does turn on/off by execution of a dedicated instruction when a function that corresponds to the input signal is used (from ON to OFF: Data read completed).

3 The mode switching signal (X6/XD) turns ON at mode switching, receive clear, user frame receive designation or transmission sequence initialization.

While the mode switching signal (X6/XD) is ON, do not issue a communication request to the target interface.

(The communication processing of the Q series C24 is stopped while the mode switching signal (X6/XD) is ON.)

4 The Q series C24 ready signal indicates whether or not it is possible to access the

Q series C24 from the PLC CPU.

Use it as a interlock signal for a sequence program.

(It turns on about one second after turning the power ON and reset operation.)

5 Restart the PLC CPU when the watchdog timer error signal is turned on (reset the power and the CPU module).

6 QJ71C24N-R4 cannot be used. (Related to modem function signal.)

• X10 to X16: For system

• Y10 to Y16: Use prohibited

IMPORTANT

(1) Of the input/output signals to the PLC CPU, the signals marked with "Use prohibited" must not be output (ON).

If any of the "Use prohibited" signals is output, the PLC system may malfunction.

(2) When the modem function is not used or the QJ71C24N-R4 is used, X10 to

X16 are used for the system and Y10 to Y16 cannot be used.

POINT

(1) The input/output signals shown in this section are the signals used when a QnA series serial communication module program is utilized for the Q series C24

(see Section 2 in appendix).

In the QCPU, the on/off of input/output signals to intelligent function modules is executed with a dedicated instruction.

It is not necessary to turn the signals on/off by the sequence program, except for the input/output signals shown in the programming of each function reference page.

(2) When a program for a QnA series serial communication module is also utilized for the Q series C24, it is recommended to replace the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown on the corresponding function reference page of each manual for the Q series C24.

3 - 16 3 - 16

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

3.9 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory

This section describes the buffer memory.

(1) Configuration of the buffer memory

A buffer memory consists of a user area and a system area, as shown below.

(a) User area

1) This is the area where users write/read data.

2) The user area consists of areas for storing setting values for data communication, for actual data communication, and for storing communication status and communication error information.

3) Data read/write to the user area should be performed following the instructions in the corresponding detailed reference page.

(b) System area

This area is used by the Q series C24 system.

(2) List of buffer memory assignments

A buffer memory is configured with 16 bits per address.

Name, default value, etc. of each address of the buffer memory is shown in the lists on the following pages.

1) Abbreviations in the target Protocol column

MC : MC protocol

Non: Non procedure protocol

Bi : Bidirectional protocol

2) Meaning of symbols shown in the target Protocol column

The following symbols are assigned to protocols related to the setting values of a corresponding area and to areas used for controlled with user settings, and indicate what kind of access is allowed to the area in question.

RW : Area where it is possible to read/write from/to the PLC CPU and an external device.

R : Area where only reading is possible from the PLC CPU and an external device.

– : System area used by the system or area not used by the corresponding protocol.

3) Meaning of symbols shown in the Registration allowed/not allowed column

Indicates whether or not it is possible to use a value in the corresponding area by registering it to the flash ROM of the Q series C24.

Allowed : Area that can be registered and used.

Not allowed : Area that cannot be registered.

IMPORTANT

Do not write data in the "System area" of the buffer memory.

If data is written to any of the system areas, the PLC system may malfunction.

Some of the user areas are partially system areas. Care must be taken when performing read/write to the buffer memory.

3 - 17 3 - 17

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) Use the FROM/TO instructions or other applicable commands to access the buffer memory shown in this section when a program for a QnA series serial communication module is utilized for the Q series C24 (see Section 2 in

Appendix).

In QCPU, the access to the buffer memory of an intelligent function module is executed with a dedicated instruction.

It is not necessary to access directly using the FROM/TO instructions or other instructions from the sequence program, except when accessing the buffer memory as shown in the programming on each function reference page.

(2) When a program for a QnA series serial communication module is utilized for the Q series C24, it is recommended to replace the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown on the corresponding function reference page of each manual for the Q series C24.

(3) The following initial settings (changing the default values) for data communication must be performed by a registration operation using GX

Configurator-SC or by executing the CSET instruction for the sequence program.

1) Initial settings for communication using the MC protocol

• Setting the unit of data length sent by the on-demand function

Word/byte units designation (addresses 150 (96

H

), 310 (136

H

))

• Setting the buffer memory used by the on-demand function

Buffer memory head address designation (addresses 160 (A0

H

), 320

(140

H

))

Data length designation (addresses 161 (A1

H

), 321 (141

H

))

2) Initial settings for communication using the non procedure/bidirectional protocols

• Setting the unit of data length to be sent and received

Word/byte units designation (addresses 150 (96

H

), 310 (136

H

))

• Setting the transmission area

Transmission buffer memory head address designation (addresses 162

(A2

H

), 322 (142

H

))

Transmission buffer memory length designation (addresses 163 (A3

H

),

323 (143

H

))

• Setting the reception area

Receive buffer memory head address designation (addresses 166

(A6

H

), 326 (146

H

))

Receive buffer memory length designation (addresses 167 (A7

H

), 327

(147

H

))

For more details on the registration operation by GX Configurator-SC, see the explanation of the system settings of the corresponding protocol in

Sections 8.4.5 to 8.4.8.

For more details on the CSET instruction, see Section 16.4 of the User's

Manual (Application).

3 - 18 3 - 18

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

6 to 45

(6

H

to 2D

H

)

49

(31

H

)

50

(32

H

)

51

(33

H

)

46

(2E

H

)

47

(2F

H

)

48

(30

H

)

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

0

(0

H

)

2

(2

H

)

3

(3

H

)

4

(4

H

)

5

(5

H

)

52

(34

H

)

53

(35

H

)

54

(36

H

)

55

(37

H

)

1

(1

H

)

Application

For LED and communication error clear

For flash ROM access

For designation of modem function-1

56

(38

H

)

57 to 143

(39

H

to 8F

H

)

Use prohibited

Name

Initial value

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

Communication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off

0: ON, No initialization request

1: OFF, Initialization requested

SD WAIT (b0)

SIO (b1))

C/N (b4)

NAK (b5)

PRO. (b2)

P/S (b3)

For system (b8) to (b15)

ACK. (b6)

NEU. (b7)

Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off

0: ON, No initialization request

1: OFF, Initialization requested

SD WAIT (b0) NAK (b5)

SIO (b1)

PRO. (b2)

ACK. (b6)

NEU. (b7)

P/S (b3)

C/N (b4)

CH2 ERR. (b14)

CH1 ERR. (b15)

For system (b8) to (b13)

Register/read/delete instructions

0: No request

2: Read request

1: Register request

3: Delete request

Frame No. direction

0: No designation Other than 0: Frame No.

Registration/read/delete result storage

0: Normal completion Other than 0: Abnormal completion

Number of data bytes registered designation

0 : No designation

Other than 0: Number of data bytes registered (maximum 80 bytes)

User frame

0 : No designation

Other than 0: Registered data (maximum 80 bytes)

Modem connection channel designation

0: Non 1: CH1

Notification execution designation

0: Do not execute.

1: Execute.

Number of connection retries designation

2: CH2

1 to 5: Number of retries

Connection retry interval designation

90 to 300: Connection retry interval (unit: s)

Initialization/connection timeout designation

1 to 60: Timeout (unit: s)

Number of initialization retries designation

1 to 5: Number of retries

Data No. for initialization designation

0

H

: Send initialization data designated by the designated area of the user frame for transmission.

7D0

H

to 801F: Data No. for initialization

Data No. for connection designation

BB8

H

to 801F

H

: Data No. for connection

GX Developer connection designation

0: Do not connect.

1: Connect.

No - communication interval time designation

0 : Wait infinitely

1 to 120: No communication interval (Waiting time for line disconnection) (unit: min.)

RS · CS control yes/no designation

0: No control 1: Controlled

System area

0

0

0

3

180

60

3

7D0

H

0

30

1

RW

RW

RW

Registration allowed/not allowed

Not allowed

Not allowed

Allowed

Reference section

Section

8.6.10

Section

10.1.1

Section

10.1.2

Section

8.4.1

Section

8.4.2

Section

8.4.11

Section

8.4.12

Section

8.4.2

Section

8.4.3

Section

8.4.4

Chapter 3 of User's

Manual

(Application)

3 - 19 3 - 19

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

144

(90

145

(91

146

(92

(93

H

H

H

147

H

148

(94

149

(95

H

H

)

)

)

)

)

)

Application Name

304

(130

305

(131

306

(132

H

)

307

(133

308

(134

309

(135

H

H

H

H

H

)

)

)

)

)

(

For designation of mode switching

Signal setting

1)

For designation of transmission control

Switching mode no. designation (0001

H

to 0007

H

, 00FF

H

)

0001

H

: MC protocol (format 1) 0005

H

: MC protocol (format 5)

0002

H

: MC protocol (format 2)

0003

H

: MC protocol (format 3)

0004

H

: MC protocol (format 4)

0006

0007

00FF

H

H

H

: Non procedure protocol

: Bidirectional protocol

: GX Developer connection

Transmission specifications after switching designation

Designates transmission specifications (below) after switching when b15 of this area is 1 (ON).

Operation setting (b0)

Data bit (b1)

0: Independent

0: 7 bit

1: Link

1: 8 bit

Parity bit (b2)

Odd/even parity (b3)

Stop bit (b4)

Sum check code (b5)

Write during RUN (b6)

0: No

0: Odd

0: 1 bit

0: No

0: Prohibited

Setting modification (b7) 0: Prohibited

Communication rate (b8 to b11)

For system (b12 to b14)

1: Allowed

50 bps to 230400 bps

All 0

Transmission specifications after switching (b15) designation

0: Match settings in GX Developer

1: Match settings in this area

RS and DTR signal status designation

0: Off 1: On

RS signal (b0)

DTR signal (b2)

For system (b1), (b3) to (b15)

DTR/DSR(ER/DR), DC control designation

• Transmission control (b0)

0: DTR/DSR control 1: DC code control

• DC1/DC3 control (b8)

0: No control 1: Controlled

• DC2/DC4 control (b9)

0: No control 1: Controlled

1: Yes

1: Even

1: 2 bit

1: Yes

1: Allowed

DC1/DC3(Xon/Xoff) code designation

• DC1 code (b0 to b7)

00

H

to FF

H

: DC1 code

• DC3 code (b8 to b15)

00

H

to FF

H

: DC3 code

DC2/DC4 code designation

• DC2 code (b0 to b7)

00

H

to FF

H

: DC2 code

• DC4 code (b8 to b15)

00

H

to FF

H

: DC4 code

Initial value

0

0005

H

0

1311

H

1412

H

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

RW

RW

RW

Registration allowed/not allowed

Not allowed

Section

4.5.2

Chapter 15 of User's

Manual

(Application)

Allowed

Allowed

Reference section

Section 3.2.1

Section

8.4.5

Chapter 7 of User's

Manual

(Application)

150

(96

H

)

151

(97

H

)

310

(136

H

)

311

(137

H

)

For designation of communication control

Word/byte units designation

0: Word units 1: Byte units

CD terminal check designation (for RS-232)

0: Check 1: No check

0

1

RW

Chapters 6

Chapter 7

Section

8.4.5

Section

3.2.1

Section

8.4.5

3 - 20 3 - 20

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

152

(98

H

)

Application

312

(138

H

)

For designation of communication control

153

(99

(9A

(9C

157

(9D

158

(9E

(9F

H

154

H

155

(9B

H

156

H

H

H

159

H

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

Communication system designation (for RS-232)

0: Full duplex communication

Name

1: Half-duplex communication

313

(139

H

)

314

(13A

H

)

315

(13B

H

)

For half- duplex communica-tions control designation (RS-

232)

316

(13C

317

318

(13E

H

(13D

H

)

H

)

)

For designation of data communica-tion time monitoring

Simultaneous transmission priority/non-priority designation

0: Priority

Other than 0: Non-priority (transmission wait time, unit: 100 ms)

Retransmission time transmission method designation

0: Do not resend.

1: Resend.

Simultaneously transmission data valid/invalid designation

• Receive data valid/invalid (b0)

0: Valid 1: Invalid

• Transmission data valid/invalid (b8)

0: Valid 1: Invalid

No-reception monitoring time (timer 0) designation

0

H

: Wait infinitely

28

H

to FA0

H

: Monitoring time (unit: byte)

Response monitoring time (timer 1) designation

0

H

: Wait infinitely

1

H

to BB8

H

: Monitoring time (unit: 100 ms)

Transmission monitoring time (timer 2) designation

0

H

: Wait infinitely

1

H

to BB8

H

: Monitoring time (unit: 100 ms)

319

(13F

H

)

Use prohibited System area

Initial value

0

0

0

H

Applicable protocol

MC Non

RW

RW

Bi

RW

32

H

(5 sec.)

708

H

(3 min.)

RW

RW

RW

160

(A0

161

(A1

162

(A2

H

H

H

163

(A3

H

)

164

(A4

H

)

165

(A5

H

)

)

)

)

320

(140

H

)

321

(141

H

)

322

(142

H

)

For designation of on-demand function

For designation of transmission area

323

(143

H

)

324

(144

H

)

325

(145

H

)

For data reception

Buffer memory head address designation

(400 to 1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

Data length designation

(0000

Transmission buffer memory head address designation

(400

H

H

H

to 3400

to 1AFF

H

H

,

)

2600

H

to 3FFF

H

H

)

)

Transmission buffer memory length designation

(0001

H

to 1A00

H

)

Received data count designation

0001

H

to 33FE

H

: Received data count

Receive complete code designation

FFFF

H

: No designation for receive complete code

0

H

to FF

H

: Receive complete code

CH1:

400

H

CH2:

800

H

0

CH1:

400

H

CH2:

800

H

200

H

RW

1FF

H

200

H

RW

0D0A

H

:

(CR+LF)

— RW

CH1:

600

H

CH2:

A00

H

RW

166

(A6

H

)

167

(A7

H

)

168

(A8

H

)

169

(A9

H

)

170

(AA

H

)

171

(AB

H

)

172

(AC

H

)

173

(AD

H

)

326

(146

H

) For designation of reception area

327

(147

H

)

328

(148

H

)

329

(149

H

)

330

(14A

H

)

331

(14B

H

)

332

(14C

H

)

For data reception

For designation of on-demand user frame

333

(14D

H

)

174 to

177

(AE

H

to

B1

H

)

178 to

181

(B2

H

to

B5

H

)

334 to

337

(14E

H

to

151

H

)

For designation of receive user frame

338 to

341

(152

H

to

155

H

)

Receive buffer memory head address designation

(400

H

to 1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

H

)

Receive buffer memory length designation

(0001

H

to 1A00

H

)

Receive data clear request

1: Requested 0: No request

First frame No. designation 1st

0: No designation

First frame No. designation 2nd

0: No designation

Last frame No. designation 1st

Other than 0: Designated

Other than 0: Designated

0: No designation

Last frame No. designation 2nd

0: No designation

Other than 0: Designated

Other than 0: Designated

User frame use enable/disable designation

0: Do not use 1: Use

2: Data communication possible (Q series C24 set)

First frame No. designation 1st (1st to 4th)

0

H

: No designation 1

H

Last frame No. designation (1st to 4th)

0

H

: No designation

0: No transmission designation

1

H

or more: Head frame No.

or more: Last frame No.

1 or more: Output frame No.

0

0

1: 0D

2: 0A

3: 0

4: 0

H

H

H

H

RW

RW

RW

Registration allowed/not allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Not allowed

Allowed

Reference section

Chapter 7

Section

8.4.5

Section

8.4.8

Chapter 8 of User's

Manual

(Application)

Section

8.4.5

Chapter 6 of User's

Manual

(Application)

Section

8.4.6

Reference

Manual

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Section

8.4.5

Section

8.4.7

Section 8.7

Section

8.4.6

Chapters 9 and 10 of

User's

Manual

(Application)

Section

8.4.7

Chapters 9 and 11 of

User's

Manual

(Application)

3 - 21 3 - 21

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

287

(11F

288

(120

289

H

H

)

)

(121

H

)

290 to

303

(122

H

to

12F

H

)

447

(1BF

448

(1C0

449

H

H

)

)

(1C1

H

)

450 to

511

(1C2

H

to

1EF

H

)

Application

For designation of transparent code

For conversion designation

Use prohibited System area

Name

182

(B6

H

)

342

(156

H

)

User frame being transmitted

183

(B7

H

)

184

(B8

H

)

185

(B9

H

)

186 to

285

(BA

H

to

11D

H

)

286

(11E

H

)

343

(157

H

)

344

(158

H

)

345

(159

H

)

346 to

445

(15A

H

to

1BD

H

)

For user frame being transmitted designation

446

(1BE

H

)

For designation of transmission wait time

User frame being transmitted

0 : Not send

1 to 100: User frame being transmitted (nth)

CR/LF output designation

0: Do not send.

1: Send.

Output head pointer designation

0: No designation

Output count designation

0: No designation

1 to 100: Send from nth

1 to 100: Output n

Output frame No. designation (A maximum of 100 can be specified)

Message wait time designation

0: No wait time 1

H

to F

H

: Wait time (unit: 10 ms)

Transmission transparent code designation 1st

0000

H

: No designation

Other than 0000

H

: Designated (below)

• Transparent code (b0 to b7)

00

H

to FF

H

: Transparent code

• Additional code (b8 to b15)

00

H

to FF

H

: Additional code

Receive transparent code designation

0000

H

: No designation

Other than 0000

H

: Designated (below)

• Transparent code (b0 to b7)

00

H

to FF

H

: Transparent code

• Additional code (b8 to b15)

00

H

to FF

H

: Additional code

ASCII-BIN conversion designation

0: No conversion 1: Convert

512

(200

H

)

For confirmation of station No.

setting status

Station No. (switch setting)

513

(201

514

(202

H

H

)

)

LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side

0: Turned off/OFF, no error 1: Turned on/ON, error

SD WAIT (b0)

SIO (b1)

PRO. (b2)

P/S (b3)

For system (b8) to (b15)

C/N (b4)

NAK (b5)

ACK. (b6)

NEU. (b7)

For confirmation of LED ON status and communication error status

LED ON status and communication error status on CH2 side

0: Turned off/OFF, no error

SD WAIT (b0)

SIO (b1)

PRO. (b2)

P/S (b3)

C/N (b4)

For system (b8) to (b13)

1: Turned on/ON, error

NAK (b5)

ACK. (b6)

NEU. (b7)

CH2.ERR. (b14)

CH1 ERR. (b15)

Initial value

0

0

0

Depends on parameter setting

Depends on module status

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

RW

R

RW

R

RW

Registration allowed/not allowed

Not allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Reference section

Section

8.4.7

Chapters 9 and 11 of

User's

Manual

(Application)

Section

8.4.6

Section

8.4.5

Chapter 12 of User's

Manual

(Application)

Not allowed

Section 4.3

Section

4.5.2

Section

8.6.9

3 - 22 3 - 22

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

Application Name

515

(203

516

(204

H

H

)

)

517 to 541

(205

H

to 21D

H

)

For confirmation of switch setting and mode switching

For confirmation of user frame

Switch setting error and mode switching error status

0: No error

Other than 0: Switch setting error and mode switching error

CH1 Communication protocol setting No. (b0)

0: Normal 1: Error

CH1 Communication rate setting (b1)

0: Normal 1: Error

CH1 Setting change prohibit time mode switching (b3)

0: Normal 1: Error

CH2 Communication protocol setting No. (b4)

0: Normal 1: Error

CH2 Communication rate setting (b5)

0: Normal 1: Error

CH2 Setting change prohibit time mode switching (b7)

0: Normal 1: Disable

Setting station No. (b14)

0: Normal 1: Out of range

Linked operation setting (b15)

0: Normal 1: Error

Number of registered user frames

0

H

: No registration 1 or more: Number of registered frames

User frame registration status (for confirmation of registration No.)

0: No registration 1: Registered

Bit corresponding to registration No. is 0(ON)/1(OFF).

Registration No.3E8

H

(1000) : Address 205

H

(b0) to

Registration No. 4AF

H

(1199) : Address 211

H

(b7)

Initial value

0

Depends on registration status

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

R

R

542

(51E

H

)

Number of registered default registration frames (for system)

Registration allowed/not allowed

Not allowed

Reference section

Section 4.3

Section

4.5.2

Section

8.6.9

Section

8.6.9

— Not allowed

Section

8.6.9

Section

9.1.2 of

User's

Manual

(Application)

543

(51F

H

)

Use prohibited System area

544

(220

545

(221

546

(222

547

(223

550

(226

H

H

H

H

H

)

)

)

)

)

548 to 549

(224

H

to 225

H

)

For confirmation of flash ROM write result

For confirmation of modem function

Flash ROM system parameters write result

0 : Normal completion

Other than 1 (error code) : Abnormal completion

Modem function error code (error code when modem function is being used)

0 : Normal completion

Other than 1 (error code) : Abnormal completion

Modem function sequence status

0: Idle

1: Waiting for initialization

2: Initializing modem

3: Waiting

4: Checking password

5: Communicating

6: Notification in progress

7: Modem disconnected

8: Callback Request reception waiting

9: Callback Modem disconnect waiting

10: Callback Delay time waiting

11: Callback Reconnecting

12: Callback Rechecking password

Number of data registration for connection

0: No registration 1 or more: Number of registration

Data registration status for connection

(for confirmation of registration No.)

0: No registration 1: Registered

Bit corresponding to registration No. is 0(ON)/1(OFF).

Registration No. BB8

H

(3000) : Address 224

H

(b0) to

Registration No. BD5

H

(3029) : Address 225

H

(b13)

Number of data registration for initialization

0: No registration 1 or more: Number of registrations

0

RW

R

Not allowed

Section

8.6.9

Section

8.6.2

Not allowed Chapter 3 of User's

Manual

(Application)

3 - 23 3 - 23

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

Application Name

Initial value

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

551 to 552

(227

H

to 228

H

)

For confirmation of modem function

553

(229

554

(22A

H

H

)

)

Data registration status for initialization

(for confirmation of registration No.)

0: No registration 1: Registered

Bit corresponding to registration No. is 0(ON)/1(OFF).

Registration No.9C4

H

(2500) : Address 227

H

(b0) to

Registration No. 9E1

H

(2529) : Address 228

H

(b13)

Number of notification execution

0: Not executed

Data storage area 1

1 or more: Number of executions

Notification execution data No.

0 : Notification not executed

BB8

H

or more: Notification executed

(notification execution No.)

System area (use prohibited)

555 to 557

(22B

H

to 22D

H

)

558 to 561

(22E

H

to 231

H

)

562 to 565

(232

H

to 235

H

)

For confirmation of notification status

566 to 569

(236

H

to 239

H

)

570 to 573

(23A

H

to 23D

H

)

574 to 590

(23E

H

to 24E

H

)

Use prohibited

Data storage area 2

Data storage area 3

Data storage area 4

Data storage area 5

System area

0

0

R

R

The configuration of each area is the same as the data storage area 1.

Registration allowed/not allowed

Not allowed

591

(24F

H

)

For confirmation of station No.

setting status

( 3)

Station No. (instruction setting)

592

(250

593

(251

594

(252

595

(253

H

H

H

H

596

(254

H

)

)

)

)

)

608

(260

609

(261

610

(262

611

(263

H

H

H

H

612

(264

H

)

)

)

)

)

For confirmation of transmission control status

Control signal status

Communication protocol status (switch setting)

0: GX Developer connection

1: MC protocol (format 1)

2: MC protocol (format 2)

3: MC protocol (format 3)

4: MC protocol (format 4)

5: MC protocol (format 5)

6: Non procedure protocol

7: Bidirectional protocol

8: (For linked operation)

Transmission setting status (switch setting)

Operation setting (b0)

Data bit (b1)

Parity bit (b2)

Odd/even parity (b3)

Stop bit (b4)

Sum check code (b5)

Write during RUN (b6)

Setting modification (b7)

Communication rate (b8 to b11)

For system (b12 to b15)

0: Independent

0: 7 bit

0: No

0: Odd

0: 1 bit

0: No

0: Prohibited

0: Prohibited

1: Link

1: 8 bit

1: Yes

1: Even

1: 2 bit

1: Yes

1: Allowed

1: Allowed

50 bps to 230400 bps

All 0

Communication protocol status (current)

0: GX Developer connection 5: MC protocol (format 5)

1: MC protocol (format 1)

2: MC protocol (format 2)

3: MC protocol (format 3)

4: MC protocol (format 4)

6: Non procedure protocol

7: Bidirectional protocol

8: (For linked operation)

Transmission status (current)

Operation setting (b0)

Data bit (b1)

Parity bit (b2)

Odd/even parity (b3)

Stop bit (b4)

Sum check code (b5)

Write during RUN (b6)

Setting modification (b7)

Communication rate (b8 to b11)

For system (b12 to b15)

0: Independent

0: 7 bit

0: No

0: Odd

0: 1 bit

0: No

0: Prohibited

0: Prohibited

1: link

1: 8 bit

1: Yes

1: Even

1: 2 bit

1: Yes

1: Allowed

1: Allowed

50 bps to 230400 bps

All 0

RS-232 control signal status

0: OFF status

RS (b0)

DSR (b1)

DTR (b2)

CD (b3)

Not used (b6 to b15) All 0

1: ON status

CS (b4)

RI (b5)

Depends on module status

Depends on parameter setting

Depends on signal status

R

R

R

Not allowed

Not allowed

Reference section

Section

8.6.2

Chapter 3 of User's

Manual

(Application)

Section

4.5.2

Section

8.6.3

Section

10.1.6

Section

8.6.3

Section

10.1.3

Section

4.5.2

Section

8.6.3

Section

10.1.6

Section

4.5.2

Section

8.6.3

Section

10.1.5

3 - 24 3 - 24

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

Application Name

Initial value

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

597

(255

598

(256

599

(257

600

(258

H

H

H

H

)

)

)

)

613

(265

614

(266

615

(267

616

(268

H

H

H

H

)

)

)

)

For confirmation of communication result

Transmission sequence status (For confirmation of MC protocol communication status)

0: Waiting for receiving command

1: Receiving command

2: Command reception complete

3: Waiting to access PLC CPU

4: Accessing PLC CPU

5: PLC CPU access complete

6: Response message transmission

On-demand execution result

0 : Normal completion

1 or more: Abnormal completion (error code)

Data transmission result

0 : Normal completion

1 or more: Abnormal completion (error code)

Data reception result

0 : Normal completion

1 or more: Abnormal completion (error code)

0

R

RW

RW

601

(259

H

)

617

(269

H

)

System area

602

(25A

603

(25B

H

H

)

)

618

(26A

619

(26B

H

H

)

)

MC protocol transmission error code

(excludes A compatible 1C frame communication)

0: No error

Receive user frame (nth)

1 or more: Transmission error code

0 : Not received

1 to 4: Combination of user frame No. designations for reception message

0

RW

— R

604 to

607

(25C

H to 25F

H

)

620 to

1023

(26C

H

to

3FF

H

)

Use prohibited System area

1024

(400

H

)

2048

(800

H

)

Transmission data count designation

0: No designation 1 or more: Number of send data

1025 to

1535

(401

H

to

5FF

H

)

1536

(600

H

)

2049 to

2559

(801

H

to

9FF

H

)

2560

(A00

H

)

1537 to

2047

(601

H

to

7FF

H

)

2561 to

3071

(A01

H

to

BFF

H

)

Transmission data designation

Transmission/rece ive area

Data to be sent to an external device

Receive data count (Number of data for which read is requested)

0: No receive data

Receive data

1 or more: Number of receive data

Data received from an external device

3072 to 6911

(C00

H

to 1AFF

H

)

For user

User free area (3840 words)

Determined by the user.

6912to 6952

(1B00

H

to 1B28

H

)

6953 to 6993

(1B29

H

to 1B51

H

)

6994 to 7034

(1B52

H

to 1B7A

H

)

7035 to 7075

(1B7B

H

to 1BA3

H

)

7076 to 7116

(1BA4

H

to 1BCC

H

)

7117 to 7157

(1BCD

H

to 1BF5

H

)

7158 to 7198

(1BF6

H

to 1C1E

H

)

7199 to 7239

(1C1F

H

to 1C47

H

)

7240 to 7280

(1C48

H

to 1C70

H

)

7281 to 7321

(1C71

H

to 1C99

H

)

7322 to 7362

(1C9A

H

to 1CC2

H

)

7363 to 7403

(1CC3

H

to 1CEB

H

)

7404 to 7444

(1CEC

H

to 1D14

H

)

7445 to 7485

(1D15

H

to 1D3D

H

)

For registration No. 8001

For registration No. 8002

For registration No. 8003

For registration No. 8004

For registration No. 8005

For registration No. 8006

For registration No. 8007

H

H

0

0

RW

RW

For registration No. 8008

For registration No. 8009

H

H

For registration No. 800A

H

Chapter 9)

(2) If data communications is being carried out by the modem function.

• Initialization Data (User’s Manual (Application) Section

For registration No. 800B

For registration No. 800C

For registration No. 800D

For registration No. 800E

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

The user registration area has the following combined uses, with data written by the user according to the purpose of use by the

TO instruction, etc.

See each explanation item concerning the configuration of each area, the data written, etc.

(1) If data communications is being carried out by user registration frame.

• User registration frame (User’s Manual (Application),

3.4.3)

• Connection Data (User’s Manual (Application) Section

3.4.4)

Registration allowed/not allowed

Not allowed

Not allowed

Not allowed

Not allowed

Not allowed

Reference section

Section

8.6.4

Section

10.1.4

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Section

8.6.5

Section

8.6.6

Section

8.6.4

Section

8.6.5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Section

8.4.5

Section

8.4.7

Refer to left description

3 - 25 3 - 25

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

7486 to 7526

(1D3E

H

to 1D66

H

)

7527 to 7567

(1D67

H

to 1D8F

H

)

7568 to 7608

(1D90

H

to 1DB8

H

)

7609 to 7649

(1DB9

H

to 1DE1

H

)

7650 to 7690

(1DE2

H

to 1E0A

H

)

7691 to 7731

(1E0B

H

to 1E33

H

)

7732 to 7772

(1E34

H

to 1E5C

H

)

7773 to 7813

(1E5D

H

to 1E85

H

)

7814 to 7854

(1E86

H

to 1EAE

H

)

7855 to 7895

(1EAF

H

to 1DE7

H

)

7896 to 7936

(1ED8

H

to 1F00

H

)

7937 to 7977

(1F01

H

to 1F29

H

)

7978 to 8018

(1F2A

H

to 1F52

H

)

8019 to 8059

(1F53

H

to 1F7B

H

)

8060 to 8100

(1F7C

H

to 1FA4

H

)

8101 to 8141

(1FA5

H

to 1FCD

H

)

8142 to 8182

(1FCE

H

to 1FF6

H

)

Application

8183 to 8191

(1FF7

H

to 1FFF

H

)

Use prohibited

8192

(2000

H

)

System designation

For registration No. 800F

H

For registration No. 8010

H

For registration No. 8011

H

For registration No. 8012

For registration No. 8013

For registration No. 8014

For registration No. 8015

For registration No. 8016

H

H

H

H

H

For registration No. 8017

H

The user registration area has the following combined uses, with data written by the user according to the purpose of use by the

TO instruction, etc.

See each explanation item concerning the configuration of each area, the data written, etc.

(1) If data communications is being carried out by user registration frame.

• User registration frame (User’s Manual (Application),

For registration No. 8018

For registration No. 8019

H

H

For registration No. 801A

H

Chapter 9)

(2) If data communications is being carried out by the modem function.

• Initialization Data (User’s Manual (Application) Section

For registration No. 801B

For registration No. 801C

H

H

3.4.3)

• Connection Data (User’s Manual (Application) Section

3.4.4)

For registration No. 801D

H

For registration No. 801E

H

For registration No. 801F

H

Name

8193

(2001

H

)

For callback function

8194

(2002

H

)

8195 to 8198

(2003

H

to 2006

H

) Use prohibited

8199

(2007

H

)

8200

(2008

H

)

8201

(2009

H

)

For designation of modem function -2

8202

(200A

H

)

8203

(200B

H

)

Use prohibited

8204

(200C

H

)

8205

(200D

H

)

For remote password function

System area

Flash ROM write allow/prohibit designation

0: Write prohibited

Callback function designation

1: Write allowed

0

H

: Auto

1

H

: Callback connection (during fixed)·····························(Setting 4)

3

H

: Callback connection (during designated number)·····(Setting 5)

7

H

: Callback connection

(during max. designated number is 10)·····················(Setting 6)

9

H

: Auto/Callback connection (during fixed)·····················(Setting 1)

B

H

: Auto/Callback connection

(during designated number)·······································(Setting 2)

F

H

: Auto/Callback connection

(during max. designated number is 10)·····················(Setting 3)

Callback denial notification accumulated count designation

0

H

: Not specified

1

H

to FFFF

H

: Notification accumulated number count

System area

Auto modem initialization designation

0: Do not auto initialize 1: Auto initialize

Modem initialization time DR (DSR) signal valid/invalid designation

0: Do not ignore DR signal.

1: Ignore DR signal.

Complete signal handling for modem function designation

0: Do not turn on/off X13 to X16.

1: Turn on/off X13 to X16.

Wait time of notification designation

0000

H

to FFFF

H

: Wait time (unit: s)

System area

Remote password mismatch notification count designation

0

H

: No designation

1

H

to FFFF

H

: Notification times

Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation

0

H

: No designation

1

H

to FFFF

H

: Cumulative times of notification

Initial value

0

0

1

0

1

1

10

0

1

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

RW

RW

RW

RW

Registration allowed/not allowed

Not allowed

Not allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Reference section

Refer to left description

Section

8.4.12

Section

8.4.4

Chapter 3 of

User’s

Manual

(Application)

Section

8.4.4

Chapter 3 of User's

Manual

(Application)

Section 5.1.5

Section 8.4.4

Chapter 3 of

User's

Manual

(Application)

3 - 26 3 - 26

3 SPECIFICATIONS

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

Application Name

8206

(200E

H

)

For designation of modem function -3

Circuit disconnect wait time (PLC CPU watch use)

0000

H

to FFFF

H

: Wait time (unit: s)

8207

(200F

H

)

8456 to

8463

(2108

H to

210F

H

)

Use prohibited System area

8208

(2010

H

)

8464

(2110

H

)

Interrupt designation

Receive interrupt-issued designation

0: Do not issue interrupt.

1: Issue interrupt.

8209

(2011

H

)

8210

(2012

H

)

8211

(2013

H

)

8212

(2014

H

)

8465

(2111

H

)

8466

(2112

H

)

8467

(2113

H

)

8468

(2114

H

)

Use prohibited

For transmission control designation ( 1)

System area

Transmission control start free area designation

64 to 4,095: transmission control start free area

Transmission control end free area designation

263 to 4096: transmission control end free area

Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format designation

0: Format-0 1: Format-1

8213 to

8215

(2015

H to

2017

H

)

8469 to

8471

(2115

H to

2117

H

)

Use prohibited System area

8216

(2018

H

)

8472

(2118

H

)

8217

(2019

H

)

8473

(2119

H

)

Communication data monitoring function ( 1)

Communication data monitoring designation

0000

H

: No monitor/stopped monitor designation

0001

H

: Monitor start designation

0002

H

: Monitoring (Q series C24 is a set.)

1002

H

: Monitoring stopped (Q series C24 is set.)

100F

H

: Monitor setting error (Q series C24 is a set.)

Data optional designation

0: Off 1: On

Full stop designation (b0)

Timer 0 errors at occurrence stop designation (b2)

For system (b1), (b3) to (b15)

8218

(201A

H

)

8474

(211A

H

)

Monitor buffer head address designation

(400

H

to 1AFD

H

,2600

H

to 3FFD

H

)

8219

(201B

H

)

8220 to

8223

(201C

H to

201F

H

)

8224 to

8227

(2020

H to

2023

H

)

8228 to

8231

(2024

H to

2027

H

)

8232 to

8239

(2028

H to

202F

H

)

8475

(211B

H

)

8476 to

8479

(211C

H to

211F

H

)

8480 to

8483

(2120

H to

2123

H

)

8484 to

8487

(2124

H to

2127

H

)

8488 to

8495

(2128

H to

212F

H

)

Use prohibited

For designation of user frame receiving method

Use prohibited

Monitor buffer size designation

(0003

H

to 1A00

H

)

System area

User frame receive format designation (1st to 4th)

0: Format-0, 1: Format-1

Exclusive format-1 received data count (1st to 4th)

0 or more: Exclusive format-1 received data count

System area

8240 to

8248

(2030

H to

2038

H

)

8496 to

8504

(2130

H to

2138

H

)

For designation of transparent code

Transmission transparent code designation (2nd to 4th)

0000

H

Other than 0000

H

:No designation

:Designated (below)

• Transparent code (b0 to b7)

00

H

to FF

H

: Transparent code

• Additional code (b8 to b15)

00

H

to FF

H

: Additional code

8249 to

8255

(2039

H to

203F

H

)

8505 to

8511

(2139

H to

213F

H

)

Use prohibited

System area

MELSEC-Q

Initial value

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

0

RW

Registration allowed/not allowed

Allowed

Reference section

Section 8.4.4

Chapter 3 of

User's

Manual

(Application)

0

64

263

0

— RW

RW

RW

Allowed

Chapter 4 of

User's Manual

(Application)

Allowed

Chapter 7 of

User’s

Manual

(Application)

Chapter 6 of

User’s

Manual

(Application)

0

0

CH1:

2600

H

CH2:

3300

H

0D00

H

RW Allowed

Chapter 16 of User’s

Manual

(Application)

0

RW

Allowed

Section

3.4.7

Chapter 11 of User's

Manual

(Application)

0

RW

Allowed

Section

3.4.5

Chapter 12 of User's

Manual

(Application)

3 - 27 3 - 27

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

8256

(2040

H

)

8512

(2140

H

)

8257

(2041

H

)

8513

(2141

H

)

8258

(2042

H

)

8514

(2142

H

)

8259

(2043

H

)

8260

(2044

H

)

8515

(2143

H

)

For designation of PLC CPU monitoring function

8516

(2144

H

)

8261

(2045

H

)

8517

(2145

H

)

Application

Name

Cycle time units designation

0: 100 ms 1: s

Cycle time designation

0

H

: No designation

1

H

to FFFF

H

: PLC CPU monitoring cycle time

2: min

PLC CPU monitoring function designation

0: Do not use the function.

1: Fixed cycle transmission

2: Condition agreement transmission

PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure designation

(for fixed cycle transmission)

0: Data transmission (device data and CPU status data)

1: Notification

Transmission pointer designation (For fixed cycle transmission and data transmission)

1 to 100: Output head point (send from the nth)

Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No. designation areas from the designated pointer position.

(addresses: CH1 side = BA

H

to 11D

H

, CH2 side = 15A

H

to 1BD

H

)

Output count designation (for fixed cycle transmission and data transmission)

1 to 100:Output count (designate the number of frame transmissions.)

Data No. for connection designation (for fixed cycle transmission and notification)

0BB8

H

to 0BD5

H

, 8001

H

to 801F

H

: Data No. for connection

Initial value

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

2

5

0

0

H

R —

8262

(2046

H

)

8518

(2146

H

)

8263 to

8268

(2047

H

to

204C

H

)

8519 to

8524

(2147

H

to

2149

H

)

Use prohibited

8269

(204D

H

)

8225

(214D

H

)

System area

8270

(204E

H

)

8226

(214E

H

)

8271

(204F

H

)

8527

(214F

H

)

8272

(2050

H

)

8528

(2150

H

)

8273 to

8274

(2051

H

to

2052

H

)

8529 to

8530

(2151

H

to

2152

H

)

8275

(2053

H

)

8531

(2153

H

)

8276

(2054

H

)

8277

(2055

H

)

8532

(2154

H

)

8533

(2155

H

)

For designation of PLC CPU monitoring function

8278

(2056

H

)

8534

(2156

H

)

8279

(2057

H

)

8535

(2157

H

)

8280

(2058

H

)

8536

(2158

H

)

8281 to

8361

(2059

H

to

20A9

H

)

8537 to

8617

(2159

H

to

21A9

H

)

For designation of PLC CPU monitoring function

8362 to

8421 8677

(20AA

H

to (21AA

H

to

Use prohibited

20E5

H

)

8618 to

21E5

H

)

Number of registered word blocks designation

0 : No designation

1 to 10: Number of blocks of word devices

Number of registered bit blocks designation

0 : No designation

1 to 10: Number of blocks of bit devices

PLC CPU abnormal monitoring designation

0: Do not monitor.

1: Monitor.

Monitoring device designation

90

H

to CC

H

: Device code

Head device No. designation

0 or more: Head device No.

It is possible to designate a maximum of 10 blocks in total.

No. 1 block monitoring device

Read point designation

1 or more: Number to read points

Monitoring condition designation (judgment condition designation)

1 or more: Monitoring condition

Monitoring condition value designation

At bit device 0: OFF 1: ON

At word device 0 to FFFF

H

: Monitoring condition value

Transmission pointer designation (for condition agreement transmission and data transmission)

1 to 100: Output head point (send from nth)

Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No. designation areas from the designated pointer position.

(address: CH1 side = BAH to 11DH, CH2 side = 15AH to 1BDH)

Output count designation (for condition agreement transmission and data transmission)

1 to 100: Output count (designate the number

of frame transmissions)

Data No. for connection designation (for condition agreement transmission and notification)

0BB8

H

to 0BD5

H

, 8001

H

to 801F

H

: Data No. for connection

0 R —

Block monitoring

The structure of each area is the same as the first block monitoring device area devices

See *2 for the details of each area.

No. 2 to

10

System area

Registration allowed/not allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Reference section

Chapter 2 of User's

Manual

(Application)

Chapter 2 of User's

Manual

(Application)

3 - 28 3 - 28

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

Application Name

8422

(20E6

H

)

8678

(21E6

H

)

8423

(20E7

H

)

8679

(21E7

H

)

For designation of PLC CPU monitoring function

8424

(20E8

H

)

8680

(21E8

H

)

CPU abnormal monitoring designation

Transmission pointer designation (for condition agreement transmission)

1 to 100: Output head point (send from nth)

Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No. designation areas from the designated pointer position.

(address: CH1 side = BA

15A

H

to 1BD

H

)

H

to 11D

H

, CH2 side =

Output count designation (for condition agreement transmission)

1 to 100: Output count (designate the number of

frame transmissions)

Data No. for connection designation (for condition agreement transmission and notification)

0BB8

H

to 0BD5

H

, 8001

H

to 801F

H

: Data No. for connection

8425 to

8447

(20E9

H

to

8681 to

8703

(21E9

H

to

Use prohibited

20FF

H

) 21FF

H

)

8448 (2100

H

)

Use Prohibited

8449 (2101

H

)

8450 (2102

H

)

8451 (2103

H

)

8452 (2104

H

)

8453 (2105

H

)

8454 (2106

H

)

8455 (2107

H

)

8456 (2108

H

)

8457 (2109

H

)

8458 (210A

H

)

8704 to

8707

(2200

H

to

2203

H

)

8960 to

8963

(2300

H

to

2303

H

)

For callback function

Use prohibited

System area

System area

Data No. for callback designation 1

0BB8

H

to 0BD5

H

, 8001

H

to 801F

H

: Data number for callback.

Data No. for callback designation 2

Data No. for callback designation 3

Data No. for callback designation 4

Data No. for callback designation 5

Data No. for callback designation 6

Data No. for callback designation 7

Data No. for callback designation 8

Data No. for callback designation 9

Data No. for callback designation 10

System area

8708

(2204

H

)

8964

(2304

H

)

8709

(2205

H

)

8710

(2206

H

)

8965

(2305

H

)

8966

(2306

H

)

8711

(2207

H

)

8967

(2307

H

)

PLC CPU monitoring function

PLC CPU monitoring function operation status

0: Not executed (waiting for registration of PLC CPU monitoring)

1: Wait for PLC CPU monitoring time

(waiting to access PLC CPU)

2: Accessing PLC CPU

3: Sending monitoring results

PLC CPU monitoring function execution result (current)

0: Normal completion

1 or more: Abnormal completion (error code)

PLC CPU monitoring function number of transmission

0: Not executed

1 or more: Number of transmissions

Monitoring condition arrival block No.

0 : The monitoring condition is not enabled for any block

1 to 10: Registration order of word/bit block (nth)

4096 : CPU abnormal monitoring block

The latest block No. for which monitoring condition is enabled is stored.

8712 to

8954

(2208

H

to

22FA

H

)

8968 to

9215

(2308

H

to

23FF

H

)

Use prohibited System area

Initial value

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

0

0

0

RW

R

R

Registration allowed/not allowed

Allowed

Allowed

Reference section

Chapter 2 of User's

Manual

(Application)

Section

8.4.4

Chapter 3 of

User’s

Manual

(Application)

Not allowed

Chapter 2 of User's

Manual

(Application)

3 - 29 3 - 29

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

Address

Decimal (Hex)

CH1 CH2

Application Name

8944 (22F0

H

)

8945 (22F1

H

)

8946 (22F2

H

)

8947 (22F3

H

)

8948 (22F4

H

)

8949 to 8954

(22F5

H

to 22FA

H

)

8955 (22FB

H

)

8956(22FC

H

)

For callback function

Use prohibited

Callback permit accumulated count

0 or more : Accumulated count

Callback denial accumulated count

0 or more : Accumulated count

Auto (callback) connection permit accumulated count

0 or more : Accumulated count

Auto (callback) connection denial accumulated count

0 or more : Accumulated count

Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel

0 or more : Accumulated count

System area

Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion

0 or more: Accumulated count of normal completion

For the remote password function

Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion processing

0 or more: Accumulated count of abnormal completion

8957 to 8958

(22FD

H

to 22FE

H

)

Use prohibited System area

8959(22FF

H

)

For the remote password function

9216(2400

H

)

9217(2401

H

)

Use prohibited

For flash ROM write count housing

9218 to 9427

(2402

H

to 25FF

H

)

Use prohibited

9728 to 16383

(2600

H

to 3FFF

H

)

For user ( 1)

Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection

0 or more: Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection

Initial value

Applicable protocol

MC Non Bi

0

0

0

RW

RW

RW

Registration allowed/not allowed

Reference section

Not allowed

Section

8.6.2

Chapter 3 of

User's

Manual

(Application)

Not allowed

Section

5.1.5

Section

8.6.2

Chapter 3 of

User's

Manual

(Application)

Not allowed

Section

5.1.5

Section

8.6.2

Chapter 3 of

User's

Manual

(Application)

System area

Flash ROM write count

0 to 1000: Write count

0 R Not allowed

System area

User free area 2 (6656 words)

(Transmission/receiving data monitoring function default buffer)

Usage is determined by the user.

0 RW Not allowed

1 Only QJ71C24N (-R2/R4) is usable. (System area when using QJ71C24 (-R2)

2 The following tables show the areas of block monitoring devices No. 1 to 10 (CH1 side: 8272 to 8361 (2050

H

to 20A9

H

), CH2 side: 8528 to 8617 (2150

H

to 21A9

H

)), which are assigned for designating the PLC CPU monitoring function.

3 - 30 3 - 30

3 SPECIFICATIONS

MELSEC-Q

1

8272

(2050

H

)

8273 to

8274

(2051

H

to

2052

H

)

8275

(2053

H

)

8376

(2054

H

)

8277

(2055

H

)

8278

(2056

H

)

8279

(2057

H

)

8280

(2058

H

)

2

8281

(2059

H

)

8282 to

8283

(205A

H

to

205B

H

)

8284

(205C

H

)

8385

(205D

H

)

8286

(205E

H

)

8287

(205F

H

)

8288

(2060

H

)

8289

(2061

H

)

3

8290

(2062

H

)

8291 to

8292

(2063

H

to

2064

H

)

8293

(2065

H

)

8294

(2066

H

)

8295

(2067

H

)

8296

(2068

H

)

8297

(2069

H

)

8298

(206A

H

)

[CH1 side buffer memory address: decimal (hexadecimal)]

4

8299

(206B

H

)

8300 to

8301

(206C

H

to

206D

H

) nth block monitoring device

5 6

8308

(2074

H

)

8309 to

8310

(2075

H

to

2076

H

)

8317

(207D

H

)

8318 to

8319

(207E

H

to

207F

H

)

7

8326

(2086

H

)

8327 to

8328

(2087

H

to

2088

H

)

8302

(206E

H

)

8303

(206F

H

)

8304

(2070

H

)

8305

(2071

H

)

8306

(2072

H

)

8307

(2073

H

)

8311

(2077

H

)

8312

(2078

H

)

8313

(2079

H

)

8314

(207A

H

)

8315

(207B

H

)

8316

(207C

H

)

8320

(2080

H

)

8321

(2081

H

)

8322

(2082

H

)

8323

(2083

H

)

8324

(2084

H

)

8325

(2085

H

)

8329

(2089

H

)

8330

(208A

H

)

8331

(208B

H

)

8332

(208C

H

)

8333

(208D

H

)

8334

(208E

H

)

8

8335

(208F

H

)

8336 to

8337

(2090

H

to

2091

H

)

8338

(2092

H

)

8339

(2093

H

)

8340

(2094

H

)

8341

(2095

H

)

8342

(2096

H

)

8343

(2097

H

)

9

8344

(2098

H

)

8345 to

8346

(2099

H

to

209A

H

)

8347

(209B

H

)

8348

(209C

H

)

8349

(209D

H

)

8350

(209E

H

)

8351

(209F

H

)

8352

(20A0

H

)

Name

10

8353

(20A1

H

)

8354 to

8355

(20A2

H

to

20A3

H

)

8356

(20A4

H

)

8357

(20A5

H

)

8358

(20A6

H

)

8359

(20A7

H

)

8360

(20A8

H

)

8361

(20A9

H

)

Monitoring device designation

Head device No. designation

Designation of number of points read

Monitoring condition designation (Judgment condition designation)

Monitoring condition value designation

Transmission pointer designation (for conditional transmission, data transmission)

Designation of number of outputs (for conditional transmission, data transmission)

Designation of data No. for connection

(for conditional transmission and notification)

1

8528

(2150

H

)

8529 to

8530

(2151

H

to

2152

H

)

8531

(2153

H

)

8532

(2154

H

)

8533

(2155

H

)

8534

(2156

H

)

8535

(2157

H

)

8536

(2158

H

)

2

8537

(2159

H

)

8538 to

8539

(215A

H

to

215B

H

)

8540

(215C

H

)

8541

(215D

H

)

8542

(215E

H

)

8543

(215F

H

)

8544

(2160

H

)

8545

(2161

H

)

3

8546

(2162

H

)

8547 to

8548

(2163

H

to

2164

H

)

8549

(2165

H

)

8550

(2166

H

)

8551

(2167

H

)

8552

(2168

H

)

8553

(2169

H

)

8554

(216A

H

)

[CH2 side buffer memory address: decimal (hexadecimal)]

4

8555

(216B

H

)

8556 to

8557

(216C

H

to

216D

H

)

8558

(216E

H

)

8559

(216F

H

)

8560

(2170

H

)

8561

(2171

H

)

8562

(2172

H

)

8563

(2173

H

) nth block monitoring device

5 6

8564

(2174

H

)

8565 to

8566

(2175

H

to

2176

H

)

8567

(2177

H

)

8568

(2178

H

)

8569

(2179

H

)

8570

(217A

H

)

8571

(217B

H

)

8572

(217C

H

)

8573

(217D

H

)

8574 to

8575

(217E

H

to

217F

H

)

8576

(2180

H

)

8577

(2181

H

)

8578

(2182

H

)

8579

(2183

H

)

8580

(2184

H

)

8581

(2185

H

)

7

8582

(2186

H

)

8583 to

8584

(2187

H

to

2188

H

)

8585

(2189

H

)

8586

(218A

H

)

8587

(218B

H

)

8588

(218C

H

)

8589

(218D

H

)

8590

(218E

H

)

8

8591

(218F

H

)

8592 to

8593

(2190

H

to

2191

H

)

8594

(2192

H

)

8595

(2193

H

)

8596

(2194

H

)

8597

(2195

H

)

8598

(2196

H

)

8599

(2197

H

)

9

8600

(2198

H

)

8601 to

8602

(2199

H

to

219A

H

)

8603

(219B

H

)

8604

(219C

H

)

8605

(219D

H

)

8606

(219E

H

)

8607

(219F

H

)

8608

(21A0

H

)

10

8609

(21A1

H

)

8610 to

8611

(21A2

H

to

21A3

H

)

8612

(21A4

H

)

8613

(21A5

H

)

8614

(21A6

H

)

8615

(21A7

H

)

8616

(21A8

H

)

8617

(21A9

H

)

Name

Monitoring device designation

Head device No. designation

Designation of number of points read

Monitoring condition designation (Judgment condition designation)

Monitoring condition value designation

Transmission pointer designation (for conditional transmission, data transmission)

Designation of number of outputs (for conditional transmission, data transmission)

Designation of data No. for connection

(for conditional transmission and notification)

3 Only the QJ71C24N(-R2/R4) whose first 5 digits of the serial No. are 06062 or later is applicable. (System area for other than the one described on the left)

3 - 31 3 - 31

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

This chapter explains the settings and procedures required before starting a system that uses the Q series C24.

POINT

(1) When using the Q series C24, please read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual.

(2) The installation and setup methods of the Q series C24 are the same as those for CPU modules.

(3) For module installation and setup, see the user's manual for the PLC CPU used.

4

4.1 Handling Precautions

The following explains the precautions for handling the Q series C24:

(1) Do not drop the module or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin.

(2) Tighten the module terminal and fixing screws within the specified tightening torque range as follows:

Screw location Tightening torque range

RS-422/485 terminal block terminal screws (M3 screw)

RS-422/485 plug-in connector socket terminal screw for

QJ71C24N-R4 (M2 screw)

Module fixing screw (normally not required) (M3 screw) ( 1)

0.42 to 0.58 N · m

0.20 to 0.25 N · m

0.36 to 0.48 N · m

1 A module can be easily fixed to a base unit using the hooks in the upper part of the module. However, it is recommended that the module be fixed using the module mounting screws when it is used in a place subject to vibration or impact.

4 - 1 4 - 1

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

Set an operation mode with

GX Developer

Perform auto refresh setting with GX Configurator-SC

MELSEC-Q

4.2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation

The outline of the procedure before operation is shown below.

Start

Check which functions and specifications are to be used

Connect the module with an external device using a cable

• Connection of the Q series C24 and an external device

• See Section 4.4 in this manual.

Connect GX Developer and

QCPU with a cable

Perform various settings with

GX Developer

Perform individual station tests with GX Developer

Perform a loopback test from the external device

• I/O assignment setting of the Q series C24

• Setting of operation mode and transmission specifications for the Q series C24 and the external device

• See Section 4.5 in this manual.

• ROM/RAM/switch tests of the Q series C24

• Self-loopback test of the Q series C24

• See Section 4.7 in this manual

• When communication using the MC protocol is possible between the Q series C24 and the external device, set the operation mode for

MC protocol communication and perform a loopback test.

• See Section 4.8 in this manual.

4

• Set an operation mode for the data communication system between the Q series C24 and the external device.

• See Section 4.5.2 in this manual.

• A setting that automatically refreshes the status of the Q series C24

and error data to the GX Configurator-SC device.

• See Sections 4.6 and 8.3 in this manual.

Change setting values to use various functions with GX Configurator-SC

Transmission and receive data

• It is possible to change setting values for various functions, including special functions.

• See the explanation for each function in the applicable sections and manuals.

• See Chapter 8.

• Transmission and reception for the data communication system

• See the explanation for each function in the applicable sections and manuals.

Communication using non procedure protocol

(see Chapter 6)

Communication using bidirectional protocol

(see Chapter 7)

Communication using MC protocol

(see the Reference Manual)

Communication using special functions see the User's

Manual (Application)

4 - 2 4 - 2

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.3 Part Names and Functions

1)

Part names of Q series C24 are shown below.

QJ71C24N

QJ71C24 ( 1)

QJ71C24N-R2

QJ71C24-R2 ( 2)

QJ71C24N

RUN

NEU.

CH1 SD

RD

ERR.

NEU.

SD

RD

CH2

1)

QJ71C24N-R2

RUN ERR.

NEU.

NEU.

CH1 SD

RD

SD

RD

CH2

QJ71C24N-R4

1)

QJ71C24N-R4

RUN ERR.

NEU.

NEU.

CH1 SD

RD

SD

RD

CH2

2)

CH1

RS-232

3)

SG

SDA

(FG)

SDB

(FG)

RDA

RDB

CH2

RS-422

/485

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

2)

2)

CH1

RS-232

CH2

RS-232

4)

4)

CH1

RS-422/485

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

(FG)

CH2

RS-422/485

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

(FG)

QJ71C24N-R4

QJ71C24N-R2

1 The external diagrams of the QJ71C24 are the same as QJ71C24N (except for the model name).

2 The external diagrams of the QJ71C24-R2 are the same as QJ71C24N-R2 (except for the model name).

1) Display LED

2) RS-232 interface

3)

4)

Name

RS-422/485 interface

RS-422/485 interface

Contents

Display LED (For details, see (1).)

RS232 interface for serial communication with external devices (D-Sub 9 pin)

RS422/485 interface for serial communication with external devices (2-piece terminal block)

RS422/485 interface for serial communication with external devices (2-piece plug-in socket block)

4 - 3 4 - 3

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

QJ71C24N

RUN

NEU.

CH1

SD

RD

(1) LED display list

ERR.

NEU.

SD

RD

CH2

QJ71C24N-R2

RUN

NEU.

CH1

SD

RD

ERR.

NEU.

SD

RD

CH2

QJ71C24N-R4

RUN

NEU.

CH1

SD

RD

ERR.

NEU.

SD

RD

CH2

CH

CH1

CH2

LED Display contents On/flashing Off

Compatible protocol

MC Non-procedural Bidirectional

RUN Normal operation display Normal

ERR Error display ( 1) Error has occurred

NEU

( 3)

Neutral status on the CH1 side display ( 2)

Waiting for MC command message to be received

SD

Transmission status display

Data being transmitted

RD Reception status display Data being received

NEU

( 3)

SD

RD

Neutral status on the CH2 side display ( 2)

Transmission status display

Reception status display

Waiting for MC command message to be received

Data being transmitted

Data being received

Faulty or reset

Normal

MC command message being received

Data not transmitted

Data not received

MC command message being received

MC command message not transmitted

MC command message not received

Valid

Valid

Valid

Invalid (Off)

Valid

Invalid (Off)

Valid

1 This LED comes on when an error occurs at Q series C24 hardware or during data communication.

2 This LED displays the data communication status via MC protocol. (see chapter 10.)

On: Waiting for the command message to be received from the external device.

Off: Processing the command message received from the external device.

3 This LED can be made valid also when "GX Developer connection" (0H) is specified in communication protocol setting.

4 - 4 4 - 4

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.4 External Wiring

This section explains wiring between the Q series C24 and external device.

As the wiring precautions, external wiring which is resistant to the effects of external noise is a prerequisite for reliable system operation and full use of the Q series C24 function.

(1) Ground the shield at only one point.

(2) When connecting with an external device using an RS-232 line, use a connector shell as specified in Section 3.2.1 on the Q series C24 end.

(3) When connecting with an external device using an RS-422/485 cable, be sure to note the following.

(a) QJ71C24N and QJ71C24

1) Use the RS-422/485 cable recommended in section 3.3.2.

2) The RS-422/485 interface terminal block uses M3 terminal screws.

Use suitable crimp-on terminals for the terminals.

(b) QJ71C24N-R4

1) Use the RS-422/485 cable recommended in section 3.3.2.

Be sure to strip the outer insulation layer by 7 mm before connecting the cable to the plug-in socket block.

2) When connecting the braided shield wire inside the RS-422/485 cable, use the plate terminals included with the product. The braided shield wire can be connected without the plate terminal. Four plate terminals are included to connect the FG terminals of both stations. (see section

4.4.2.(6).)

3) When connecting the plug-in socket block to the QJ71C24N-R4, be sure to confirm the layout of the socket block, and then insert it into the

RS-422/485 connector on the QJ71C24N-R4.

QJ71C24N-R4

RUN ERR.

CH1

NEU.

SD

RD

NEU.

SD

RD

CH2

7mm

(0.28 i n.)

CH1

RS-422/485

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

(FG)

CH2

RS-422/485

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

(FG)

QJ71C24N-R4

(FG)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

Braided shield wire

Plate terminal

(included with product)

(4) Connect the external device according to its specifications.

(5) See Appendix 5 for the bend radius of the connection cable.

4 - 5 4 - 5

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.4.1 Connecting the RS-232 interface (full-duplex communications)

The following shows the connection precautions and connection examples when using the Q series C24 RS-232 interface for full-duplex communications.

(1) Connection precautions

(a) For further information about the following items, see the explanation in the applicable section in the User's Manual (Application).

• Controlling the communication on the Q series C24 side by the external device side using the CD signal of the RS-232 interface.

This is affected by the "RS-232 CD terminal check setting" in "CHn transmission control and others system setting change" screen on GX

Configurator-SC.

• Performing half-duplex communication using specifications on the external device side (an example of such a connection is shown in this section).

• Using modem functions.

Connection cable shield

(b) The connection cable FG signal and shield are connected as follows.

Connection on the Q series C24 side

Connection cable FG signal

Connect to the Q series C24 connector housing

Connect to the external device FG terminal or the Q series C24 connector housing

Notes

Do not short the communication cable FG signal and the SG signal.

When the FG signal and the SG signal are connected inside the external device, do not connect the FG signal to the Q series C24.

To Connector housing

SD

(c) When normal data communication is not obtained due to external noise, perform the wiring as follows:

1) Connect the FG terminals on the external device and the Q series C24 using the shield of the connection cable.

2) Signals other than SG should be connected with SG signals in the twisted pair.

Q series C24 Shield (External device)

FG

RD

RD

SD

DSR

DTR

DTR

DSR

SG SG

POINT

When using an RS-232 to RS-422 converter to connect the external device and the

Q series C24, use a converter that is compatible with the external device and PLC

CPU system configuration (1:1).

4 - 6 4 - 6

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(2) Connection examples

(a) Connection example with an external device capable of turning on and off the

CD signal (No. 1 pin)

Q series C24

Signal name

Pin No.

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

1

2

3

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

4

5

6

7

CS(CTS)

RI(CI)

8

9

External device

Signal name

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

The CD terminal check setting is set according to the specification of the external device. When wiring shown above, DTR/DSR control or DC code control may be performed.

(b) Connection example with an external device not capable of turning on and off the CD signal (No. 1 pin)

1) Connection example 1

Q series C24

Signal name

Pin No.

CD

RD(RXD)

1

2

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

3

4

5

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

RI(CI)

6

7

8

9

External device

Signal name

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

When wiring shown above, DTR/DSR control or DC code control may be performed.

2) Connection example 2

Q series C24

Signal name

Pin No.

CD

RD(RXD)

1

2

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

3

4

5

6

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

RI(CI)

7

8

9

External device

Signal name

CD

RD(RXD)

SD(TXD)

DTR(ER)

SG

DSR(DR)

RS(RTS)

CS(CTS)

When wiring shown above, DC code control may be performed.

POINT

If the PLC CPU and an external device cannot be communicated, try to perform data communication as a connection test, using the wiring connection as shown in

Connection example 2.

If data can be communicated using the wiring connection shown in Connection example 2, rewire after checking the interface specifications on the external device side.

4 - 7 4 - 7

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.4.2 Connecting the RS-422/485 interface

The following shows the connection precautions and connection examples when using the Q series C24 RS-422/485 interface.

SG

FG

FG

(1) Connection precautions

(a) When connecting the Q series C24 SG and FG signals to the external device, connect them according to the specifications of the external device.

(b) Connect the shield of the connection cable to the FG terminal on either of the connected devices.

If normal data communication is not obtained due to external noise even if wiring is made as shown above, perform wiring as follows:

1) Connect between the FG of both stations with the shield of the connection cable.

On the external device side, however, follow the instruction manual of the external device.

Be sure to use the plate terminals included with the product when connecting the braided shield wire to the QJ71C24N-R4.

2) Connect the (FG) of the Q series C24 side to the FG terminal at the power supply module of the station which has the Q series C24 is installed, or to the FG terminal of the control panel on which the Q series C24 PLC is installed.

3) Connect nnA and nnB of each signal in the connection cable as a pair.

Q series C24

External device

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

(FG)

(FG)

Shield

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

SG

FG

Correspondance of the RS-422/485 terminal block and signal location.

4 - 8 4 - 8

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

330

(c) Terminal resistor must be set (or connected) for the station of both ends on the circuit.

Match the Q series C24 to the specifications of the external device and connect a terminal resistor (packed with the Q series C24) according to this section.

Connect, or set a terminal resistor at the external device according to the instruction manual of the external device.

(The terminal resistor to connect to the Q series C24)

• When communications performed using RS-422, "330 1/4 W" resistor is connected.

• When communications performed using RS-485, "110 1/2 W" resistor is connected.

How to discriminate between the terminating resistors

110

Orange Orange

Brown Brown Brown Brown

(d) If data cannot be communicated with the external device at all, the polarity of the external device could be wrong and should be checked again. If the polarities of the Q series C24 and the external device do not match, reverse the polarity of each signal on either device side and connect the devices with the cable; this may enable the data to be communicated.

POINT

(1) For terminal resistor setting/connection described in this section, when the RS-

232 to RS-422 converters or similar device is used at the external device at both ends of the circuit, a terminal resistor must be set, or connected, at the converter.

(2) When using the RS-232C to RS-422 converters to connect the external devices and the Q series C24, use a converter that is compatible with the external device and PLC CPU system configuration (1:1, 1:n, m:n).

(3) Device connected to the Q series C24 RS-422/485 interface must be standardized as RS-422 or RS-485, including 1:n and m:n connections.

(2) Connection examples

(a) External device and Q series C24 with 1:1 system configuration

Terminal resistor

R

Q series C24

Signal name

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

FG

External device

Signal name

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

RSA

RSB

CSA

CSB

Terminal resistor

R

SG

FG

4 - 9 4 - 9

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(b) External device and Q series C24 with 1:n (multidrop) system configuration

1) Connection example

C24 1) C24 2) C24n

External device

SD

RD

External device

RS-232

SD

RD

R

R

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

RS-422/485 cable

Linked operation

2) Connection example 2

C24 1) C24 2)

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

RS-422/485 cable

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

R

R

R

Terminal resistor

C24n

R

R

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

R

R

RS-422/485 cable

RS-422/485 cable

RS-422/485 cable

R

Terminal resistor

External device 1)

(c) External device and Q series C24 with n:1 (multidrop) system configuration

External device 2) External device n C24 1)

R

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

RS-422/485 cable

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

RS-422/485 cable

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

RS-422/485 cable

R

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

R

Terminal resistor

4 - 10 4 - 10

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

External device 1)

(d) External device and Q series C24 with m:n (multidrop) system configuration

1) Connection example 1

External device 2)

RS-232 RS-232

SD

RD

SD

RD

C24 1)

SD

RD

C24 2)

SD

RD

C24n

External device 1)

R

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

Linked operation

RS-422/485 cable

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

RS-422/485 cable

Linked operation

R

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

R

Terminal resistor

2) Connection example 2

C24 1)

External device 2) C24n

R

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

RS-422/485 cable

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

RS-422/485 cable

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

RS-422/485 cable

R

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

R

Terminal resistor

4 - 11 4 - 11

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.5 Settings for GX Developer

This chapter explains various settings via GX Developer that allow the Q series C24 to perform data communication with external devices.

See Section 3.3.3 of the User's Manual (Application) for how to perform the remote password setting.

4.5.1 I/O assignment settings

[Setting purpose]

The I/O assignment settings perform the settings for the types of modules to be mounted on a base unit, the range of input/output signals, and switches of the Q series C24.

[Startup procedure]

[GX Developer] [PLC parameters] I/O assignment .

For screen display, see the GX Developer Operating Manual.

[Setting screen]

[Display description]

Item name Setting for item

I/O assignment

Type

Model name

Select "intelli."

Enter the module model name to be mounted.

(Example: QJ71C24N)

Select 32 points.

Points

Start XY

Switch setting

Enter the start I/O signal (Hexadecimal) for the target module.

Set the communication rate, transmission specifications, communication protocol, etc.

Detailed setting Select the control PLC of the Q series C24 when a multiple

Multiple CPU settings

CPU system is employed.

Select when using a multiple CPU system.

Remarks

See Section 4.5.2.

See QCPU User's Manual

(Multiple CPU System)

4 - 12 4 - 12

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.5.2 Switch settings for I/O and intelligent functional module

[Setting purpose]

The switch settings for I/O module and intelligent functional module perform the settings for transmission specifications and communication protocol for communicate with external devices.

[Setting procedure]

[GX Developer] [PLC parameters] [I/O assignment setting]

Switch setting .

For screen display, see the GX Developer Operating Manual.

[Setting screen]

Switch number

Switch 1

Switch 2

Switch 3

Switch 4

Switch 5

[Display description]

(1) Switches 1 to 5

Set the transmission specifications and communication protocol of each interface using the combinations of setting values for each switch with 16 bit binary data according to the following table.

Description b15 to b8

CH1 Communication rate setting b7 to b0

CH1 Transmission setting

CH1 communication protocol setting b15 to b8 b7 to b0

CH2 Communication rate setting CH2 Transmission setting

CH2 Communication protocol setting

Station number setting

Remarks

See a) and b)

See c)

See a) and b)

See c)

See d)

For settings to perform linked operation between two Q series C24 interfaces, see (2).

POINT

When GX Developer and/or the GOT is connected directly to the Q series C24, switching settings using GX Developer need not be made to perform access to the

QCPU, monitoring and other operations. (If switch settings are not made, operation is performed in the GX Developer connection mode.)

4 - 13 4 - 13

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2

(a) Transmission setting (CH1 side: switch 1 (lower level); CH2 side: switch 3

(lower level)) b1 b0

CH1 side

CH2 side

Bit b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7

Description

Operation setting

Data bit

Parity bit

Even/odd parity

Stop bit

Sum check code

Write during RUN

Setting modifications

OFF (0)

Independent

7

NO

Odd

1

NO

Prohibited

Prohibited

ON (1)

Link

8

Yes

Even

2

Yes

Allowed

Allowed

Remarks

Must be set to OFF on CH1

Parity bit is not included

Vertical parity

Valid only when parity bit is set to

Yes

All items listed in the table should be set to OFF for the interfaces for which

"GX Developer connection" is set in the communication protocol setting.

If connecting directly to the GX Developer, it operates with the setting value on the GX developer. (Refer to the description below.)

Transmission setting

Operation setting

Data bit

Parity bit

Even/odd parity

Stop bit

Sum check code

Write during RUN

Setting modifications

Setting description for GX Developer

Independent

8

Yes

Odd

1

Yes

Allowed

Allowed/Prohibited

1) Operation setting

• This sets whether to use each of the two Q series C24 interfaces for independent data communication, or to use the two for linked data communication.

• The setting and data flow for linked operation is explained in (2).

2) Data bit setting

• This sets the bit length for one character in data communicated with an external device according to the specifications of the external device.

(When data communication is performed using format 5 of the MC protocol (for binary code communication), it is necessary to set it to 8 bits when processing the sum check code with the bidirectional protocol.)

• If 7 bits are set, the data is communicated by ignoring the most significant bit (8th bit).

3) Parity bit setting

• This sets whether or not a parity bit (vertical parity) is added for one byte of transmission/receive data, according to the specifications of the external device.

• The addition of the parity bit to the transmission data and the checking of the parity bit of receive data are performed by the Q series C24.

4 - 14 4 - 14

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4) Even/odd parity setting

This sets whether the parity bit (vertical parity) should be odd parity or even parity when adding the parity bit (vertical parity), according to the specifications of the external device.

5) Stop bit setting

This sets the stop bit length for one character in data communicated with an external device, according to the specifications of the external device.

6) Sum check code setting

• This sets according to the specifications of the external device whether or not a sum check code is added to transmission and reception messages of each frame and format during data communication using the MC or bidirectional protocol.

• For an explanation of the message configuration and sum check code when a sum check code is added (set to Yes), see the applicable explanation of each protocol.

7) Write during RUN setting

• This sets according to the system specifications whether or not data transmitted using the MC protocol is written to the PLC CPU from an external device while the PLC CPU is running.

• When write during RUN is prohibited (disabled), the data is not written and an NAK message is returned if the external device requests the

PLC CPU to write data while it is running.

• For an explanation of the functions available in this setting, check in the "write allowed setting" and "write prohibited setting" columns in the command list of the Reference Manual.

8) Setting modifications setting

This sets whether or not the following actions are allowed after starting up the Q series C24.

Changing data communication functions and transmission

• Specifications, and the switching mode of each interface

• Writing data to the flash ROM (writing the system setting values and user frame)

POINT

(1) A setting change in the connected interface side should be set to Allowed, in order to register a user frame to the flash ROM from an external device using the MC protocol.

(2) Setting changes in interfaces on the CH1 and CH2 sides should both be set to

Allowed, in order to register the system setting values and user frames to the flash ROM from the PLC CPU.

4 - 15 4 - 15

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

Set number

0

H

5

H

6

H

7

H

1

H

2

H

3

H

4

H

8

H

9

H

to D

H

E

H

F

H

Communication rate

(Unit: bps)

50

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

(b) Communication rate setting (CH1 side: switch 1 (upper level); CH2 side: switch 3 (upper level)) 1 2 3

Bit position b15 to b8

0F

H

00

H

01

H

02

H

03

H

04

H

05

H

Communication rate

(Unit: bps)

14400

19200

28800

38400

57600

115200

230400

Bit position b15 to b8

06

H

07

H

08

H

09

H

0A

H

0B

H

0C

H

Remarks

Try lowering the communication rate when data cannot be communicated normally with an external device due to overrun errors and framing errors etc.

1 Transmission speed of 230,400 bps is available for only CH1 of the

QJ71C24N (-R2/R4).

2 When connecting external devices to both of two interfaces, the total of the communication speed should be 115,200bps or less (230,400 bps or less if using QJ71C24N (-R2/R4)). When connecting an external device to either of two interfaces, the maximum of 115,200 bps is available for the interface (the maximum of 230,400 bps if using

QJ71C24N (-R2/R4)). In this case, set 300 bps for the other interface to which no external device is connected.

3 Set "00

H

" to the interface for which "GX Developer connection" is set in the communication protocol setting. Serial communication module will operate at the communication speed set on the GX Developer.

(c) Communication protocol setting (CH1 side: switch 2; CH2 side: switch 4)

Description

GX Developer connection

Remarks

GX Developer communication rate and transmission specifications are automatically set.

MC protocol

Format 1

Format 2

Format 3

Format 4

Format 5

Non procedure protocol

Bidirectional protocol

For linked operation setting

Setting prohibited

ROM/RAM/switch test

Individual station loopback test

For communication with ASCII code in the specified form of an A compatible 1C frame or QnA compatible 2C/3C/4C frame

For communication with binary code in a QnA compatible 4C frame

For communication using non procedure protocol

For communication using bidirectional protocol

Set to the CH1 side when CH1 and CH2 interfaces are used in linked operation

(operated with the communication protocol of the CH2 side).

For self-diagnosis of the modules

For checking operation of each interface of the modules

4 - 16 4 - 16

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(d) Station number setting (switch 5 (common for both CH1 and CH2 sides))

• This setting is for communication using the MC protocol.

• When several the Q series C24s are connected on the same line with multidrop connection, set the station number designated in the data items of the transmission frame in each external device to 0 to 31 (0

H

to 1F

H

).

This number designates which external device is to be communicated with the Q series C24.

• Set the station number to 0 when the system configuration of the external device and the PLC CPU is 1:1.

Q series C24

External device

Station 0 Station 1 Station 2 Station 31

POINT

If the communication of data with external device is to be started, check the specifications of the functions to be used and then make the settings and connect the cables.

Make the following switch settings from the GX Developer if there is to be no communication (if the cables are not to be connected) at the interface.

• Communication protocol setting : Set between 0

H

and 7

H

.

• Transmission setting, communication rate setting: Set all to OFF.

(2) The setting and data flow in linked operation

(a) Set the related switches as follows when two Q series C24 interfaces are in linked operation.

Switch number

Switch 1

Switch 2

Switch 3

Switch 4

CH1 side

CH2 side

Switch 5

Settings

Transmission setting

Operation setting

Data bit setting

:

Communication rate setting

Communication protocol setting

Operation setting

Transmission setting

Communication rate setting

Communication protocol setting

Station number setting

Data bit setting

:

Setting value b0 = OFF

Set each switch on both CH1 and CH2 sides to the same specification.

Match the external device.

8 b0 = ON

Set each switch on both CH1 and CH2 sides to the same specification.

Match the external device.

0 to 7

Set according to (d) of (1)

4 - 17 4 - 17

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(b) Do not use the above settings for the following cases, because linked operation cannot be performed.

1) When using the QJ71C24N-R2 or QJ71C24-R2.

2) When an external device is not connected to either of the interfaces.

3) When the bidirectional protocol is used for data communication.

4) When communicating data with an external device connected to two interfaces that are not interacting, using functions set in the communication protocol settings (MC protocol/non procedure protocol).

5) When communicating data using the modem function.

POINT

When two interfaces are in linked operation, the transmission time for one character becomes equal to the hardware gate off time of the Q series C24.

(c) The data flow in linked operation is as follows.

1) Two interfaces operate linked together using functions defined with the communication protocol setting on the CH2 side (MC protocol in the same format or a non procedure protocol) within the transmission specifications set in the respective transmission settings (specifications for CH1 and CH2 must be the same).

Q series C24 (data flow in linked operation)

*

CH1

CH2

CH1

CH2

Transmits only to a designated

CH side.

1ch

2ch

4 - 18 4 - 18

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

E

N

Q

MELSEC-Q

In linked operation, all data received from one of the two interfaces is transmitted from the other interface. In this case, exclusive control of the received data is necessary when data is communicated using the nonprocedure protocol since all the connected stations receive the data.

When data communication is performed using the MC protocol, only the Q series C24 having the station number designated in the message performs the process designated by the command.

Furthermore, when data communication is performed using QnA compatible 2C/3C/4C frames of the MC protocol, the header information for linked operation is added to messages directed to other stations linked by multidrop connection.

a Processing performed by the Q series C24 connected to an external device

• The header information is added to the command messages received from the external device that are directed to other stations and sends them to the stations through the other interface.

• The header information is deleted from the response messages received from other stations and sends them to the external device using the other interface.

(The header information is also sent during m:n connection.) b Operation of the accessed station

The accessed station processes the request contained in the command message, adds the header information to a response message, and sends it using the interface that received the command message.

REMARK

The following describes the header information that is added by the Q series C24 to a message in linked operation.

1) When communicating with ASCII code (formats 1 to 4)

The following 13/15 character header information is added immediately before the control code (ENQ/STX/ACK/NAK) at the start of each message (13 characters for formats 1, 3 and 4; 15 characters for format 2).

2) When communicating in binary mode (format 5)

The following 10 byte header information is added immediately before the control code (DLE + STX) at the start of each message.

"STX" in format 3

(In ASCII code communication)

Existence in format 2

(In binary code communication)

E

N

Q

D

L

E

S

T

X

D

L

E

S

T

X

H L H L H L H

-

L H L H L

Header information (13/15 characters)

H L H L L H L H

Header information (10 byte)

L H

4 - 19 4 - 19

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.5.3 The Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting

The following explains the interrupt pointer setting with GX Developer in order to receive data using an interrupt program.

For the method to receive data using an interrupt program, see User's Manual

(Applications) Chapter 4.

[Setting purpose]

The intelligent function module interrupt pointer sets the information to read the receive data with an interrupt program of the PLC CPU during communication using the non procedural/bidirectional protocol.

By performing this setting, an interrupt program starts when data is received from an external communicating device and the reading of data received by the PLC

CPU becomes possible.

[Startup procedure]

[PLC parameters] [PLC system setting] Interrupt pointer setting .

For display screen, see the GX Developer Operating Manual.

[Setting screen]

[Setting description]

(1) Interrupt pointer start No. on the PLC side

Set the start number (ranging from 50 to 255) of the interrupt pointer (Ixx) for use in the sequence program.

(2) Interrupt pointer No. of units on the PLC side

Set the number of units (2) of interrupt pointers (I) for use in the sequence program.

4 - 20 4 - 20

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(3) Start I/O No. on the intelligent module (unit) side

Set the start I/O No. for the Q series C24.

(4) Start SI No. on intelligent module (unit) side

1) Assign control numbers (SI) on the Q series C24 side to the interrupt pointers (Ixx) used in the sequence program.

2) Set the start SI No. (0) of the interrupt control numbers.

3) The interfaces for data reception corresponding to the interrupt control numbers are as follows:

SI No. 0: for interface on the CH1 side

SI No. 1: for interface on the CH2 side

4 - 21 4 - 21

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.6 Settings with the Utility Package (GX Configurator-SC)

The settings defined with GX Configurator-SC for operation of the Q series C24 are described in Chapter 8.

The following concerns the data set from GX Configurator-SC.

1) Data set in the Q series C24 for the use of specific functions

2) Data set in the PLC CPU to communicate information between the Q series C24 and the PLC CPU of the mounting station.

This section explains the "Auto refresh settings" of the data mentioned in 2) above.

[Setting purpose]

The auto refresh settings are defined to automatically store the error and status information stored in the buffer memory of the Q series C24 in devices designated by the PLC CPU.

By this setting, the users can see the module error and status information without accessing the Q series C24.

[Setup procedure]

[GX Developer] [Tools] [Intelligent function utility] [Start] "Intelligent function module parameter setting module select" Auto refresh .

For display screen, see Section 8.3.

[Setting screen]

4 - 22 4 - 22

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

[Setting items]

Setting item Buffer memory address Reference section

Flash ROM access register/read/delete result

CH1/CH2 LED ON status, communication error status (

Switch setting error, mode switching error status (

1

)

1

)

Number of registered user frame

Flash ROM system parameters write result

Modem function error code

Modem function sequence status

Number of data registrations for connection

Number of data registrations for initialization

Number of notification execution

Data storage area 1 notification execution data No.

Data storage area 2 notification execution data No.

Data storage area 3 notification execution data No.

Data storage area 4 notification execution data No.

Data storage area 5 notification execution data No.

Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion

Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion

Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection

CH1/CH2 communication protocol status (

Transmission status (

1

)

RS-232 control signal status (

1

)

1

)

Transmission sequence status (

1

)

4

H

201

H

/202

H

203

H

204

H

220

H

221

H

222

H

223

H

226

H

229

H

22A

H

22E

H

232

H

236

H

23A

H

22FB

H

22FC

H

22FF

H

Section 8.6.9

Section 10.1

Section 8.6.2

Section 3.3 of User’s Manual

(Application)

On-demand execution result

Data transmission result

Data reception result

MC protocol transmission error code

252

H

/262

H

253

H

/263

H

254

H

/264

H

255

H

/265

H

256

H

/266

H

257

H

/267

H

258

H

/268

H

25A

H

/26A

H

Section 4.5.2

Section 8.6.3

Section 10.1

Sections 8.6.4 to 8.6.6

Section 10.1

Receive user frame nth

User frame being transmitted

25B

H

/26B

H

B6

H

/156

H

Section 8.6.5

Chapter 11 of User’s Manual

(Application)

PLC CPU monitoring function

Operation status

Execution result

Number of transmission

Monitoring condition arrival block No.

2204

H

/2304

H

2205

H

/2305

H

2206

H

/2306

H

2207

H

/2307

H

Section 8.6.7

Chapter 2 of User’s Manual

(Application)

1 See Section 10.1 for the contents of the buffer memory.

4 - 23 4 - 23

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(1) Devices

(a) Set the word device of the PLC CPU which stores error and status information in the setting item field when using the auto refresh function between the Q series C24 and the PLC CPU.

(b) The devices used must be of the types X, Y, M, L, B, T, C, ST, D, W, R, or

ZR.

If bit devices of types X, Y, M, L, or B are used, a number that can be divided by 16 points (e.g., X30, Y120, M16, etc.) should be specified. The buffer memory data is stored in 16 point units from the specified device number (e.g., if M16 is set, data is stored from M16 to M31).

(c) The device can be set to auto refresh for required information only.

(2) Writing auto refresh settings to QCPU and saving them in a file

(a) Writing auto refresh settings to QCPU

Use online PLC write function of GX Configurator-SC or GX Developer.

(b) Saving in a file

Use the file storage function shown in the file items in the parameter module selection screen shown in Section 8.3.2. of GX Configurator-SC.

POINT

(1) The auto refresh settings are stored in the intelligent function module parameter.

After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the CPU module, it enables the auto refresh setting by turning the power OFF ON or by resetting the CPU module.

(2) The auto refresh settings cannot be changed from the sequence program.

However it is possible to add a process similar to auto refresh by using the

FROM/TO command of the sequence program.

4 - 24 4 - 24

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.7 Individual Station Test

After installing the Q series C24 to the base unit of QCPU, perform an individual station test first to check the switch setting (see Section 4.5.2) and operation of the Q series

C24.

POINT

(1) When a problem occurs during data communication with an external device, perform an individual station test as described in this section to check whether or not there is any problem in the operation of the Q series C24.

(2) In order to avoid problems, set the PLC CPU to STOP status during the individual station test.

(3) Test both interfaces of the Q series C24 simultaneously in an individual station test.

Alternatively, either one of the interfaces can be tested in an individual station loopback test.

In that case, ignore the test results on the interface side for which the test is not performed.

(4) Cable removal and reconnection before and after the individual station loopback test should be performed with the power to the Q series C24 mounting station turned off.

(5) To restart data communication with an external device after an individual station test, check the specifications of the devices used before defining various settings and reconnecting cables.

For the interface that is not used for communication (no cable connection), define the switch settings in GX Developer as follows (for the setting method, see Section

4.5.2).

• Communication protocol setting: 0

H

to 7

H

• Transmission control settings and communication rate settings: all set to OFF.

(6) If an error occurs even though the correct settings have been made for the Q series C24 through an individual station test, please consult your nearest dealer or branch office with a description of the error.

4.7.1 ROM/RAM/switch tests

A ROM/RAM/switch test checks the contents of the memory of the Q series C24 and the switch settings set with GX Developer.

Perform a ROM/RAM/switch test with the procedure described below.

(Procedure 1) Communication protocol setting and transmission setting (see Section 4.5.2)

(1) Set the communication protocol setting on the CH2 side to E

H

(ROM/RAM/switch test).

Set the communication protocol setting on the CH1 side to the number (1 to 8) used for data communication with an external device following the test.

(2) Set the transmission settings for the two interfaces to match the specifications used when communicating data with an external device.

(Procedure 2) Performing ROM/RAM/switch tests

(1) Set the PLC CPU to STOP status.

4 - 25 4 - 25

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(2) Restart the PLC CPU station or reset the CPU. The test starts automatically in about one second.

(3) For the Q series C24, the following tests should be performed once.

1) ROM check

Read the ROM data and verify the sum check.

2) RAM check

Write data to RAM, and read and check it.

3) Switch check

Check whether or not each switch is set within the tolerance range and the operation setting in the transmission settings is set to off.

4) Linked operation setting check (perform this test with the operation setting in the transmission settings of CH2 set to on)

Check to see that the communication protocol setting on CH1 is set to 8

H

and whether the communication rate setting of each channel is within the tolerance range.

A linked operation setting check is performed when values are set as follows:

• Communication protocol setting on the CH1 side : 8

H

• Operation setting in the transmission settings on the CH2 side: bit 8 = ON.

(Procedure 3) Checking results of ROM/RAM/switch tests

(1) The test is completed when the NEU LED on CH1 side is lit (approximately 2 seconds).

(2) The test is completed normally when the ERR LED turns off.

(3) The test is completed with error when the ERR LED turns on. Check the error description in one of the following screens.

• The "Monitor/test others" screen of GX Configurator-SC (see Section 8.6.9)

• The buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer (see the GX Developer

Manual for the operation method)

When checking errors in the buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer, monitor the following buffer memory.

Check the error descriptions on the screens by bit-decoding the monitored value

(16-bit integer). Each bit corresponds to the following error description.

Bit location b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 to b6 b7 b8 to b13

Buffer memory monitored

Address CH1 side

201

H

CH2 side

202

H

NEU

SIO

PRO

P/S

C/N

CH2 ERR b14

— b15 CH1 ERR

CH1/CH2 side

203

H

Description when corresponding bit is on

When linked operation

Transmission setting error setting Protocol setting error

When independent operation setting

Transmission setting error

Protocol setting error

Test completed

RAM error —

Setting station number

Out of the setting station number range

ROM error

1 Consult your nearest dealer.

Corrective action

Review setting value

(see Section 4.5.2)

( 1)

Review setting value

(see Section 4.5.2)

( 1)

4 - 26 4 - 26

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(Procedure 4) Ending a ROM/RAM/switch test

(1) Perform the following procedures after checking normal completion/abnormal completion of the test results.

Normal completion : Perform operation (2) to finish tests.

Upon error occurrence : When an error occurs in a switch check or linked operation setting check, set the correct values and test again.

When an error occurs in a ROM or RAM check, check the mounting status of module and test again.

If there is no error in the mounting status of module, consult your nearest dealer or branch office.

(2) Perform the ending procedure for ROM/RAM/switch test

1) Follow the procedure in Section 4.7.2 to perform an individual loopback test operation.

2) Perform the following procedure to end the test and start data communication with an external device.

• Set the switch settings on GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4.5.2.

• Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect the communication cable with an external device.

• Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed.

4 - 27 4 - 27

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.7.2 Individual station loopback test

The individual station loopback test checks the operation of the communication function of the Q series C24.

Follow the procedure below to perform an individual station loopback test.

(Procedure 1) Connecting cable

(1) Connect cables to two interfaces as follows.

• Connect cables to the RS-232 interface within the connector and install it to the interface.

• Connect cables to the RS-422/485 interface on a terminal block.

RS-232 interface (D-Sub 9 pin)

Q series C24 side

Cable connection

Signal name Pin number

CD

RD (RXD)

SD (TXD)

ER (DTR)

1

2

3

4

SG

DR (DSR)

RS (RTS)

CS (CTS)

RI (CI)

5

6

7

8

9

RS-422/485 interface

Q series C24 side

Cable connection

Signal name

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

FG

FG

(Procedure 2) Communication protocol setting and transmission setting (see Section 4.5.2)

(1) Set the communication protocol setting to F

H

(individual station loopback test) for both interfaces.

(2) Set each transmission setting of the two interfaces according to the transmission specification for data communication with an external device.

(Procedure 3) Performing the individual station loopback test

(1) Set the PLC CPU to STOP status.

(2) Restart the PLC CPU station or reset the CPU. The test starts automatically in about one second.

(3) For the Q series C24, perform the following tests in sequence and repeat them

(one test cycle takes approximately one second).

End testing when all test results become abnormal.

1) Check communication with the PLC CPU

Read and check the model type of the PLC CPU.

2) Check transmission and reception functions of the interface

Perform communication while changing data.

(4) The LED corresponding to a test item flashes when the test starts.

• The CH1 NEU LEDs flash when checking communication with the PLC CPU.

• The SD and RD LEDs of the interface being tested flash when checking the communication functions of each interface.

4 - 28 4 - 28

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(Procedure 4) Checking the results of an individual loopback test

(1) This test is performed repeatedly. When the ERR LED is off, the test is being executed normally.

(2) The test is completed with an error when the ERR LED is lit. Check the error description on one of the following screens. (The ERR LED is lit upon error occurrence, and the test is completed.)

• The "Monitor/test others" screen of GX Configurator-SC (see Section 8.6.9)

• The buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer (see the GX Developer

Manual for operation method)

When checking for errors in the buffer memory monitor screen of GX

Developer, monitor the LED ON status storage area (address CH1: 201

H

,

CH2: 202

H

).

Check the error descriptions on the screens by bit-decoding the monitored value

(16-bit integer). Each bit corresponds to the following error description.

Bit location

Buffer memory monitored

Address CH1 side

201

H b0 to b3 —

CH2 side

202

H

Description when corresponding bit is on

Corrective action b4 b5 to b13

C/N

Error occurrence in the CPU module.

Remove errors occurring in the CPU module.

Not enough power supply capacity.

Examine the power supply capacity.

Module is not mounted correctly.

Reinstall the module properly.

Error occurrence in the base unit, extension cable, CPU module, or the

Q series C24.

Check each module and remove the cause of the error.

Reconnect the cable correctly.

Reinstall the module correctly.

— b14 CH2 ERR CH2 side communication error

Reconnect the cable correctly.

Examine the test wiring connection.

b15

CH1 ERR CH1 side communication error

(Procedure 5) Ending individual station loopback test

(1) Perform the following procedures after checking normal completion/abnormal completion of the test result.

Normal completion : Perform operation (2) to finish the test.

Upon error occurrence : Remove the cause of the error according to the corrective action specified in the table above, and test again.

(2) Perform the ending procedure for individual station loopback test

1) Follow the procedure in Section 4.7.1 to perform a ROM/RAM/switch test.

2) Perform the following procedure to end the test and start data communication with an external device.

• Set the switch settings on GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4.5.2.

• Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect the communication cable with the external device.

• Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed.

4 - 29 4 - 29

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.8 Loopback Test

A loopback test performs a communication test using the loopback test function of the

MC protocol, in order to check the connection between the Q series C24 and an external device, the communication function of each device, and the operation of the communication program of the external device.

(Procedure 1) Connecting the Q series C24 to an external device

Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect a communication cable to an external device to perform data communication using the

MC protocol (see Section 4.4).

(Procedure 2) Switch setting with GX Developer

(1) Set the switch settings with GX Developer as shown in Section 4.5 and write the parameters to the PLC CPU in order to perform data communication using the MC protocol.

(2) The following shows an example of the settings when performing a loopback test on the interface on the CH1 side.

• Switch 1: 0544

H

Transmission Operation setting : Independent operation setting Data bit

Parity bit

: 7 bit

: Yes (odd)

• Switch 2: 0001

H

• Switch 3: 0000

H

• Switch 4: 0000

H

Stop bit

Sum check code

: 1 bit

: No

Write during RUN : Allowed

Setting modification : Prohibited

Communication rate setting

Communication protocol setting

• Switch 5: 0000

H

Station number setting

: 9600 bps

: MC protocol (format 1)

: 0 station

(Procedure 3) Performing a loopback test

(1) Set the PLC CPU to STOP status, and turn the power on or reset the CPU

(communication is enabled in about one second).

(2) Create a program for a loopback test on the external device side and send a command message like the one in the example below to the Q series C24.

The commands used are as follows:

• When performing communication test in an A compatible 1C frame: TT command (for an example, see the following page)

• When performing communication test in a QnA compatible frame: 0619 command

See the Reference Manual when performing communication tests in a QnA compatible frame.

(Procedure 4) Checking loopback test result

(1) The Q series C24 sends a response message to the external device when it receives a loopback test command message.

The Q series C24 sends the external device the received data as is.

(2) Check on the external device whether the data received from the Q series C24 matches the data sent from the external device.

4 - 30 4 - 30

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

(Procedure 5) Ending the loopback test

Perform the following procedure according to the function used, and start data communication.

• Set the switch settings with GX Developer according to the procedure specified in

Section 4.5.2.

• Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed.

An example of control procedure when the TT command is used in the loopback test mentioned in Procedure 3.

(Station number: 00, sum check code: Yes)

TT (ACPU common command)

Header data sent by the external device

Two characters (hexadecimal) … Designate the number of characters (1 to 254) of return data to be

sent immediately afterward.

Designate with a text string consisting of "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" (capital letter)

(Data name)

E

N

External device side

Q

H L H L

0 0 F F T T 0

(Example)

H L

0 5

Loopback data data with the length given by Character length

Sum check code

A B C D E

H

7

L

8

05

H

30

H

30

H

46

H

46

H

54

H

54

H

30

H

30

H

35

H

41

H

42

H

43

H

44

H

45

H

37

H

38

H

Character A part

(Data name)

PLC CPU side

Becomes the same data

(In case of format 1)

Two characters (hexadecimal)

S

T

X

H L H L H L

Loopback data data with the length given by Character length

E

T

X

0 0 F F 0 5 A B C D E

Sum check code

H

A

L

3

(Example)

02

H

30

H

30

H

46

H

46

H

30

H

35

H

41

H

42

H

43

H

44

H

45

H

03

H

41

H

33

H

Header data to be sent by the PLC CPU

Character B part

4 - 31 4 - 31

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.9 Maintenance and Inspection

This section explains the maintenance and inspection and installing and removing of the Q series C24.

4.9.1 Maintenance and inspection

The Q series C24 has no special inspection items other than below.

For items other than listed below, perform inspection according to the inspection items listed in the User's Manual of the PLC CPU module in order to always use the system in the optimal condition.

(the Q series C24 inspection items)

1) Check if the terminal resistors and cables are connected securely.

2) Verify that the module installation screws and the terminal block installation screws are securely tightened.

POINT

Be sure to read through the Safety Precautions in the beginning of this manual regarding the Q series C24 inspection and maintenance.

4 - 32 4 - 32

4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION

MELSEC-Q

4.9.2 When mounting/dismounting the module

Please read 4.1, "Handling Precautions" before mounting or dismounting the module, and make sure to pay attention to safety and handle the module properly during the operation.

When replacing the Q series C24 and QCPU, it becomes necessary to register the following data on the Q series C24 again for the module to be replaced.

• Q series C24: System setting data in the flash ROM

• QCPU: PLC parameters (I/O assignment, switch setting, etc.)

The procedure for replacing a module, including re-registration of data, is as follows.

<Operation procedure when replacing the Q series C24>

(Step 1) Read all the system setting data of the Q series C24 using the

Read from module function of GX Configurator-SC.

(Step 2) Save the system setting data read to the specified file using the

File Save function of GX Configurator-SC ( 1).

(Step 3) Turn the power supply to the Q series C24 off.

(Step 4) Dismount the cables and the module itself.

(Step 5) Replace the module and start up the module according to "4.2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation."

(Step 6) Read the data saved in (Step 2) back into the system and register the system setting data to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the

Write to module function of GX Configurator-SC.

<Operation procedure when replacing the QCPU>

(Step 1) Read the PLC parameters with GX Developer from the QCPU and save them.

(Step 2) Replace the QCPU. (See the user's manual for QCPU.)

(Step 3) Register the PLC parameter saved by GX Developer back into the

QCPU again.

1 It is recommended to record and save the system setting parameters not only when replacing the module, but also when changing the system setting parameters using GX Configurator-SC.

4 - 33 4 - 33

5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

This chapter explains an overview of the MELSEC communication protocol (hereinafter abbreviated as the MC protocol). See the following manual for a detailed explanation of the data communication functions that are available when using the MC protocol.

Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual (SH-080008)

5.1 Data Communication Functions

The MELSEC protocol (MC protocol) is a communication system for the Q series PLCs.

Using this protocol, the external devices can read or write device data and programs for the PLC CPUs via the Q series C24 or Q series Ethernet interface module.

Any external devices on which application programs can be installed and which can transmit and receive data in accordance with the MELSEC PLC protocol can communicate with the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol.

5.1.1 Accessing the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol

This section describes the main functions for accessing the PLC CPUs using the

MC protocol.

(An overview of the data communication functions using the MC protocol is provided in Section 3.4).

With the exception of the on-demand function described below, the Q series C24 sends and receives data based on commands from the external devices.

Thus, the PLC CPU side does not require sequence programs for data communication.

5

(1) Data read/write

This function reads and writes data from/to the PLC CPU device memory of the local-station or other station on the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 as well as the intelligent function module buffer memory.

By reading and writing data, the PLC CPU operation monitoring, data analysis and production management can be performed on the external device side.

Also, production directions can be executed on the external device side.

(2) File read/ write

This function reads and writes files stored in the PLC CPU such as sequence programs and parameter files. By reading and writing files, file management for the GX Configurator-SC and the QnACPUs of other stations can be performed on the external station side.

Also, execution programs can be changed (replaced) from the external device side.

(3) Remote control of the PLC CPU

This function executes remote RUN/STOP/PAUSE/latch clear/reset operations.

Remote operations of the PLC CPU can be performed from the external device side using the PLC CPU remote control function.

5 - 1 5 - 1

5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

5

(4) Monitoring the PLC CPU

This function monitors the operating status of the PLC CPU and the data in the device memory.

The PLC CPU status and the device memory data can be sent to the external device at fixed intervals, when an error occurs in the machine equipment, or when certain conditions are satisfied.

This function reduces the data read processing load on the external device side.

(5) Sending data from the PLC CPU to the external device

A function for requesting data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device is called the on-demand function.

Urgent data that must be forwarded to the external device can be sent as ondemand data to the external device by starting up from the PLC CPU.

5.1.2 Message format and control procedure for data communication

The data communication functions using the MC protocol correspond to the data communication functions using the dedicated protocol for the conventional products listed below.

• A series computer link module

• QnA series serial communication module

Therefore, the message format and control procedure are the same as when accessing the PLC using these conventional modules.

The external device side can access the Q series PLC with a program used for accessing the PLC via a conventional module.

(Example)

E

N

Q

Head device

No. of device points

2 characters

(hexadecimal)

S

T

X

Data for the number of device points

Number of device points × 4 characters

E

T

X

H L H L H L H L

0 0 0 1 Q R 0 X 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 2 7

2

H L H L

0 0 0 1 1 2 3 4 A B C D

H L

9

8

05

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

31

H

51

H

52

H

30

H

58

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

34

H

30

H

30

H

32

H

37

H

32

H

02

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

31

H

31

H

32

H

33

H

34

H

41

H

42

H

43

H

44

H

03

H

39

H

38

H

(Command message for A compatible 1C frame) (Response for A compatible 1C frame)

POINT

The following manual is available for performing data communication using the MC protocol.

MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual (sold separately)

5.1.3 PLC CPU setting for performing data communication

Data communication using the MC protocol is achieved by performing the GX

Developer settings indicated below on a PC, performing the system settings by the GX

Configurator-SC, and registering the settings to the PLC.

(1) Settings using the GX Developer (Required)

Perform the I/O assignments and switch settings indicated in Section 4.5 and write the parameters to the PLC CPU where the Q series C24 is installed.

5 - 2 5 - 2

5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) System settings using the GX Configurator-SC

When it is necessary to change the default values registered in the Q series C24, perform the settings as indicated in Chapter 8 and register these to the flash

ROM in the Q series C24.

• MC protocol system setting

• Transmission control and others system setting

POINT

To write from the external device to the intelligent function module installed in the

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station during communication using the MC protocol, set the "Write allow/prohibit during PLC CPU RUN" in the GX Developer to enable.

5.1.4 Support of multiple CPU system or redundant system

When the external device accesses a QCPU in a multiple CPU system or redundant system, it is possible to selectively access either a control or non-control CPU in the multiple CPU system or a control or standby system CPU or System A or System B

CPU in the redundant system by specifying the target QCPU in "Requested module

I/O No." of the QnA compatible 4C frame for the MC protocol.

Refer to the Reference Manual for details.

Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for the system configuration.

(Example) When multiple CPU No.1 is specified

E

N

Q

H

F

L

8

H

0

L

5

H

0

L

7

H

0

L

7

H

0

3

E

L

0

H

0

L

0

H

0

L

0

H

0

4

0

L

1

H

0

0

0

L

1

X

H

0

0

0

0

4

L

0

H

0

0

0

L

5

H

3

L

6

05

H

46

H

38

H

30

H

35

H

30

H

37

H

30

H

33

H

30

H

33

H

45

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

34

H

30

H

31

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

31

H

58

H

2A

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

34

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

30

H

35

H

33

H

36

H

(Command massage of the QnA compatible 4C frame format 1)

REMARK

• When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system, it is necessary to specify the QCPU that controls the Q series C24 (hereinafter referred to as the control

PLC) using GX Developer.

• It is also possible to mount a Q series C24 of function version A in a multiple CPU system. In this case, it is only possible to access the control PLC (PLC No.1).

• It is only possible to access the control PLC if data is communicated by means of frames other than the QnA compatible 4C frame.

5 - 3 5 - 3

5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

5.1.5 Support for the QCPU remote password function

This section explains an overview of the remote password function when a remote password is set for the Q series C24 mounted to a QCPU.

See Chapter 3 of the User's Manual (Application) for a detailed explanation.

(1) Checking remote passwords

If the following items are set to the QCPU using GX Developer, the Q series C24 performs a remote password check whenever an external device accesses the

PLC using the modem function of the Q series C24.

(a) Setting by GX Developer

• When the remote password is set on the QCPU with the Q series C24.

• When the Q series C24 is set to be subject to the remote password check.

(b) Access in which the remote password is checked

The remote password is checked when the following access is attempted.

Access attempts to all PLCs of the local station (the local station with the Q series C24 and other stations accessed via the local station) are subject to the remote password checking.

(Access function to the PLC in which the remote password is checked)

• Data communication using the MC protocol

• Access to the PLC using GX Developer

The remote password is not checked in data communication using the non procedure/bidirectional protocols.

(c) Remote password to be checked

The check is performed against the remote password set to the local station QCPU with the Q series C24.

Access to the specified station is allowed if the remote password specified by the user and the remote password set to the QCPU match when accessing.

(2) Data communication procedure

1) Initialize the modem.

2) Connect the line from the external device.

3) Unlock (cancel) the remote password of the QCPU belonging to the station with the Q series C24 mounted from the external device via the dedicated command for communication using the MC protocol.

4) Initiate the data communication between the external device and PLC using the MC protocol.

5) Disconnect the modem line from the external device side when completing the data communication using the MC protocol.

The remote password is automatically locked when the modem is disconnected.

5 - 4 5 - 4

5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

REMARK

The remote password should be set to a QCPU using GX Developer in order to use the remote password function of QCPU.

• Unlocking the remote password is possible only for the QCPU of the local station with the Q series C24.

It is impossible to unlock the remote password for the QCPU of other stations.

See Section 3.18 of the Reference Manual for the command for unlocking the remote password.

• When accessing the PLC using GX Developer, the remote password should be unlocked when starting the online operation.

(3) Q series C24 setting and monitoring function when using the QCPU remote password function

(a) Modem function system setting by GX Configurator-SC

1) Remote password mismatch notification count designation

Designate the number of times before notification when a remote password disagreement occurs at the unlock processing by the user/external device after the line is connected.

The Q series C24 automatically disconnects the line if more remote password disagreements occur than the number of times designated by this value.

2) Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation

Designate the number of times before notification when remote password disagreements occur at the unlock processing by the user/external device after the startup of the Q series C24.

The error signal on the CHn side (XE, XF) and the ERR LED turn on if remote password disagreements occur more than the number of times designated by this value (the line is not disconnected).

The user can clear the cumulative value counted by the Q series

C24 at an occurrence of remote password disagreement using either one of the methods below:

• Set the cumulative number of abnormal completions of unlock processing to "0" in the modem function monitor/test screen of GX

Configurator-SC.

• Write "0" to the storage area in the buffer memory corresponding to the Accumulated count of abnormal completions of unlock processing (address: 8956 (22FC

H

)).

5 - 5 5 - 5

5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(b) Modem function monitor/test by GX Configurator-SC

It is possible to monitor the setting values for the remote password and the number of occurrences up to the present, such as the designation of the number of times before notifying an unmatched remote password and the current number of occurrences.

It is possible to set each monitor value to "0."

Monitored items in the “modem function monitor/test” screen

Remote password mismatch notification count designation

Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation

Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion

Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion

Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection

Buffer memory address

8204 (200C

H

)

8205 (200D

H

)

8955 (22FB

H

)

8956 (22FC

H

)

8959 (22FF

H

)

5.2 Utilizing the MX Component

If the external device is a PC running one of the basic operation systems below, it is possible to create a communication program for the external device without considering the detailed MC protocol (transmission/reception procedures) using one of the following separately sold communication support tools.

See Appendix 7 for the overview of MX Component.

(Supported basic operation systems)

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

95 Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

98 Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows NT

®

Workstation Operating System Version 4.0

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

Millennium Edition Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

2000 Professional Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

XP Professional Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

XP Home Edition Operating System

Depending on the version of MX Component used, different operating systems are supported.

See the manual of MX Component for details.

(Communication support tools)

• MX Component (SW0D5C-ACT-E or later.)

5 - 6 5 - 6

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

Data communication using the non procedure protocol is a function for sending and receiving data between a PLC CPU and an external device using the message format and transmission control procedure specified by the user.

Data can be transferred using the non procedure protocol when it is necessary to perform data communication using the protocol for external devices such as a measuring instrument and a bar code reader. In that case, transmission/receive data processing can be simplified by using the communication functions with the user frames described in the User's Manual (Application).

This chapter explains the basic transmission and reception methods when performing data communication using the non procedure protocol.

Follow the procedure described in this chapter to create sequence programs for sending and receiving data for the PLC CPU.

For details on the additional functions listed below for data communication using the non procedure protocol, see the separate User's Manuals (Application).

• Sending/receiving data using user frames (See Chapter 11, Application)

• Monitoring the PLC CPU (automatic information function)

(See Chapter 2, Application)

• Switching modes from the PLC CPU (See Chapter 15, Application)

• Reading received data using interrupt programs (See Chapter 4, Application)

• Sending/receiving data using transparent code designation

(See Chapter 12, Application)

• Sending/receiving data using ASCII data (ASCII-BIN conversion)

(See Chapter 13, Application)

• Controlling half-duplex communication (See Chapter 8, Application)

6

6 - 1 6 - 1

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.1 Data Reception from the External Device

This section explains data reception from the external device.

There are two methods for receiving data: the "reception via receive complete code" for receiving variable length messages, and the "reception via received data count" for receiving fixed length messages. The receive complete code and received data count used for data reception can be changed to any setting values chosen by the user using

GX Configurator-SC.

6.1.1 Receiving methods

The following shows the methods for receiving data in any format using the nonprocedure protocol.

There are two methods for receiving data: the "reception via receive complete code" for receiving variable length messages, and the "reception via received data count" for receiving fixed length messages. The receive complete code and received data count used for data reception can be changed to any setting values chosen by the user using

GX Configurator-SC.

6

Q series C24

PLC CPU

Q25HCPU

MODE .

RUN .

ERR.

USER .

BAT.

BOOT .

1)

Reception data read request

2) 3)

INPUT instruction

Receive data count storage area

Receive data storage area

USB

RS-232

Receiving area

(buffer memory)

(00

H

)

A

(41

H

)

C

(43

H

)

E

(45

H

)

G

(47

H

)

ETX

(03

H

)

10

(0A

H

)

STX

(02

H

)

B

(42

H

)

D

(44

H

)

F

(46

H

)

H

(48

H

)

Head data Receive complete code

STX A B C D E F G H ETX

(02

H

) (41

H

) (42

H

) (43

H

) (44

H

) (45

H

) (46

H

) (47

H

) (48

H

) (03

H

)

Transmission data

External device

Description CH1/CH2

Reception data read request signal

INPUT instruction complete device

INPUT instruction

X3/XA

Control timing

INPUT

1) When data is received from the external device using either "reception via receive complete code" or "reception via received data count" method, the reception data read request signal (X3/XA) turns ON.

2) Control data is stored in the device designated with the INPUT instruction.

3) When the INPUT instruction is executed, receive data is read from the reception area of the buffer memory.

6 - 2 6 - 2

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(1) Data reception by receive complete code (for variable length reception)

(a) This method is used to send data by adding the receive complete code set in the Q series C24 at the complete of the message to be sent from the external device.

(b) When the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code data preset in

GX Configurator-SC by the user, it sends a receive data read request to the sequence program.

The read request from the Q series C24 allows the sequence program to read the receive data up to the receive complete code received from the external device.

(c) The receive complete code can be changed to match the specifications of the external device. An arbitrary 1-character (1-byte) code within the 00

H

to FF

H range can be designated.

(d) The Q series C24 issues a receive data read request to the PLC CPU as follows, according to the set value of the receive end code.

1) When receive complete code not changed (Default value: 0D0A

H

)

(CR+LF is added to the end of the message and sent from the external device.)

• If LF is received within the time set in the no-reception monitoring time

(timer 0) after CR is received, the Q series C24 stores the receive data up to CR+LF to the buffer memory receive data storage area and turns on the read request signal to the PLC CPU.

C

R

Timer 0 set time

L

F

External device

Q series C24

Reception data read reqest signal

(X3/XA)

6 - 3 6 - 3

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

• If the next data (LF, etc.) is not received within the time set in the non reception monitoring time (timer 0) after CR is received, the Q series

C24 stores the received data up to CR to the buffer memory receive data storage area and turns on the following signals to the PLC CPU.

When non procedure and non reception monitoring time format is 0:

Reception abnormal detection signal (X4/XB)

When non procedure and non reception monitoring time format is 1:

Reception data read request signal (X3/XA)

1

External device

Q series C24

C

R

( 2)

Timer 0 set time

[Format is 0]

Reception abnormal detection signal

(X4/XB)

[Format is 1]

Reception data read reqest signal

(X3/XA)

1 In non procedure protocol, a message is received by the increase in non reception monitoring time (timer 0) if the received complete code and the received data count are not decided.

For the non procedure protocol at the non reception monitoring time format, see Chapter 6 of the User’s Manual (Application).

2 CR is included as 1 byte of data included in the message.

2) When the receive complete code is changed and an arbitrary code is designated (00

H

designated)

(User defined receive complete code data is added to the end of the message and sent from the external device).

When the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code data changed by the user, it stores the receive data up to the receive complete code to the buffer memory receive area and turned on the read request signal to the PLC CPU.

Receive complete code data

External device

Q series C24

Reception data request signal

(X3/XA)

3) When receive complete code not designated (FFFF

H

designated)

Reading by received data count is enabled.

See (2) for a description of reading by received data count.

6 - 4 6 - 4

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) Reception by received data count (For fixed length reception)

(a) This method is used to receive messages of the same length (size) from the external device every time.

(b) When the Q series C24 receives data of the received data count preset in

GX Configurator-SC by the user, it sends a reception data read request to the sequence program.

When the sequence program receives the read request from the Q series

C24, it reads data up to the received data count received from the external device.

(c) The received data count default value is set to 511 (words). However, it can be changed within the size of the receive data storage area depending on the data contents exchanged with the external device.

POINT

(1) When the receive complete code and received data count are set to GX

Configurator-SC, both become valid.

In this case, if the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code before data corresponding to the received data count, it outputs (X3/XA: ON) a reception read request signal to the sequence program.

(2) For details on how to change the receive complete code and received data count, see Section 8.4.7.

6 - 5 6 - 5

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.1.2 The receive area and the received data list

The following shows the list of the receive area and the receive data for performing data reception using the non procedure protocol.

(1) Receive area

The receive area is a memory area for storing the data received from the external device and the receive data count in order to read the receive data for the PLC

CPU. By default, the receive area is assigned to addresses 600

H

to 7FF

H

(CH1 side) and A00

H

to BFF

H

(CH2 side).

CH1 address

600

H

601

H to

7FF

H

(Default)

Buffer memory

Receive data count storage area

Receive data storage area

The receive data count units (word/byte) are up to the value set to GX Configurator-SC word/byte units designation.

Writes the receive data storage count when the PLC CPU is requested to read the receive data.

Stores the arbitrary data area of the receive data.

6 - 6 6 - 6

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) The position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory can be changed with the GX Configurator-SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the receive data length. (See Section 8.4.7.)

(a) When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator-SC, specify as follows:

1) Receive buffer memory head address designation

Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the receive area in the user-definable area of the buffer memory (address: 400

H to 1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

H

).

2) Receive buffer memory length designation

Designate by address the length of the area (0001

H

to 1A00

H

) to be used as the receive area in the user-definable area of the buffer memory (address: 400

H

to 1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

H

).

(b) If the following functions are also used when the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory are changed, make sure that the addresses of the receive area do not overlap with those for the buffer memory that stores the transmission and reception data to be used by these functions.

1) MC protocol buffer memory read/write function

2) MC protocol on-demand function

3) Non procedure protocol transmission/receive function

4) Bidirectional protocol transmission/receive function

5) Communication data monitoring function

(2) When sending data from the external device to the Q series C24, one of the following two adjustments should be made so that the relationship shown below is maintained.

1) Reduce the transmission data size.

2) Increase the receive area.

Receive data storage area

Size of data sent from the external device

6 - 7 6 - 7

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

Head

From external device

"321GFEDCBA"

(2) Receive data list

The following describes the data list when data received from an external device is stored to the receive area.

1) The receive message is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory (receive data storage area).

2) The data is stored to the receive data storage area in low address (L) (H), next address (L) (H) order.

Under the following conditions, when the receive data count is an odd byte, 00

H

is stored in the upper byte of the final data storage position:

• When the unit for the received data count is designated in bytes.

• When data reception is performed using the receive complete code.

(Example) When receive arbitrary data area "ABCDEFG123" was stored

(The receive area is the default value.)

Q series C24

OS area

( 1)

CH1 address

600

H

601

H

602

H

603

H

604

H

605

H

606

H

Buffer memory

5 or 10

(B)

42

H

(D)

44

H

(F)

46

H

(1)

31

H

(3)

33

H

(A)

41

H

(C)

43

H

(E)

45

H

(G)

47

H

(2)

32

H

Receive data count storage area

Receive data storage area

The receive data is stored in low address (L)

(H), next address

(L)

(H) order in the order in which it is received.

1 The OS area of the Q series C24 shown in the above diagram is the memory (8448 bytes) that temporarily stores the data to be received while a request for the reading of the receive data is being made to the PLC CPU.

(The user cannot read the receive data in the OS area).

When the sequence program finishes reading the receive data in the buffer memory in response to the read request, the receive data in the OS area, and any succeeding receive data, is stored successively in the receive area of the buffer memory when the next read request is issued.

Also, when the OS area's free space, which stores the receive data, is reduced to 64 bytes default value or less, a request to discontinue data reception from the external device is issued by the following transmission control (the RS signal does not turn OFF):

• When DTR control is set, the DTR signal turns OFF.

• When DC1/DC3 control is set, DC3 is sent.

When there is no more free space in the OS area to store receive data, an SIO error occurs and the SIO information bit in the communication error information storage area (address: 201

H

/202

H

) in the buffer memory turns ON. In that case, succeeding receive data is discarded until a free space becomes available in the OS area.

For more details on the transmission control, see Chapter 7 of the

User's Manual (Application).

6 - 8 6 - 8

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

External device

Q series C24

REMARK

(1) Data reception when the receive data storage area is larger than the receive data length

The following control is performed.

(Example) When the receive area for the CH1 side interface is located at addresses 600

H

to 7FF

H

(default values) and data of 511 words or less is received by the CH1 side interface.

Complete code

100 words

Reception data read request signal

X3

Sequence program INPUT

Read data count: 100 words

(2) Data reception when the receive data storage area is smaller than the receive data length

Since the following control is performed, data link processing is required in the sequence program.

1) Reception using the complete code

(Example) When the receive area for the CH1 side interface is located at addresses 600

H

to 7FF

H

(default values), and data of 534 words is received by the CH1 side interface.

Complete code

511 words 23 words

External device

Q series C24

Reception data read request

X3

Sequence program

INPUT

Read data count:

511 words

INPUT

Read data count:

23 words

6 - 9 6 - 9

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

External device

Q series C24

Reception data read request signal

X3

Sequence program

2) Reception by received data count

When the received data count is set larger than the receive data storage area, the receive buffer memory length (default: 512 words) -1 set in buffer memory addresses A7

H

/147

H

is processed as the received data count.

(Receive data storage area) > (Data length received from external device)

1st data

511 words

(Example) When 550 words of data is received through the CH1 interface in three parts when the CH1 interface receive area consists of addresses 600

H

to 7FF

H

(default value)

39 words

2nd data

472 words 78 words

3rd data

433 words 117 words

INPUT INPUT

Read data....

1st 511 words

INPUT

Read data....

1st 39 words and

2nd 472 words

6 - 10 6 - 10

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.1.3 Sequence program for data reception

X3 Read request

This section explains the sequence program for data reception.

For details on the INPUT instruction for data reception, see Chapter 9.

(CH1 side)

Create control data from D0

X4

Abnormal detection

G.INPUT

Un D0 D10 M0

M0 M1

M1

Processing for normal completion

(receive data is stored)

Processing for abnormal completion

(Reading and discarding received data, resent request, etc.

(CH1 side)

Q series C24 ready signal

Reception data read request signal

Reception abnormal detection signal

(X1E)

(X3)

(X4)

INPUT instruction

1)

2)

3)

ON during abnormal reception detection

INPUT

INPUT instruction complete device

INPUT instruction complete device +1

(M0)

(M1)

(Normal completion/abnormal completion)

4)

2)

3)

ON during abnormal reception detection

INPUT

4)

1 scan

Received data count storage area

(Buffer memory address: 600

H

)

Received data storage area

(Buffer memory address: 601

H

to) m n

Receive data 1

1

Receive data 2

Data reception

Data reception-1 Data reception-2

1) Start the self-station PLC.

The values specified with GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24.

2) When the amount of data specified by the received data count or data containing the receive complete code is received from the external device, the reception data read request signal turns ON.

3) After the control data for the INPUT instruction is stored in the device, the sequence program executes the INPUT instruction and reads the receive data.

6 - 11 6 - 11

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

4) The device completing the INPUT instruction turns ON when the reading of receive data is completed.

When the complete device + 1 (abnormal completion signal) turns ON, the error code is stored in the control data completion status (S1 + 1).

(Program example)

When the Q series C24 I/O signals are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F:

Designate the receive channel.

Clear the reception result and receive data count storage device to 0.

Designate the allowable receive data count.

With normal completion, the receive data within the allowable receive data count (user designated) is read

• from the receive data storage area in the buffer memory.

Once the INPUT instruction is executed, the user

designated read completion signal (M0) turns ON

for 1 scan.

The reading of receive data and switching of the

ON/OFF status are performed by the PLC CPU.

The abnormal completion flag is reset by an external command.

Q series C24

Address

258

H

Buffer memory

Data reception result storage area

D 0

D 1

D 2

D 3

For normal completion

Interface number

Reception result

Receive data count

Allowable receive data count

(1)

(0)

(n)

(10)

D10 to

D m

Receive data

Receive data to

600

H

601

H to

7FF

H

Receive data count storage area

Receive data storage area

D 0

D 1

D 2

D 3

For abnormal completion

Interface number

Reception result

Receive data count

(1)

(other than 0)

(n)

Allowable receive data count (10)

D10 to

D x

Receive data

Receive data to

When the receive data count is larger than the allowable receive data count, only the data up to the allowable receive data count will be stored and the excess data will be discarded.

From the buffer memory (address 258

From the buffer memory (address 600

H

H

)

)

Data received prior to an error occurrence will be stored in the receive data storage device.

6 - 12 6 - 12

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) Receive data can also be read using interrupt programs.

For more details on reading receive data with interrupt programs, see Chapter

4 of the User's Manual (Application).

Note that if the reading of data received from the same interface is to be performed, it is not possible to combine the reading of data received by the main program and reading of data received by the interrupt program.

Accordingly, use one or the other of the above programs to read the data received.

(2) The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction. (See Chapter 9.)

(3) More than one INPUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously.

Execute the next INPUT instruction only after the execution of the first INPUT instruction is completed.

(4) When the communication data count is set in word units, and if the received data count is an odd byte when requesting the reading of received data to the

PLC CPU, the receive data count is processed as follows:

Receive data count = Receive data byte count/2 … Fractions following the decimal point are rounded up

Also, 00

H

is stored in the higher byte of the final data storage position in the receive area where receive data is stored.

6 - 13 6 - 13

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.1.4 Receive data clear

For the data reception by a non procedure protocol, if the transmission of data from a transmitting device is interrupted due to trouble occurring, it may be necessary for the data received up to the present time are cleared in the receiving device and for the data to be received again from the start.

The methods for clearing reception data in the Q Series C24 is shown below. Either method may be used to clear the reception data as is necessary.

1) Clear the reception data by the dedicated instruction "CSET."

2) Write to/read from the reception data clear request area (address A8

H

/148

H

).

(FROM/TO instruction)

3) Clear the reception data by GX Configurator-SC (see Section 8.7).

REMARK

When transmitting data to an external device from the Q Series C24, do not execute a clear request of the reception data shown in this section.

If a reception data clear request is executed when transmitting data to an external device, The Q Series C24 stops data transmission and terminates the dedicated instruction for transmission abnormally. (The transmission completed signal does not go ON.) If a reception data clear request is executed during data reception, the data received up to that point are cleared.

(1) Receive data clear processing

The Q series C24 performs the following procession when the receive data clear is performed.

• The data received up to that point can be ignored.

• The receive data count up to that point is "0".

(The receive area in the buffer memory is not initialized).

• Set to the status prior to the start of data reception.

(2) Procedure for clearing the reception data by the dedicated instruction "CSET"

This instruction clears the reception data up to the present without interrupting the data transmission processing.

(Procedure for clearing) ··· In case of the CH1 side interface

1) Execute the CSET instruction

If the CSET instruction is executed while the read request (X03/X0A) or reception abnormal detection signal (X04/X0B) is turned on, the CSET instruction is kept waiting until the signal is turned off.

2) The reception data clear processing is executed at the OS area of the Q series C24 (see Section 6.1.2).

6 - 14 6 - 14

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

The following is a program example of clearing the reception data by the dedicated instruction "CSET."

Set the execution type

Set the request type

(Reception data clear)

Execute the reception data clear

Normal completion

Abnomal completion

Reset the complete flag by external command

(3) Receive data clear procedure using FROM/TO instruction

Write and read the buffer memory receive data clear request area (addresses A8

H

/148

H

) using the procedure described below.

When resuming data communications with an external device, resume it after completing the reception data clear processing with the Q Series C24.

Depending on the data communications system, it may be necessary to restart data communications with the external device after notifying the external device from the PLC CPU that resumption of communications is possible.

(Clear Procedure)· ··When the CH1 side interface is used.

(1) Since receive processing, send processing and receive data clear processing are not being performed, “1” is written to buffer memory address A8H using the TO instruction for the sequence program.

(2) Receive data clear processing is performed for the Q Series C24’s OS area

(See Section 6.1.2).

(3) When receive data clear processing is completed, the value in buffer memory address A8H becomes “0.”

The following page shows an example of a program to clear receive data with the

FROM/TO instruction.

Create a program that contains the contacts (user flags, etc.) indicating the following statuses in the TO instruction.

• Contact when the CHn reception data read request signal (X3/XA) is OFF

• Contact when the CHn reception abnormal detection signal (X4/XB) is OFF

• Contact indicating that send and receive processes are not currently being performed

• Contact indicating that reception data clear processing is not currently being performed

1 When the function version A Q Series C24 is used, resume data communications a further 100 ms after the buffer memory address

A8H/148H value changes from a “1” to a “0.”

6 - 15 6 - 15

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

Q series C24

Buffer memory address A8

H

PLC CPU

(Program)

"0"

(1)

TO instruction

(Write "1" to address A8H)

Send request execution disabled

Dedicated instruction for sending execution disabled, too

(2)

Receive data clear processing

(3)

"1" "0"

( 1)

( 1)

( 1)

1 Add the dotted line portion to the sequence program when the function version

A Q Series C24 is used. (Carry out communications when M19 is ON.)

6 - 16 6 - 16

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.1.5 How to detect reception errors

This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when receiving data from the external device.

The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data reception.

Cause of reception error

A transmission error occurred due to noise.

A timeout for the no-reception monitoring (timer 0) occurred.

Received data that could not be converted using the ASCII-BIN conversion.

Received data larger than the size that could be stored in the OS area of the Q series C24.

Reference section

User's Manual Chapter 6

(Application)

Chapter 13

Section 6.1.2

(1) Confirmation using the sequence program

1) The following device and input signals turn ON.

• INPUT instruction complete device + 1

• Reception abnormal detection signal (X4/XB)

• ERR LED ON signal (XE/XF)

2) The reception error code can be checked using the INPUT instruction control data ((S1) + 1).

Or, it can be checked by reading the data reception result storage area in the buffer memory (addresses 258

H

/268

H

).

For details on how to check the error code contents and take corrective actions, see Chapter 10.

(b) How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code (see Section 10.1.2.)

1) To turn off only the ERR LED, write "1" to the LED OFF request area

(addresses 0

H

/1

H

) in the buffer memory.

2) To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code, turn ON the ERR LED

OFF request output signal (YE/YF).

(Example) To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the

CH1 side

INPUT instruction

Completion device + 1

6 - 17 6 - 17

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator-SC

1) Confirmation using the display LED

When the Q series C24 detects an error, including a transmission error, the

ERR LED lights up. (See Chapter 10.)

2) Confirmation using GX Configurator-SC

• The monitor function is used to check for errors. (See Sections 8.6.3 and

8.6.5.)

• The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function. (See Section

8.6.10.)

3) Confirming the error code

Use one of the following to confirm the error code.

• GX Configurator-SC monitor function (See Section 8.6.5.)

• GX Developer buffer memory monitor function (monitors addresses

258

H

/268

H

)

(3) Receive data when a reception error occurs

(a) Storing receive data

The receive data for which an error was detected is discarded and only the normally received data is stored in the Q series C24.

Thus, there may be missing data among the data that has been read to the

PLC CPU when a reception error occurs.

(b) Reading receive data

When receive data is read to the PLC CPU by turning the reception abnormal detection signal (X4/XB) ON, the data that was normally received prior to the error detection is read. Read and discard receive data as needed.

6 - 18 6 - 18

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

PLC CPU

Q25HCPU

MODE .

RUN .

ERR.

USER .

BAT.

BOOT .

Reception abnormal detection

INPUT instruction

USB

RS-232

Q series C24

Receive data count storage area

Receive data storage area

Receive area

(buffer memory)

(00

H

)

A

(41

H

)

C

(43

H

)

E

(45

H

)

3

(03

H

)

STX

(02

H

)

B

(42

H

)

D

(44

H

)

Head data

Reception error causing data

Receive complete code

STX A B C D E F G H ETX

(02

H

) (41

H

) (42

H

) (43

H

) (44

H

) (45

H

) (46

H

) (47

H

) (48

H

) (03

H

)

Transmission data

External device

Q series C24 ready signal

Reception data read request

Reception abnormal detection signal

INPUT instruction

(X1E)

(X3)

(X4)

INPUT instruction complete device

INPUT instruction complete device + 1

(normal completion/abnormal completion)

Receive data count storage area

(Buffer memory address: 600

H

)

Receive data storage area

(Buffer memory addresses: 601

H

to)

INPUT

1 scan n

3

ERR LED lights up

Receive data

Reception abnormal detection data

Data reception

When the data from "G" to in the reception message shown in the figure above is received normally, the data is stored in the Q series C24 OS area.

The receive data stored in the OS area will be read to the PLC CPU in the succeeding read operation.

6 - 19 6 - 19

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.1.6 Received data count and receive complete code settings

The following default values have been set for the received data count and receive complete code that are used for data reception with the non procedure protocol.

If it is necessary to change the following default settings, change the settings on the

GX Configurator-SC "Non procedure system setting" screen according to the specifications of the external device (see Sections 8.4.5 and 8.4.7).

Buffer memory address where the setting value is stored

Remarks Setting data

Default value

Received data count

511 (1FF

H

)

Allowable range

Less than the size of the receive data storage area

0000

H

to 00FF

H

Receive complete code

0D0A

H

(CR, LF) FFFF

H

A4

H

/144

H

A5

H

/145

H

Unit is in accordance with the word/byte units designation

When any code is set

When there is no receive complete code

REMARK

Other than through the setting using GX Configurator-SC or the TO instruction at the startup of the Q series C24, the received data count and receive complete code setting values can be changed even after data communication has started if the timing is as shown in the chart below.

The following describes the procedure for changing setting values for data reception via the non procedure protocol after the start of data communication, and for the resumption of data reception processing. Specifically, the module restrictions are explained, along with the timing and procedure for changing the setting values.

Reception

I/O signal

CH1 side CH2 side

X3 XA

(1) Data receiving method

Reception using a dedicated instruction (INPUT) or an interrupt program ( 1) cannot be performed. (Transmission using a dedicated instruction (OUTPUT) can be performed.) Data must be received using the FROM instruction in the main program.

The following describes the I/O signals. (A program example is shown on the following page.)

1 For details on the data reception using interrupt programs, see the User's

Manual (Application).

Signal name

Device that turns ON/OFF

CPU Q series C24

Timing

Reception data read request (Only when normal)

X4

Y1

XB

Y8

Reception abnormal detection

Reception data read completion

(Only when abnormal)

POINT

When the reception abnormal detection signal (X4/XB) turns ON, read the error code from the buffer memory below, and then check the type of error and take corrective action based on the information found in Chapter 10.

• Data reception result storage area (addresses 258

H

/268

H

)

6 - 20 6 - 20

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) Setting values that can be changed

Of the initial settings from GX Configurator-SC stored in the buffer memory, only the following setting values can be changed after data communication has started.

• Received data count (buffer memory addresses: A4

H

, 144

H

)

• Receive complete code (buffer memory addresses: A5

H

, 145

H

)

(3) Timing and procedure for changing the setting values

1) Timing of change

To change the receive complete code and received data count after data communication has started, change the setting when the status of the I/O signals relating to the reading of receive data is as follows.

• Reception data read request signal (X3, XA) or reception abnormal detection signal (X4, XB): ON

• Reception data read completion signal (X1, Y8): OFF

2) Change procedure

When data reception from an external device causes the reception data read request signal/reception abnormal detection signal to turn ON, turn ON the reception data read completion signal after performing the following.

• Read the receive data.

• Change the setting values for the receive complete code and the received data count.

(Example) When reading data received in the CH1 side interface

External device side

Data 1 Data 2

PLC CPU side

Data read request using setting value -A/-1

Data read request using setting value -B/-2

Read request signal

(X3)

1)

Read completion signal

(Y1)

2)

Reads receive data

4)

3) 5)

Reads receive data

Read request

1)

Received data count setting area

(buffer memory address: A4

H

)

Receive complete code setting area

(buffer memory address: A5

H

)

Setting value-A

Setting value-1

Setting value-B

Setting value-2

(Program example: I/O signals for the Q series C24 are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F)

2)

Reads receive data count.

2)

3)

4)

5)

( 1)

Reads the data that is equal to the receive data count.

Change the setting value for the received data count as needed.

Change the setting value for the receive complete code as needed.

Turns ON the read complete signal.

1 When unit is in bytes

6 - 21 6 - 21

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.2 Sending Data to the External Device

This section explains data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device.

6.2.1 Transmission methods

The following shows how to send data in any format using the non procedure protocol.

PLC CPU

Transmission data

STX A B C D E F G H ETX

(02

H

) (41

H

) (42

H

) (43

H

) (44

H

) (45

H

) (46

H

) (47

H

) (48

H

) (03

H

)

Q series C24

1) 2)

OUTPUT instruction

Transmission data count designation area

Transmission area

(buffer memory)

10

Transmission data designation area

(00

H

)

A

(41

H

)

C

(43

H

)

E

(45

H

)

(0A

H

)

STX

(02

H

)

B

(42

H

)

D

(44

H

)

G

(47

H

)

F

(46

H

)

ETX

(03

H

)

H

(48

H

)

External device

3)

Transmission data

ETX

(03

H

)

H

(48

H

)

A

(41

H

)

STX

(03

H

)

Contents

Transmission instruction

OUTPUT instruction completion device

OUTPUT instruction

CH1/CH2 Control timing

OUTPUT

1) Transmission data is stored in the device designated with the OUTPUT instruction.

2) Control data is stored in the device designated with the OUTPUT instruction.

3) When the OUTPUT instruction is executed, the Q series C24 sends the amount of data designated by the transmission data count from the transmission data area to the external device in ascending order of the transmission data area addresses.

6 - 22 6 - 22

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.2.2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data

This section explains the arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data for performing data transmission using the non procedure protocol.

CH1 side address

400

H

401

H to

5FF

H

(Default setting)

(1) Transmission area

The transmission area is a memory area for storing the data and the data count that are transmitted from the PLC CPU to the external device via the Q series

C24. By default, the transmission area is assigned to addresses 400

H

to 5FF

H

(CH1 side) and 800

H

to 9FF

H

(CH2 side).

Buffer memory

Transmission data count storage area

The unit of transmission data count (words/bytes) is in accordance with the word/byte units designation in GX Configurator-SC.

• The transmission data count designated with the

OUTPUT instruction is written.

Transmission data storage area

• The transmission data designated with the OUTPUT instruction is written.

6 - 23 6 - 23

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) The position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator-SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the received data length. (See Sections 8.4.5 and 8.4.7.)

(a) When changing the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator-SC, specify as follows:

1) Transmission buffer memory head address designation

Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area of the buffer memory

(address: 400

H

to 1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

H

).

2) Transmission buffer memory length designation

Designate by addresses the length of the area (0001

H

to 1A00

H

) to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area of the buffer memory (address: 400

H

to 1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

H

).

(b) If the following functions are also used when the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory are changed, make sure that the addresses of the transmission area do not overlap with those for the buffer memory that stores the transmission and receive data to be used by these functions.

1) MC protocol buffer memory read/write function

2) MC protocol on-demand function

3) Non procedure protocol transmission/receive function

4) Bidirectional protocol transmission/receive function

5) Communication data monitoring function

(2) Set the size of data per data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device so that it is smaller than the size of the transmission data's designated area in the buffer memory.

(Transmission data designation area)

(Size of arbitrary data portion to be sent from the PLC CPU)

To transmit data whose size is larger than the transmission data designation area, increase the transmission area, or divide the transmission data before sending.

6 - 24 6 - 24

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) Transmission data arrangement

The following example shows an arrangement of the transmission data to be sent to the external device when storing it in the transmission area.

(Example) When transmitting "ABCDEFG123" (The transmit area is the default value.)

403

H

404

H

405

H

406

H

CH1 side address

400

H

401

H

402

H

(F)

46

H

(1)

31

H

(B)

42

H

(D)

44

H

(3)

33

H

(5)

35

H

Buffer memory

5 or 10

(E)

45

H

(G)

47

H

(A)

41

H

(C)

43

H

(2)

32

H

(4)

34

H

1)

2)

Transmission data count storage area

In accordance with the word/byte units designation

Word units....5

Bytes units....10

Transmission data designation area

Sequentially store the transmission data to low address (L)

(H), next

address (L)

(H), in the order of transmission.

6.2.3 Sequence program for transmission data

A sequence program for transmission data is explained below.

For details on the OUTPUT instruction used for data transmission, see Chapter 9.

Transmission instruction

(In case of the CH1 side)

Create transmission data from D11

Create control data from D0

M0 M1

M1

G.OUTPUT

Un D0 D11 M0

Processing for normal completion

Processing for abnormal completion

(retransmission, etc.)

6 - 25 6 - 25

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

Q series C24 ready signal

Transmission instruction

(X1E)

1)

2)

3)

OUTPUT instruction

OUTPUT instruction complete device

OUTPUT instruction complete device + 1

(normal completion/abnormal completion)

Transmission data count designation area

(buffer memory address: 400

H

)

Transmission data storage area

(buffer memory address: 401

H

to)

0

OUTPUT

4)

ON when transmission abnormal completion

1 scan n

Transmission data

Transmitting data

1) Starts the local station PLC.

The setting values for GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24.

2) Inputs the user data transmission command signal.

3) Executes the OUTPUT instruction after storing the transmission data and the control data for the OUTPUT instruction in the device.

Data is sent when the OUTPUT instruction is executed.

4) When the Q series C24 transmission processing completes, the completion device for the OUTPUT instruction turns ON.

When the completion device + 1 (abnormal completion signal) turns ON, the error code is stored in the control data completion status (S1+1).

6 - 26 6 - 26

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(Program example)

When Q series C24 I/O signals are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F:

The transmission command is converted into pulse.

Transmission data is stored.

Designate the number of the interface(CH ) that will send the data.

Clear the transmission result storage device to 0.

Designate the transmission data count in word units.

(Designate K10 when the unit is bytes.)

The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent.

After the OUTPUT instruction is executed, the user designated transmission complete signal (M 0) turns ON for one scan.

Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory, and issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are all executed by the PLC CPU.

The completion flag is reset by an external command.

Q series C24

Address

257

H

Buffer memory

Data transmission result storage area

D 0

D 1

D 2

For normal completion

Interface number

Transmission result

Transmission data count

(0001

H

)

(0000

H

)

(0005

H

)

D11 to

D15

Transmission data

(4241

H

) to

(0A0D

H

)

D 0

D 1

D 2

For abnormal completion

Interface number (0001

H

)

Transmission result (other than 0000

H

)

Transmission data count

(0005

H

)

D11 to

D15

Transmission data

(4241

H

) to

(0A0D

H

)

400

H

401

H to

5FF

H

Transmission data count designation area

Transmission data designation area

From buffer memory (address 257

H

)

POINT

(1) The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction. (See Chapter 9.)

(2) More than one OUTPUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously.

Execute the next OUTPUT instruction only after the execution of the first

OUTPUT instruction is completed.

6 - 27 6 - 27

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.2.4 How to detect transmission errors

This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when sending data to the external device.

The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data transmission.

Cause of reception error

A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time (timer 2)

Reference section

User's Manual

(Application)

Section 6.3

Designated number of transmission data was larger than the size that could be stored in the transmission area

Section 6.2.2

OUTPUT instruction

Complete device + 1

(1) Confirmation using the sequence program

(a) Detecting a transmission error

1) The following device and input signal turn ON.

• OUTPUT instruction complete device + 1

• ERR LED ON signal (XE/XF)

2) The transmission error code can be checked using the OUTPUT instruction control data ((S1) + 1).

Or, it can be checked by reading the data transmission result storage area in the buffer memory (addresses 257

H

/267

H

).

For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions, see Chapter 10.

(b) How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code (see Section 10.1.2)

1) To turn off only the ERR LED, write a "1" to the LED OFF request area

(addresses 0

H

/1

H

) in the buffer memory.

2) To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code, turn ON the ERR LED

OFF request output signal (YE/YF).

(Example) To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the

CH1 side

6 - 28 6 - 28

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator-SC

1) Confirmation using the display LED

When the Q series C24 detects an error, including a transmission error, the

ERR LED lights up. (See Chapter 10.)

2) Confirmation using the GX Configurator-SC

• The monitor function is used to check for errors. (See Sections 8.6.3 and

8.6.5.)

• The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function. (See Section

8.6.10.)

3) Confirming the error code

Use one of the following to confirm the error code.

• GX Configurator-SC monitor function (See Section 8.6.5.)

• GX Developer buffer memory monitor function (monitors addresses

257

H

/267

H

)

POINT

When a transmission error occurs, the PLC CPU may not transmit all the designated data.

It is recommended that data communications be performed by establishing a user arbitrary communication procedure that can check normal transmission by reception of a response to data transmission.

6 - 29 6 - 29

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

6.3 Data Communications Precautions

The following describes the precautions to be taken during non procedure protocol data communications.

(1) The Q series C24 transmission sequence initialization conditions

The initial status indicates the status where transmission has stopped and reception data has been discarded.

The Q series C24 transmission sequence initialization conditions are as follows.

1) When the power is turned on, the Reset switch on the CPU panel is operated, or the Q series C24 mode is switched

2) When the receive data was cleared.

3) When the CD signal was turned off when data communications were performed by setting CD terminal check enable during full-duplex communications through the RS-232 interface.

(2) Generation of framing error in external device

When nothing is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device through the RS-422 or RS-422/485 interface, a framing error may be generated by the noise etc, in the external device.

Send an arbitrary code to identify the head of the send data from the Q series

C24 to the external device.

Before data communication check the Q series C24 interface specifications.

(3) Data communications with external device (computer, etc.) over a multidrop link

When the external device PLC CPU are connected by a 1:n multidrop link, each the Q series C24 receives the data transmitted by the external device.

With a multidrop link, receive data by user frame ( 1).

If data is not received by user frame, a sequence program that ignores the receive data other than the receive data addressed to the local station by sequence program, including the data indicating the objective PLC CPU in the message, must be written.

(Sample message)

(Example)

STX

(02

H

)

Space

(20

H

)

Station

No. 0

(32

H

)

Station

No. 2

(32

H

)

Data length

(BIN data)

1 See chapter 11 of User's Manual (Application)

Data

CR

(0D

H

)

LF

(0A

H

)

6 - 30 6 - 30

6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(4) Retry processing for data reception errors

The data when reception error occurred is discarded and only the data for the normal reception is taken into the Q series C24. For this reason, the reception message may be missing data when an error occurs. To assure the correct transmission and reception of data it is recommended that a normal/error response message is received and a response message reception timeout check is conducted for data transmitted between the PLC CPU and the external equipment and that measures be taken when an error message is received or when an error timeout occurs, such as retransmitting the data (transmission retry).

6 - 31 6 - 31

7

7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

Data communication using the bidirectional protocol is a function for sending/receiving any data using the message format and transmission control procedure for the Q series C24 bidirectional protocol between external devices and PLC CPUs.

Any external devices that can install application programs and transmit and receive data in accordance with the MELSEC PLC protocol can communicate with the PLC

CPUs using the bidirectional protocol.

This chapter explains the basic transmission and reception methods when performing data communication using the bidirectional protocol.

Follow the procedure described in this chapter to create sequence programs for sending and receiving data for the PLC CPU.

Regarding the additional functions listed below for data communication using the bidirectional protocol, see the separate User's Manuals (Application)

• Reading receive data using interrupt programs

(See Chapter 4 of Application)

• Sending/receiving data using ASCII data (ASCII-BIN conversion)

(See Chapter 13 of Application)

• Sending/receiving data using transparent code designation

(See Chapter 12 of Application)

7 - 1 7 - 1

7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.1 Data Reception from the External Device

This section explains the data reception from the external device.

7.1.1 Receiving methods

The following shows how to receive data sent from the external device using the bidirectional protocol. Since the size of each message received is recognized using the

"data length" information contained in the message, messages of any size can be sent from the external device.

3)

PLC CPU

Sequence program

Read

(BIDIN instructions)

2)

Read request

Arbirary data

(00

H

to FF

H

)

Q series C24

Buffer memory

Receive area

(When normal)

1)

Arbitrary data

ENQ Data length Data area

Sum check code

(When abnormal) (00

H

to FF

H

)

Ignored

Error code NAK

2)

4)

ACK

External device

7

Contents

Reception data read request signal

BIDIN instruction completion device

BIDIN instruction

CH1/CH2

X3/XA

Control Timing

BIDIN

7 - 2 7 - 2

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

1) When the control code ENQ is received, the Q series C24 starts data reception processing.

When the data specified by the data length is received, the Q series C24 ends the reception processing of that data.

If "Sum check" is set with GX Developer, the Q series C24 checks whether the message is normal or abnormal using the sum check code received immediately after the message and the sum check code calculated by internal processing.

If "No sum check" is set with GX Developer, messages are not checked using the sum check codes.

2) If the message has normally been received, the reception data read request signal

(X3/XA) turns ON.

If an error has been detected when receiving the message, the Q series C24 sends an abnormal end response (NAK message) to the external device.

The reception data read request will not be sent to the PLC CPU.

(The reception abnormal detection signal (X4/XB) does not come on.)

3) Control data is stored in the device designated with the BIDIN instruction and then the BIDIN instruction is executed.

Receive data is read from the receive area of the buffer memory.

4) When the BIDIN instruction has been executed, the Q series C24 sends a normal end response (ACK message) to the external device.

7 - 3 7 - 3

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.1.2 Arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data

This section shows the arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data for performing data reception using the bidirectional protocol.

CH1 address

600

H

601

H to

7FF

H

(Default)

(1) Receive area

The receive area is a memory that stores the received data length (receive data count) and data area received from an external device.

The receive area is allocated to addresses 600

H

to 7FF

H

(CH1 side) and A00

H

to

BFF

H

(CH2 side) at initial setting.

Buffer memory

The units of data length (word/byte) is in accordance with the word/byte units designation in GX Configurator-SC.

Receive data count storage area

Data length

The contents of data length of the received message are stored.

Receive data storage area

• Data area

The contents of the data area of the received message are stored in ascending address order.

7 - 4 7 - 4

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) The position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator-SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the received data length. (See Sections 8.4.5 and 8.4.7.)

(a) When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator-SC, specify as follows:

1) Receive buffer memory head address designation

Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the receive area in the user definable area of the buffer memory (address: 400

H

to

1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

H

).

2) Receive buffer memory length designation

Designate by addresses the length of the area (0001

H

to 1A00

H

) to be used as the receive area in the user definable area of the buffer memory (address: 400

H

to 1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

H

).

(b) If the following functions are also used when the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory are changed, make sure that the addresses of the receive area do not overlap with those for the buffer memory that stores the transmission and reception data to be used by these functions.

1) MC protocol buffer memory read/write function

2) MC protocol on-demand function

3) Non procedure protocol transmission/receive function

4) Bidirectional protocol transmission/receive function

5) Communication data monitoring function

(2) When sending data to the Q series C24 from the external device, one of the following two adjustments should be made so that the relationship shown below is maintained.

1) Reduce the send data size.

2) Increase the receive area.

(Receive data storage area)

(Size of data portion sent from the external device)

7 - 5 7 - 5

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) Arrangement of receive data

The following example illustrates the arrangement of data received from the external device when it is stored in the receive area.

1) The receive message is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory (receive data storage area).

2) The data is stored to the receive data storage area in low address (L) (H), next address (L) (H) order.

If the received data is "ABCDEFG123", it will be stored as shown below (for the CH1 side):

Q series C24

Receive data count storage area

Receive data storage area

Receive area

(buffer memory)

(00

H

)

B

(42

H

)

D

(44

H

)

F

(46

H

)

1

(31

H

)

3

(33

H

)

5

(05

H

)

A

(41

H

)

C

(43

H

)

E

(45

H

)

G

(47

H

)

2

(32

H

)

Receive data (response message)

Data length

ENQ (0005

H

)

L H

A B C D E F G 1 2 3

Sum check code

L H

05

H

00

H

41

H

42

H

43

H

44

H

45

H

46

H

47

H

31

H

32

H

33

H

47

H

02

H

Transmission data (response message)

ACK

06

H

(Normal completion)

External device

When the data length unit is in bytes, 00

H

is stored in the higher byte of the last data storage position in the receive area when the data length of the message is an even byte.

(3) Contents of receive data

The contents of receive data, including the receive data as indicated in

Section 7.2.2, are explained below.

(a) Control codes

The types of control codes are shown in the table below.

Signal name

ENQ

ACK

NAK

Code

(hexadecimal)

05

H

06

H

15

H

Contents

Enquiry

Acknowledge

Negative

Acknowledge

Application

Code for starting data transmission.

Response code to the opposite side when data was received normally.

Response code to the opposite side when data could not be received normally. (Error code is sent immediately after the response code.)

1) For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 the Q series C24 checks and processes the control code received.

It cannot be read from the sequence program.

2) For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device

The control code to be transmitted is added by the Q series C24.

7 - 6 7 - 6

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(b) Data length

This indicates the number of bytes or words for the data portion of the message.

The unit of data length (words/bytes) is in accordance with the word/byte units designation in GX Configurator-SC.

1) For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24

The Q series C24 checks the length of the data received.

When the reception is normal, the Q series C24 stores the receive data in the receive data storage area of the Q series C24 buffer memory, assigning the first byte as the lower byte (L).

2) For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device

The length of the transmission data is the number of the transmission data designated by the sequence program using the BIDOUT instruction.

The Q series C24 sends this value as is from the lower byte (L).

(c) Data portion

This consists of an array of original one-byte data to be transmitted to the external device side, which can handle 00

H

to FF

H

code data.

1) For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24

If the receive data portion is normal, the Q series C24 takes the codes as is and stores them in the receive data storage area in sequence, beginning with the youngest address.

The storage size is in accordance with the data length in the message

(See item (b) above) and the word/byte units designation in GX

Configurator-SC.

2) For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device

The transmission data portion is the number of the transmission data designated by the sequence program using the BIDOUT instruction.

The Q series C24 sends the transmission data using the existing codes until the transmission data count is reached in accordance with the word/byte units designation in GX Configurator-SC to the transmission data designation area.

7 - 7 7 - 7

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(d) Sum check code

The sum check code expresses the numeric value for the lower two bytes

(16 bits) of the results (sum) from the addition of the data length and the data portion in the message as binary code data.

When "Sum check" is specified with the transmission setting in GX

Developer, it is necessary to add a sum check code at the end of the message.

1) For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24

The Q series C24 checks and processes the sum check code received.

It cannot be read from the sequence program.

When "No sum check" is specified, once a data portion of message corresponding to the data length is received, the succeeding data received will be ignored up to the control code that follows (See (a)).

The following example shows the contents of a sum check code in the message.

2) For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device

The sum check code to be transmitted is calculated and added by the Q series C24. When "No sum check" is specified, no sum check code is transmitted.

(Example) The following shows the sum check code when "ABCDEFGHIJ " and the numeric value 100 are sent as data

(when the unit is in bytes).

Arbitrary data

Data

External device side

E

N

Q

L

Data length

(000C

H

)

H

A B C D E F G H I J

L

100

(0064

H

)

H L

Sum check code

H

05

H

0C

H

00

H

41

H

42

H

43

H

44

H

45

H

46

H

47

H

48

H

49

H

4A

H

64

H

00

H

27

H

03

H

Q series C24

0C

H

+ 00

H

+ 41

H

+ 42

H

+ 43

H

+ 44

H

+ 45

H

+ 46

H

+

47

H

+ 48

H

+ 49

H

+ 4A

H

+ 64

H

+ 00

H

Contents of 0327

H

memory b15

0 0 0 0

(H) to

0

Added value = 0327

H

0 1 b8 b7

1 0 0 1

(L) to

0 0 1 b1 b0

1 1

03

H

27

H

(L) (H)

7 - 8 7 - 8

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(e) Error code

The error code indicates the definition of the error during NAK response.

(For more details on the error codes, see Chapter 10.)

1) For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24

For error codes from the external device, transmit the codes specified by the user.

The error codes (0022

H

to 005F

H

) that are not used by the Q series C24 can be used.

The Q series C24 stores the received error codes as a completion status in the control code for the BIDOUT instruction.

They are also stored in the data transmission result storage area in the buffer memory (address: 257

H

).

2) For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device

The error codes are added by the Q series C24.

When an error code is transmitted, the Q series C24 writes the same error code in the data reception result storage area of the buffer memory

(address: 258

H

).

7 - 9 7 - 9

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.1.3 Sequence program for data reception

This section explains the sequence program for data reception.

For details on the BIDIN instruction for data reception, see Chapter 9.

X3 Read request

(CH1)

Create control data from D0

M0 M1

G.BIDIN

Un D0 D10 M0

Processing for normal completion

(stores receive data, etc.)

Q series C24 ready signal

(X1E)

1)

Reception data read request signal

BIDIN instruction

(X3)

BIDIN instruction complete device

BIDIN instruction complete device +1

(Normal completion)

(OFF)

Receive data count storage area

(Buffer memory address: 600

H

)

Receive data storage area

(Buffer memory address: 601

H

to 7FF

H

) m

2)

3)

BIDIN

4) n

Receive data

One scan

Data reception Response transmission

1) Start the local station PLC.

The values specified with GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24.

2) When data is received from the external device, the reception data read request signal turns ON.

3) After the control data for the BIDIN instruction is stored in the device, the sequence program executes the BIDIN instruction and reads the receive data.

4) When the reading of receive data is completed, a response message (ACK message when the operation was completed normally) is sent and the device that has completed the BIDIN instruction turns ON.

7 - 10 7 - 10

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(Program example)

When Q series C24 I/O signals are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F:

Designate the receive channel.

Clear the receive data count storage device to 0.

Designate the allowable receive data count.

With the normal completion, the receive data within the allowable receive data count

(user designated) is read from the receive data storage area in the buffer memory.

• After the BIDIN instruction is executed,

• the user designated read completion signal (M0) comes on for 1 scan.

The reading of received data is performed by the PLC CPU.

Q series C24

Address

258

H

Buffer memory

Data reception result storage area

D 0

D 1

D 2

D 3

For normal completion

Interface number

Reception result

Receive data count

Allowable receive data count

(1)

(0)

(n)

(10)

D10 to

D m

Receive data

Receive data to

600

H

601

H to

7FF

H

Receive data count storage area

Receive data storage area

When the received data count is larger than the allowable received data count, only the data up to the allowable received data count will be stored and the excess data will be discarded.

7 - 11 7 - 11

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) Receive data can also be read using interrupt programs.

For more details on reading receive data with interrupt programs, see Chapter

4 of the User's Manual (Application).

Note that if the reading of data received from the same interface is to be performed, it is not possible to combine the reading of data received by the main program and reading of data received by the interrupt program.

Accordingly, use one or the other of the above programs to read the data received.

(2) The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction. (See Chapter 9.)

(3) More than one BIDIN instruction cannot be executed simultaneously.

Execute the next BIDIN instruction only after the execution of the first BIDIN instruction is completed.

(4) If the communication data count is set in byte units and the receive data count is an odd byte when requesting the reading of receive data to the PLC CPU,

00

H

is stored in the higher byte of the final data storage position in the receive data storage area.

7 - 12 7 - 12

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.1.4 How to detect reception errors

This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when receiving data from the external device.

The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data reception.

Cause of reception error

A transmission error occurred because of noise.

A timeout occurred for the no-reception monitoring time (timer 0).

A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time (timer 2)

Data that could not be converted with the ASCII-BIN conversion was detected.

Received the data length that was too long to store in the receiving area.

Simultaneous transmissions occurred.

Reference section

User's Manual

(Application)

Section 6.1

Section 6.2

Chapter 13

Section 7.1.2

Section 7.3

(1) Confirmation using the sequence program

(a) Detecting the occurrence of a reception error

1) The single (XE/XF) is on when the ERR LED is on.

2) The receive error code is confirmed and read in the buffer memory data reception result storage area (address: 258

H

/268

H

).

For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions, see Chapter 10.

(b) How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code (see Section 10.1.2)

1) To turn off only the ERR LED, write a "1" to the LED OFF request area

(addresses 0

H

/1

H

) in the buffer memory.

2) To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code, turn ON the ERR LED

OFF request output signal (YE/YF).

(Example) To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side

Read command

7 - 13 7 - 13

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator-SC

1) Confirmation using the display LED

When the Q series C24 detects an error, including a transmission error, the

ERR LED lights up. (See Chapter 10.)

2) Confirmation using GX Configurator-SC

• The monitor function is used to check for errors. (See Sections 8.6.3 and

8.6.6.)

• The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function. (See Section

8.6.10.)

3) Confirming the error code

Use one of the following to confirm the error code.

• GX Configurator-SC monitor function (See Section 8.6.6.)

• GX Developer buffer memory monitor function (monitors addresses

258

H

/268

H

)

(3) Handling of receive data when a reception error occurs

1) All of the receive data for which an error was detected is ignored and an response message indicating an abnormal completion (NAK message) is sent to the external device.

When an error is detected during message reception, the Q series C24 does not issue a reception data read request to the PLC CPU.

2) The receive area in the buffer memory will contain the data received normally just prior to the error occurrence. (Data will not be rewritten.)

7.1.5 Receive data clear

Data communications using the bidirectional protocol must be performed after a response message is received in reply to the preceding data transmission.

If the Q series C24 detects an error while receiving data, it sends an NAK message

(response message) to the external device after the data reception completion and ignores the data being received when the error was detected.

Therefore, the receive data does not have to be cleared.

7 - 14 7 - 14

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.2 Sending Data to the External Device

This section explains data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device.

7.2.1 Transmission methods

The following shows the method of sending data to the external device through data communication using the bidirectional protocol.

1)

PLC CPU

PLC program

Write

(BIDOUT instruction)

Data

(00

H

to FF

H

)

2)

Q series C24

Buffer memory

Transmission area

5)

Transmission completed

4)

Any data

3)

Sum check code Data portion

Data length ENQ

ACK

(00

H

to FF

H

)

(When normal)

NAK Error code

(When abnormal)

External device

Contents

Send instruction

BIDOUT instruction completion device

BIDOUT instruction

CH1/CH2 Control timing

BIDOUT

1) Data such as control data and transmission data are stored in the device designated with the BIDOUT instruction and then the BIDOUT instruction is executed.

2) The transmission data count and transmission data are written into the transmission area of the buffer memory.

3) The Q series C24 sends data by adding the control code ENQ at the beginning of the data.

When "Sum check" is designated with GX Developer, the Q series C24 adds the sum check code calculated by internal processing to the end of the message and then transmits the message.

When "No sum check" is designated with GX Developer, no sum check code is sent.

4) A response for the data transmission (for normal completion: ACK message; for abnormal completion: NAK message) is received.

5) The execution of the BIDOUT instruction completes with the transmission processing completion of the Q series C24.

7 - 15 7 - 15

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.2.2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data

This section explains the arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data for performing data transmission using the bidirectional protocol.

For details on the contents of transmission data, see Section 7.1.2 (3).

CH1 side address

400

H

401

H to

5FF

H

(Default)

(1) Transmission area

The transmission area is a memory area for storing the data and the data count that are transmitted from the PLC CPU to the external device via the Q series

C24. By default, the transmission area is assigned to addresses 400

H

to 5FF

H

(CH1 side) and 800

H

to 9FF

H

(CH2 side).

Buffer memory

Transmission data count designation area

Transmission data designation area

The unit of transmission data count

(words/bytes) is in accordance with the word/byte units designation in GX Configurator-SC.

Transmission data count

The transmission data count designated with the

BIDOUT instruction is written, and sent as the data length.

Transmission data

The transmission data designated with the

BIDOUT instruction is written and then sent.

7 - 16 7 - 16

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) The position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator-SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the transmission data length. (See Section 8.4.5.)

(a) When changing the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator-SC, designate as follows:

1) Transmission buffer memory head address designation

Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area of the buffer memory

(address: 400

H

to 1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

H

).

2) Transmission buffer memory length designation

Designate by addresses the length of the area (0001

H

to 1A00

H

) to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area of the buffer memory (address: 400

H

to 1AFF

H

, 2600

H

to 3FFF

H

).

(b) If the following functions are also used when the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory are changed, make sure that the addresses of the transmission area do not overlap with those for the buffer memory that stores the transmission and receive data to be used by these functions.

1) MC protocol buffer memory read/write function

2) MC protocol on-demand function

3) Non procedure protocol transmission/receive function

4) Bidirectional protocol transmission/receive function

5) Communication data monitoring function

(2) Set the size of data per data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device to be smaller than the size of the transmission data designation area in the buffer memory.

(Transmission data designation area)

(Size of data portion to be sent from the PLC CPU)

To transmit data whose size is larger than the transmission data designation area, increase the transmission area, or divide the transmission data before sending.

7 - 17 7 - 17

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) Transmission data arrangement

The following example shows an arrangement of the transmission data to be sent to the external device when storing it in the transmission area.

(Example) When "ABCDEFG123" is sent:

Q series C24

Transmission data count designation area

Transmission data designation area

Transmission area

(buffer memory)

5

(00

H

)

B

(42

H

)

D

(44

H

)

F

(46

H

)

1

(31

H

)

3

(33

H

)

(05

H

)

A

(41

H

)

C

(43

H

)

E

(45

H

)

G

(47

H

)

2

(32

H

)

Transmission data (response message)

Sum check code

H L

02

H

47

H

3 2

33

H

32

H

1 G F E

31

H

47

H

46

H

45

H

D

44

H

C

43

H

B

42

H

A

41

H

Data length

(0005

H

)

H L

00

H

05

H

ENQ

Receive data (response message)

ACK

06

H

(Normal completion)

External device

7 - 18 7 - 18

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.2.3 Sequence program for data transmission

A sequence program for data transmission is explained below.

For details on the BIDOUT instruction for data transmission, see Chapter 9.

Transmission instruction

(In case of the CH1 side)

Create transmission data from D11

Create control data from D0

M0 M1

M1

G.BIDOUT

Un D0 D11 M0

Processing for normal completion

Processing for abnormal completion

(retransmission, etc.)

Q series C24 ready signal

Transmission instruction

(X1E)

1)

2)

BIDOUT instruction

BIDOUT instruction complete device

BIDOUT instruction complete device + 1

(Normal completion/abnormal completion)

Transmission data count designation area

(buffer memory address: 400

H

)

Transmission data storage area

(buffer memory address: 401

H

to)

3)

0

Data transmission

BIDOUT

4)

ON when transmission abnormal completion

1 scan n

Transmission data

Receiving response

7 - 19 7 - 19

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

1) Starts the local station PLC.

The setting values for GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24.

2) Inputs the user data transmission instruction signal.

3) Executes the BIDOUT instruction after storing the transmission data and the control data for the BIDOUT instruction in the device.

Data is sent when the BIDOUT instruction is executed.

4) A response message for the data transmission (for normal completion: ACK message; for abnormal completion: NAK message) is received.

5) When the response is received, the Q series C24 transmission processing completes and the device that has completed the BIDOUT instruction turns ON.

When the BIDOUT instruction ends abnormally due to the reception of an NAK message, the complete device +1 (abnormal completion signal) turns ON and the error code is stored in the control data completion status (S1+1).

(Program example)

When Q series C24 I/O signals are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F:

Transmission command is converted to pulse.

Transmission data is stored.

Designate the number of the interface (CH ) that will send the data.

Clear the transmission result storage device to 0.

Designate the transmission data count in word units.

(Designate K10 when the unit is bytes.)

The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent.

After the BIDOUT instruction is executed, the user designated transmission complete signal (M1) turns ON for one scan.

Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory, and issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are all executed by the PLC CPU.

The completion flag is reset by the external command.

7 - 20 7 - 20

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

Q series C24

Address

257

H

Buffer memory

Data transmission result storage area

D 0

D 1

D 2

For normal completion

Interface number

Transmission result

Transmission data count

(0001

H

)

(0000

H

)

(0005

H

)

D11 to

D15

D 0

D 1

D 2

Transmission data

(4241

H

) to

(0A0D

H

)

For abnormal completion

Interface number (0001

H

)

Transmission result (other than 0000

Transmission data count

(0005

H

H

)

)

D11 to

D15

Transmission data

(4241

H

) to

(0A0D

H

)

400

H

401

H to

5FF

H

Transmission data count designation area

Transmission data designation area

From buffer memory (address 257

H

)

POINT

(1) The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction. (See Chapter 9.)

(2) More than one BIDOUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously.

Execute the next BIDOUT instruction only after the execution of the first

BIDOUT instruction is completed.

7 - 21 7 - 21

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.2.4 How to detect transmission errors

This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when sending data to the external device.

The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data transmission.

Cause of transmission error

A transmission error occurred because of noise.

A timeout occurred for the no-reception monitoring time (timer 0).

A timeout occurred for the response monitoring time (timer 1).

A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time (timer 2)

Data that could not be converted with the ASCII-BIN conversion was detected.

Designated the transmission data count that exceeded the transmission area size.

Simultaneous transmissions occurred.

Reference section

User's Manual

(Application)

Section 6.1

Section 6.2

Section 6.3

Chapter 13

Section 7.2.2

Section 7.3

(1) Confirmation using the sequence program

(a) Detecting a transmission error

1) The following device and input signal turn ON.

• BIDOUT instruction complete device + 1

• ERR LED ON signal (XE/XF)

2) The transmission error code can be checked using the BIDOUT instruction control data ((S1) + 1).

Or, it can be checked by reading the data transmission result storage area in the buffer memory (addresses 257

H

/267

H

).

For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions, see Chapter 10.

(b) How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code (see Section 10.1.2)

1) To turn off only the ERR LED, write a "1" to the LED OFF request area

(addresses 0

H

/1

H

) in the buffer memory.

2) To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code, turn ON the ERR LED

OFF request output signal (YE/YF).

(Example) To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side:

Read command

7 - 22 7 - 22

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

(2) Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator-SC

1) Confirmation using the display LED

When the Q series C24 detects an error, including a reception error, the ERR

LED lights up. (See Chapter 10.)

2) Confirmation using GX Configurator-SC

• The monitor function is used to check for errors. (See Sections 8.6.3 and

8.6.6.)

• The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function. (See Section

8.6.10.)

3) Confirming the error code

Use one of the following to confirm the error code.

• GX Configurator-SC monitor function (See Section 8.6.6.)

• GX Developer buffer memory monitor function (monitors addresses

257

H

/267

H

)

7 - 23 7 - 23

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.3 Processing when Simultaneous Transmission Performed During Full-Duplex

Communications

This section explains the processing when simultaneous transmissions occur in fullduplex communication.

7.3.1 Processing when simultaneous transmissions occur

This section explains the processing performed by the Q series C24 when the external device and the Q series C24 transmit at the same time during data communications using the bidirectional protocol.

Since the external device and the Q series C24 do not transmit at the same time during half-duplex communications (see User's Manual (Application) Chapter 8), this section does not have to be read.

When an external device and the Q series C24 transmit at the same time, the Q series

C24 processing depends on the setting of "Simultaneous transmission data valid/invalid designation" with GX Configurator-SC.

The GX Configurator-SC setting value, "Simultaneous transmission data valid/invalid designation" is stored in the following areas of the buffer memory.

Simultaneous transmission data valid/invalid designation area (addresses: 9B

H

/13B

H

)

The Q series C24 communication data processing for each setting is described in

Section 7.3.2.

Setting contents with GX Configurator-SC

Value set to buffer memory

(Address 9B

H

/13B

H

)

Q series C24 processing contents

Message transmit processing Message receive processing

Transmission data: Valid

Receive data: Valid

Transmission data: Invalid

Receive data: Valid

Transmission data: Valid

Receive data: Invalid

Transmission data: Invalid

Receive data: Invalid

0000

H

0100

H

0001

H

0101

H

Waits to receive the response message Transmits a response message (2)-2)

(1)-2) while checking time-out after data after data reception (2)-1) is complete.

transmission (1)-1) is complete.

Posts normal end or abnormal end

Posts the receive data and receive result to the PLC CPU through the buffer memory.

according to whether or not the PLC

CPU received a response message through the buffer memory.

Posts a simultaneous transmission error Transmits a response message (2)-2) to the PLC CPU through the buffer memory after data transmission (1)-1).

after data reception (2)-1) is complete.

Posts the receive data and receive

Does not wait for a response massage

(1)-2) in reply to data transmission (1)-1).

result to the PLC CPU through the buffer memory.

Waits to receive the response message Ignores data reception (2)-1) and

(1)-2) while checking time-out after data discards the received data.

transmission (1)-1) is complete.

Posts normal end or abnormal end

Does not transmit a response message (2)-2).

according to whether or not the PLC

CPU received a response message through the buffer memory.

Does not inform the PLC CPU that data was received.

Posts a simultaneous transmission error Ignored data reception (2)-1) and to the PLC CPU through the buffer memory after data transmission (1)-1).

discards the receive data.

Does not transmit a response

Does not wait to a response massage

(1)-2) in reply to data transmission (1)-1).

message (2)-2).

Does not inform the PLC CPU that data was received.

( )-m) is the number showing the correspondence with the messages in the illustration shown in Section 7.3.2.

7 - 24 7 - 24

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.3.2 Communication data processing when simultaneous transmissions occur

External device

Q series C24

Examples of the Q series C24 communication data processing for various settings of

"Simultaneous transmission data valid/invalid designation" by GX Configurator-SC are explained.

(1) Transmission: valid, reception: valid

2)-1

E

N

Q

Arbitrary data

E

N

Q

1)-1

Arbitrary data

Sum check code

Sum check code

Time check

(timer 1)

1)-2

A

C

K

A

C

K

2)-2

External device

Q series C24

External device

Q series C24

POINT

When the entire message of 2)-1 was received while transmitting the message of

1)-1 in the illustration.

• The Q series C24 outputs the receive data read request signal of 2)-1 to the PLC

CPU after transmitting all 1)-1. (Turns on the X3/XA.)

(2) Transmission: invalid, reception: valid

2)-1

E

N

Q

Arbitrary data

E

N

Q

1)-1

Arbitrary data

Sum check code

Sum check code

A

C

K

Ignores the receive data of 1)-1.

(Generates a simultaneous transmission error.)

2)-2

(3) Transmission: valid, reception: invalid

1)-1

E

N

Q

Arbitrary data

E

N

Q

1)-1

Arbitrary data

Sum check code

Sum check code

Time check

(timer 1)

1)-2

A

C

K

Ignores the receive data of 2)-1.

7 - 25 7 - 25

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

External device

Q series C24

MELSEC-Q

(4) Transmission: invalid, reception: invalid

2)-1

E

N

Q

Arbitrary data

Sum check code

E

N

Q

1)-1

Arbitrary data

Sum check code

Ignores the receive data of 1)-1.

Generates a simultaneous transmission error.

Ignores the receivedata of 2)-1.

REMARK

Time-check timer 1 (response monitoring time) shown in the illustration is described in Section 6.2 of User's Manual (Application).

POINT

When the transmission control (see Chapter 9 of User's Manual (Application)) is performed, and the simultaneous transmission data valid/invalid designation sets that the receive data is valid and transmission data is valid, the Q series C24 performs message transmission and message reception processing as described below.

During message transmission processing, time check by timer 1 (response monitoring time) is performed.

1) Message transmission (1)-1 in the illustration)

• If the Q series C24 receives a terminate transmission request (DC3 received/DSR signal OFF) from the external device during message transmission, it terminates data transmission.

• When the Q series C24 receives the ready to send signal (DC1 received/DSR signal ON), it restarts data transmission.

2) Message reception

• If the Q series C24 cannot send a response message to the external device in response to message reception because the external device issued a terminate transmission request (DC3 received/DSR signal OFF), it transmits the response message after it receives the ready to send signal (DC1 received/DSR signal ON) from the external device.

7 - 26 7 - 26

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

7.4 Data Communications Precautions

The following shows the precautions when performing data communications using the bidirectional protocol.

(1) When the transmission sequence is in the initial status, it indicates that data transmission and reception processing has not been started.

The Q series C24 transmission sequence is initialized in the following cases.

• The power is turned on, the CPU is reset.

• When operating, or the mode is switched.

• When a response message (ACK, NAK, etc.) was received in reply to data transmission.

• When a response message (ACK, NAK, etc.) was transmitted in reply to data reception.

• When the CD signal was turned off during data communications using Check

CD terminal in full-duplex communications through the RS-232 interface.

(2) As a data transmission procedure, data transmission from the external device or the Q series C24 should be performed after an response for the immediately preceding data transmission has been received.

(3) The external device and PLC CPU must agree so that the units of the data length

(word count/byte count) in the message to be transmitted and received is the same.

The PLC CPU units can be set using the GX Configurator-SC word/byte units designation.

Make the length of the data area in the message to be transmitted and received the size of the Q series C24 buffer memory transmission data designation area and receive data storage area, or less.

(4) NAK code response

1) Response from the Q series C24 to external device

After the error detection message reception complete, it transmits the NAK code to the external device.

2) Response from external device to the Q series C24

Transmit the error code (0022

H

to 005F

H

) immediately after the NAK response.

7 - 27 7 - 27

7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) Perform error processing according to the error code received immediately after the NAK message at the device that received NAK as the response message after data transmission.

Chapter 10 shows the error codes that are transmitted from the Q series C24.

(2) If the Q series C24 receives an NAK response while transmitting data to an external device, it completes data transmission, then reads the NAK, perform abnormal completion.

(3) If the Q series C24 detects an error while receiving data, it ignores the receive data corresponding to the data length.

If the data length is abnormal, the Q series C24 ignores all the data up to the receive message head data (ENQ, etc.) received thereafter.

(5) External device time-out check

When checking time-out up to reception of the response message at the external device during data transmission from external device to the Q series C24, make the time-out time the time shown below, or longer.

(PLC CPU maximum scan time 2) + 100 ms

(6) External device framing error

When nothing is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device though the RS-422 or RS-422/485 interface, a framing error may be generated in the external device.

Make the external device skip the data up to transmission of the head data (ENQ,

NAK, etc.) of the message from the Q series C24.

Before communicating data through the RS-422/485 interface, check Q series

C24 specifications given in Section 3.3.

(7) Data bit settings

When adding a sum check code to a message, set the data bits to 8 bits using the transmission setting of the GX Developer.

For more details on the data bit settings, see Section 4.5.

7 - 28 7 - 28

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

The GX Configurator-SC is a tool that supports the production of necessary PLC programs with initial setting, monitoring and testing, and data communication processing of the Q series C24.

The GX Configurator-SC is composed of an intelligent function utility and protocol FB support function.

(1) Intelligent function utility (utility package) (see this chapter)

The utility package facilitates the initial settings and monitoring of the Q series

C24 by using dedicated screens without having to consider the I/O signals or buffer memory.

The utility package can also be used together with the GX Simulator (SWnD5 -

LLT-E).

8

(2) Protocol FB support function

The protocol FB support function automatically generates the FB (function block) for communication that supports data communication processing and traces the network that monitors the data transmitted/received on the communication network.

By using the protocol FB support function, producing PLC programs and transmission debug is made easy.

For details on the protocol FB support function, see the GX Configurator-SC

Operating Manual (Protocol FB support function).

8 - 1 8 - 1

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.1 Functions Available with Utility Package

The following table lists the utility package function.

( : indicates that the setting is valid with the applicable protocol.)

Function

Auto refresh setting

User frame

Refresh the Q series C24's error codes and set devices on the PLC

CPU side.

Register the user frame in the flash ROM.

Data for modem initialization Register the data for modem initialization in the flash ROM.

Data for modem connection Register the data for model connection in the flash ROM.

Modem function system setting

CHn Transmission control and others system setting

CHn MC protocol system setting

Register the system setting values for model function in the flash

ROM.

Set the transmission specifications with the other device.

(DTR/DSR control, DC code control, communication method, data communication monitoring timer value, etc.)

Assign the buffer memory for on-demand function, set the user frame number, etc.

CHn Non procedure system setting

Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the non procedure protocol, and change the setting values, etc.

System setting

CHn Bidirectional system setting

Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication using the bidirectional protocol, and change the setting values, etc.

CHn PLC CPU monitoring system setting

Set the PLC CPU monitoring function.

CHn Transmission user frame No.

designation system setting

CHn Transmission control and others monitor/test

CHn MC protocol monitor

Set the user frame number to be transmitted, etc.

System setting default

Reset the setting values in the buffer memory to their default values.

Write the setting values in the buffer memory to the flash ROM.

System setting write

Flash ROM write allow/prohibit designation

Set whether to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM.

X · Y monitor/test Perform the monitoring/testing of I/O signals to/from the PLC CPU.

Modem function monitor/test Monitor the execution status of the modem function.

Monitor the status of interface control signals, values set from the

GX Developer, etc.

CHn Non procedure monitor/test

Monitor the data communication result, I/O signal status, and setting values in the buffer memory.

Monitor

CHn Bidirectional monitor

Monitor the setting values and operating status of the PLC CPU monitoring function.

CHn PLC CPU monitoring monitor

CHn User frame

No. designation monitor for transmission

Monitor/test others

ERR LED off

Non procedure protocol receive data clear

Monitor the setting value for user frame to be transmitted.

Monitor the data reception result, error occurrence status, etc.

Turn off the ERR LEDs on the front face of the module.

Clear the currently received data.

MC

Non procedure protocol

Bidirectional protocol

Explanation page

Section 4.6

Section 8.4.1

Section 8.4.2

Section 8.4.3

Section 8.4.4

Section 8.4.5

Section 8.4.6

Section 8.4.7

Section 8.4.8

Section 8.4.9

Section 8.4.10

Section 8.4.11

Section 8.4.11

Section 8.4.12

Section 8.6.1

Section 8.6.2

Section 8.6.3

Section 8.6.4

Section 8.6.5

Section 8.6.6

Section 8.6.7

Section8.6.8

Section 8.6.9

Section 8.6.10

Section 8.7

Remarks

Can be used via online operation.

Can be used via offline operation.

Can be used only via online operation.

8

8 - 2 8 - 2

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.2 Installing and Uninstalling Utility Package

See "Method of installing the MELSOFT Series" attached with the utility package regarding the install and uninstall operation for the utility package.

8.2.1 Usage precautions

The following describes the precautions on using the utility package:

(1) Important safety information

Since the utility package is add-in software for GX Developer, read "Safety

Precautions" and the basic operating procedures contained in GX Developer's

Operating Manual.

(2) About installation

The GX Configurator-SC (utility package) is an add-in package for GX Developer

Version 4 or later products.

Therefore, install GX Configurator-SC in a personal computer in which GX

Developer Version 4 or a later product has been installed.

(3) About display screen errors while using the intelligent function module utility

There may be cases in which the screen will not properly display while the intelligent function module utility is being used, due to a lack of system resources.

If this occurs, close the intelligent function module utility first and then GX

Developer (program, comments, etc.) and other applications. Then, restart GX

Developer and the intelligent function module utility.

(4) To start the intelligent function module utility

(a) In GX Developer, select "QCPU (Q mode)" for the PLC series and specify the project.

If anything other than "QCPU (Q mode)" is selected for the PLC series, or if the project is not specified, the intelligent function module utility will not start.

(b) Multiple intelligent function module utilities can be started.

However, the [Open file]/[Save file] intelligent function module's parameter operations can only be performed by a single intelligent function module utility. Other intelligent function module utilities can perform the

[Monitor/Test] operation only.

(5) How to change screens when two or more intelligent function module utilities are started

When two or more intelligent function module utility screens cannot be displayed side by side, use the task bar to change the intelligent function module utility screen so that it is displayed on top of other screens.

8 - 3 8 - 3

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

(6) About the number of parameters that can be set in GX

Configurator-SC

The number of parameters that can be set by the GX Configurator for an intelligent function module installed in the CPU module and in a remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H network system is limited.

Intelligent function module installation object

Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU

Q02/Q02H/Q06H/Q12H/Q25HCPU

Q12PH/Q25PHCPU

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station

Maximum number of parameter settings

Initial setting Automatic refresh setting

512

512

512

512

256

256

256

256

For example, if multiple intelligent function modules are installed in a remote I/O station, set the GX Configurator so that the number of parameter settings of all the intelligent function modules does not exceed the maximum number of parameter settings. The total number of parameter settings is calculated separately for the initial setting and for the automatic refresh setting.

The number of parameter settings that can be set for one module in the GX

Configurator-SC is as shown below.

Object Module

QJ71C24N

QJ71C24N-R2

QJ71C24N-R4

QJ71C24

QJ71C24-R2

Initial setting

0 (not used)

0 (not used)

0 (not used)

0 (not used)

0 (not used)

Automatic refresh setting

46 (Maximum number of settings)

47 (Maximum number of settings)

46 (Maximum number of settings)

46 (Maximum number of settings)

47 (Maximum number of settings)

Example) Counting the number of parameter settings in the automatic refresh setting

The number of settings in this one line is counted as one setting.

The number of settings is not counted by columns.

Add up all the setting items in this setting screen, then add them to the total for the other intelligent function modules to get a grand total.

8 - 4 8 - 4

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.2.2 Operating environment

The operating environment of the personal computer where the GX Configurator-SC is used is explained.

Item

Installation (Add-in) destination

Computer main unit

CPU

Required memory

Hard disk

For installation free space For operation

Display

Operating system

1

Peripheral devices

Add-in to GX Developer Version 4 (English version) or later

Personal computer on which Windows

®

operates.

2

Refer to the following table "Used operating system and performance required for personal computer".

65 MB or more

20 MB or more

800 600 dot or more resolution

3

Microsoft

®

Windows

®

95 Operating System (English version)

Microsoft

®

Windows

®

98 Operating System (English version)

Microsoft

®

Windows

®

Millennium Edition Operating System (English version)

Microsoft

®

Windows NT

®

Workstation Operating System Version 4.0 (English version)

Microsoft

®

Windows

®

2000 Professional Operating System (English version)

Microsoft

®

Windows

®

XP Professional Operating System (English version)

Microsoft

®

Windows

®

XP Home Edition Operating System (English version)

1: Install the GX Configurator-SC in GX Developer Version 4 or higher in the same language.

GX Developer (English version) and GX Configurator-SC (Japanese version) cannot be used in combination, and GX Developer (Japanese version) and GX Configurator-SC (English version) cannot be used in configuration.

2: GX Configurator-SC cannot be used as an add-in with GX Developer Version 3 or earlier versions.

3: Setting fonts Size of Windows

R

for "Large Fonts" may cause the text to extend off screen. Therefore, choose "Small Fonts".

Used operating system and performance required for personal computer

Operating system

Windows

®

95 (Service Pack 1 or later)

Windows

®

98

Windows

®

Me

Windows NT

®

Workstation 4.0

(Service Pack 3 or later)

Windows

®

2000 Professional

Windows

®

XP

"XP compatibility

Professional

Windows

®

XP mode" and "Fast User

Switching" are not

Home Edition supported.

Performance Required for Personal Computer

CPU

Pentium

®

133MHz or more

Pentium

®

133MHz or more

Pentium

®

150MHz or more

Required memory

32MB or more

32MB or more

32MB or more

Pentium

®

133MHz or more

Pentium

®

133MHz or more

Pentium

®

300MHz or more

Pentium

®

300MHz or more

32MB or more

64MB or more

128MB or more

128MB or more

8 - 5 8 - 5

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.3 Explanation of Utility Package Operation

8.3.1 Operation overview

GX Developer screen

POINT

The following settings must be performed before starting the intelligent function module utility:

• Set the project using the GX Developer

• Set "QCPU (Q mode)" for the PC series.

[Tools] – [Intelligent function utility] – [Start]

Intelligent Function Module

Select Parameter Setting Module screen

When used via online operation

When auto refresh is set

1) Go to next page

2) Go to next page

Flash ROM settings screen

See Section 8.3.2

When used via offline operation

Select [Tools] – [Flash ROM stting] from the menu bar.

Select the module type and module model name.

See Section 8.4

To each setting screen

POINT

The various setting values to be registered in the Q series C24's flash ROM can be saved in a file of the PC via offline operation.

Use online operation to write system setting values to the Q series

C24.

See Sections 8.4.1 through 8.4.10

8 - 6 8 - 6

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

1) When using online operation

Select [Online] – [Monitor/test] from the menu bar.

Select monitor/test module screen

MELSEC-Q

2) When setting auto refresh

Auto refresh

Enter "Start I/O No.," then select "Module type" and "Module model name."

Auto refresh screen

See Screen 4.6

Monitor/test

Select the parameter setting module for monitor/test.

Monitor/test screen

See Section 8.4

See Section 8.6

POINT

(1) When the setting operation is complete in each system setting screen, register the system setting data in the flash ROM, then restart the PLC CPU resume data transmission.

(2) With the Q series C24, monitoring, testing, and reading/writing of setting values can be performed via online operation.

8 - 7 8 - 7

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

REMARK

The following diagram illustrates the overview of a procedure in which the GX

Configurator-SC is used to change the system setting values of the Q series C24 and save the new values to a file or write them to the Q series C24's flash ROM.

Start

Do you wish to change the setting values via offline operation?

NO

YES (offline operation)

Start the [Flash ROM setting] screen.

Go to 1) setting via online operation

Is the original data saved in a file?

NO

YES

Read the data from the file.

File read

[Intelligent function module select parameter setting module] screen

See Section 8.3.1

Select in the [Flash ROM setting] screen.

See Section 8.4.

Change the setting values in the corresponding system setting sub-screens.

See Sections 8.4.1 through 8.4.10.

Display the system setting sub-screen for changing the setting values.

Click on each of the setting items corresponding to the setting values you wish to change. For each item, enter or select the new setting value in the [Setting value] field.

NO

Have you changed all the applicable setting values?

YES

In the [Flash ROM setting] screen, click on the File save button. Then, in the file designation dialog box, designate the file name under which the data will be saved. All of the new setting values will be saved in the file.

1

Close the [Flash ROM setting] screen.

Close

This operation is allowed only in the [Flash ROM setting] screen.

See Section 8.3.3.

1 Save the new system setting values in a file

for backup.

8 - 8 8 - 8

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

1) (Online operation)

Start the [Monitor/test] screen.

[Intelligent Function Module

Select Parameter setting module] screen

See Section 8.3.1

Is the original data saved?

YES

NO

Is the data saved in a file?

YES

Read the data from the file.

File read

NO

Read the data from the module's flash ROM.

Read from module

Set the flash ROM write allow/prohibit designation to "allowed".

Display the system setting sub-screens for changing the setting values.

Click each of the setting items corresponding to the setting values to be changed. For each item, enter or select the new setting value in the

[Setting value] field.

Designate the setting value for the item to be changed, then click on the

Execute test button.

The setting value will be written to the

Q series C24's flash ROM.

NO

Have you changed all the applicable setting values?

YES

Do you wish to write the new setting values to the module's

YES

NO

In the [Flash ROM setting] screen, click on the File save button. Then, in the file designation dialog box, designate the file name under which the data will be saved. All of the new setting values will be saved in the file.

2

Set the flash ROM write allow/prohibit designation to "prohibited".

Close the [Monitor/test] screen.

Close

Select in the [Monitor] screen.

See Section 8.4.12.

Select in the [Monitor] screen.

See Section 8.4.

Each system setting sub-screen.

See Section 8.4.

The [Monitor] screen or each sub-screen.

See Section 8.3.3.

1 To write all the new setting values to the flash ROM

at once, click on the Write to module button after

all the applicable setting values have been changed.

All the setting values will be written to the Q series

C24's flash ROM.

Reset the CPU.

The [Monitor] screen or each sub-screen.

See Section 8.3.3.

2 Save the new system setting values in a file for

backup.

Select in the [Monitor] screen.

See Section 8.4.12.

MELSEC-Q

8 - 9 8 - 9

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.3.2 Starting the intelligent function module utility (displaying the [select parameter setting module] screen)

[Purpose]

Start the intelligent function module utility from the GX Developer, and display the module selection screen for the intelligent function module utility parameter setting.

The screens that perform system setting, auto refresh setting, and monitoring/testing for the Q series C24 can be started from this module selection screen.

POINT

To start the Intelligent function module utility, a project created with the GX

Developer whose PLC series is set as "QCPU (Q mode)" is required.

[Startup procedure]

[Tools] [Intelligent function module utility] [Start]

[Setting screen]

• Start I/O No.

Enter the start I/O number for the applicable the Q series C24 using a hexadecimal expression.

• Module type

Select [Serial communication module].

• Module model name

Select the module model name of the applicable the Q series

C24.

• Intelligent function module parameter setting module

The modules for which parameters are set with the intelligent function module utility are displayed.

Select the target module of your operation.

It is not necessary to select [Intelligent function module, select parameter setting module] to perform monitor/test operation.

[Explanation of items]

(1) How to start each screen

(a) Starting the flash ROM setting screen

[Tools] [Flash ROM setting] "Module type" "Module model Name"

Select

(b) Starting auto refresh settings

"Start I/O No." "Module type" "Module model name" Auto refresh

(c) Monitor/test module selection screen

[Online] [Monitor/test] "Module selection" Monitor/test

8 - 10 8 - 10

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

(2) Command buttons

Initial settings : Cannot be selected.

Auto refresh : Starts the auto refresh setting screen.

Delete : Deletes the initial settings and auto refresh settings.

Exit : Closes the parameter setting module selection screen.

(3) Menu bar

(a) File items

The intelligent function module parameters for the project opened by GX

Developer can be processed in file operation.

[Open parameter] : Reads the parameter file.

[Close parameter] : Closes the parameter file. If it has been modified, the file save confirmation dialog box appears.

[Save parameter] : Saves the parameter file.

[Delete parameter] : Deletes the parameter file.

[Exit] : Exits from the intelligent function module utility.

(b) Online items

[Monitor/test] : Starts the monitor/test module selection screen.

[Read from PLC] : Reads the intelligent function module parameters from the CPU module.

[Write to PLC] : Writes the intelligent function module parameters to the CPU module.

(c) Tool items

[Flash ROM setting] : Starts the flash ROM setting screen.

(d) Help items

[Code list] : Displays the ASCII code list. Use this list as reference when setting data.

[Product information] : Displays the version information of the intelligent function module utility.

8 - 11 8 - 11

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

POINT

(1) Saving the intelligent function module parameter files

Since files cannot be saved using the GX Developer project save operation, save the files on the module selection screen for parameter setting described above.

(2) Reading from and writing to PLC operations for the intelligent function module parameters using GX Developer

(a) After the intelligent function module parameters are saved in a file, they can be read from and written into the PLC.

(b) Set the target PLC using the GX Developer [Online] [Transfer setup].

Only use the control PLC for the Q series C24 to write the intelligent function module parameters for a multiple CPU system to the PLC.

(c) Use the GX Developer for PLC reading or PLC writing the intelligent function module parameters at the remote I/O station.

GX Configurator-SC can not be used.

(3) Checking for the required utility

The head I/O is displayed in the Intelligent function module utility setting screen, but a " " may be displayed for the model name.

This means that either the required utility is not installed or that the utility cannot be started from the GX Developer.

Check for the required utility in [Tools] - [Intelligent function utility] - [Utility list...] in GX Developer, and set it.

8 - 12 8 - 12

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.3.3 Performing common utility operations

This section explains how to perform the common operations in the data setting, auto refresh setting and monitor/test screens.

Name of key

Esc

Tab

(1) Available Control Keys

The following table lists the special keys that can be used during operation of utility and their applications:

Application

Cancels a newly entered value when entering data in a cell.

Closes the window.

Moves between the controls in the window.

Ctrl

Used in conjunction with the mouse to select multiple cells in the selection test.

Delete

Back space

When a cell is selected, clears all set data.

Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned.

↑ ↓ ← →

Page up

Moves the cursor.

Moves the cursor one page up.

Page

Down

Moves the cursor one page down.

Enter

Confirms the value entered in the cell.

(2) Operation Command Buttons

Current value display

: Displays the current value of the selected item.

Make text file

Start monitor

: Creates a text file (TXT format) under the specified file name and saves to it the contents currently displayed on the screen.

: Starts monitoring of the current value field.

Stop monitor

: Stops monitoring of the current value field.

Execute test

Write to module

Read from module

: Registers the system setting data of the selected item in the flash ROM. 1

To apply Execute test to multiple items simultaneously, set the data for the corresponding items, select the multiple items while pressing down

Ctrl , then click Execute test .

1 The settings for "receive data clear request" and "flash ROM write allow/prohibit designation" are written to the buffer memory.

: Registers all system setting data for the Q series

C24 in the flash ROM.

: Reads all system setting data for the Q series C24 from the flash ROM.

8 - 13 8 - 13

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

File save

File read

Close

End setup

: Saves all system setting data for the Q series C24 to the designated file (extension: UMD).

: Reads all system setting data for the Q series C24 from the designated file (extension: UMD).

: Closes the currently displayed screen and returns to the previously displayed screen.

: Saves/writes the system setting data, closes the current screen, and returns to the previously displayed screen.

With offline operation, only [File save] and [File read] are enabled.

POINT

(1) When the setting operation is complete in each system setting screen, register the system setting data in the flash ROM, then restart the PLC CPU to resume data transmission.

(2) If two or more intelligent function module utility package are running, perform each operation after selecting the target utility package from the task bar and making it active.

(3) When the menu screen for system registration to flash ROM (see Section 8.4) is closed, all the system setting data will be cleared. Before closing the screen, write the data to the module (enabled only via online operation) or save it to a file.

(3) Data/file to be created with utility package

The data and files shown below that are created with utility package are also used by GX Developer operation. Figure 8.1 shows an operation used to create data with utility package.

<Intelligent function module parameters>

(a) This data is created with the auto refresh settings, and stored in the intelligent function module parameter file of the project to be created using GX Developer.

Project

Program

Parameters

PLC Parameters

Network Parameters

Intelligent Function Module Parameters

(b) Steps 1) to 3) shown in Figure 8.1 are performed using the following operations.

1) Operating from GX Developer.

[Project] [Open existing project] / [Save project] / [Save project as]

2) Operating from the utility parameter setting module selection screen.

[File] [File read] / [File save]

3) Operating from the GX Developer.

[Online] [Read from PLC / [Write to PLC] "Intelligent function module parameters"

Or, operate from the utility parameter setting module selection screen.

[Online] [Read from PLC] / [Write to PLC]

8 - 14 8 - 14

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

<Flash ROM data>

(a) The data set in [Flash ROM setting] can be saved in the desired directory separately from the GX Developer project.

(b) Operations 4) and 5) shown in Figure 8.1 are performed as follows:

4) This operation can be performed from the [Flash ROM setting] screen or

[Monitor/test] screen.

[Flash ROM setting] screen [File read]/[File save]

[Monitor/test] screen [File read]/[File save]

5) This operation can be performed from the [Monitor/Test] screen of the utility.

[Monitor/test] screen [Read from module]/[Write to module]

GX Developer/

GX Configurator-SC

Project

1)

A

2)

Disk

Project

A

Personal computer

B B

4)

QCPU

Q25HCPU

MODE

RUN

ERR.

USER

BAT.

BOOT

A

USB

RS-232

3)

5)

QJ71C24

QJ71C24

CH1.

CH2.

CH1.

A: Indicates an intelligent function module parameter.

B: Indicates flash ROM data.

RS-232

B

CH.2

SDA

SDB

(FG)

RDA

(FG)

RDB

RS-422

/485

1

2

4

6

3

5

7

Figure 8.1 Correlation chart for data created by the utility package

8 - 15 8 - 15

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4 System Registration to Flash ROM

[Purpose]

Display the menu screen for flash ROM registration, which is used to change the initial values set in the Q series C24's buffer memory.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

Startup from Intelligent function module utility

(GX Developer Version 4 or later)

[Online] [Monitor/test] "Select monitor/test module" Monitor/test

[Monitor] screen

Startup from the system monitor (GX Developer Version 6 or later).

[GX Developer] [Diagnostics] [System Monitor] "Select the Q series

C24 by installation status" Diagnostics... [Monitor] screen

• Offline operation

[Tools] Flash ROM setting [Flash ROM setting] screen

[Setting screen]

Screen displayed during online operation ( 1) Screen displayed during offline operation

1 The selection menus for system setting/registration are displayed by scrolling on the [Monitor] screen during online operation.

The selection buttons pertaining to flash ROM registration are displayed in blue on the screen.

8 - 16 8 - 16

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

[Setting Items]

The following table shows the selection menus for system setting/registration to be displayed:

Remarks Function

User frame registration

Data for modem initialization registration

Data for modem connection registration

Modem function system setting

Transmission control and others system setting

MC protocol system setting

Non procedure system setting

Bidirectional system setting

PLC CPU monitoring system setting

Transmission user frame No. designation system setting

Resetting buffer memory/flash ROM setting values to default values

Flash ROM write allow/prohibit setting

Section

Section 8.4.1

Section 8.4.2

Section 8.4.3

Section 8.4.4

Section 8.4.5

Section 8.4.6

Section 8.4.7

Section 8.4.8

Section 8.4.9

Section 8.4.10

Section 8.4.11

Section 8.4.12

Can be used via online operation.

Can be used via offline operation.

Can be used only via online operation.

POINT

(1) The User's Manual (Basic) and GX Configurator-SC's Help function provide the code list. Use this list as a reference.

(2) The values set in the respective setting screens explained in Section 8.4 can be written to the Q series C24 module (via online operation only) or saved to a file.

(3) Perform the following operations in advance to enable the registration of setting values in the flash ROM:

(a) Switch setting using the GX Developer (see Section 4.5.2)

Set "Setting change" under [Transmission settings] to "Enable" for both the CH1 and CH2 sides.

(b) Setting using GX Configurator-SC (see Section 8.4.12)

Set the flash ROM write allow/prohibit designation to "Allowed".

(4) Some system setting screens have a pair of screens: one for CH1 and the other for CH2. Please note that the explanations given in Section 8.4.1 and thereafter apply to the online operations performed in the CH1 screens.

The setting items are the same between CH1 and CH2, but different buffer memory addresses are used to store the setting values. The respective addresses are indicated as follows where applicable.

(Left side: address for the CH1 side, right side: address for the CH2 side)

Setting item

DTR/DC control designation

Setting value storage buffer memory address

93

H

/133

H

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Chapter 7 of

User's Manual (Application)

(5) When a multiple CPU system is employed, GX Configurator-SC should be connected to the control PLC of the Q series C24, and the system setting data register in the flash ROM.

It is not possible to set target PLC to multiple CPU setting of "Transfer setup" of GX Developer and register the system setting data in the flash ROM.

8 - 17 8 - 17

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.1 User frame registration

[Purpose]

Register the user frame used in the following functions:

• On-demand function using the MC protocol.

• Data transmission/receive function using the non procedure protocol.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen User frame

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen User frame

[Setting screen]

User frame 1 to 200

[Setting item]

Setting item

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Chapter 9 of

User's Manual (Application)

REMARK

Use \ + code to specify hexadecimal numbers in the control code registration field if

QSCU is used for registering a user frame.

(Example) To register the 5 bytes of data, STX (02

H

), "C24," and ETX (03

H

), specify the following:

\02C24\03

8 - 18 8 - 18

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.2 Data for modem initialization registration

[Purpose]

Register the data for initializing the modem connected to the Q series C24.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen Data for user modem initialization

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen Data for user modem initialization

[Setting screen]

[Setting item]

Setting item

Data for user initialization 1 to 30

User control data

Data for user initialization 1 to 30

Initialization command

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Chapter 3 of

User's Manual (Application)

REMARK

Use \\ code to specify a field to register "\" if GX Configurator-SC is used for data for modem initialization.

(Example) To register the \Q2 of data: \\Q2

8 - 19 8 - 19

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.3 Data for modem connection registration

[Purpose]

For data communication and notification using the modem function, register the data for connection with external devices.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen Data for modem connection

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen Data for modem connection

[Setting screen]

[Setting items]

Setting item

Pager receiver designation

Telephone number

Data for modem connection

1 to 30

External line dialing

Line types

Wait time for message transmission units: s

Message

Comment

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Chapter 3 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 20 8 - 20

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.4 Modem function system setting/registration

[Purpose]

For data communication using the modem function, register system setting values.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen Modem function system setting

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen Modem function system setting

[Setting screen]

[Setting items]

Setting item

Modem connection channel designation

Notification execution designation

Number of connection retries designation

Connection retry interval designation units: s

Initialization/connection timeout time designation units: s

Number of initialization retries designation

Data No. for initialization designation

Data No. for connection designation

GX Developer connection designation

No-communication interval time designation units: min

RS · CS control yes/no designation

Modem initialization time DR signal valid/invalid designation

Wait time of notification units: s

Circuit disconnect wait time (PLC CPU watch use) units: s

Remote password mismatch notification count designation

Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation

Auto modem initialization designation

Callback function designation

Callback denial notification accumulated count designation

Data No. for callback designation 1 to 10

Setting value storage buffer memory address

2E

H

2F

H

30

H

38

H

2008

H

200A

H

200E

H

200C

H

200D

H

2007

H

2001

H

2002

H

31

H

32

H

33

H

34

H

35

H

36

H

37

H

2101

H to 210A

H

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Chapter 3 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 21 8 - 21

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.5 Transmission control and others system setting

[Purpose]

For data communication with external devices, register system setting values for the transmission control method, monitoring time, and buffer memory assignment.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen CH Transmission control system setting

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen CH Transmission control system setting

[Setting screen]

8 - 22 8 - 22

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

[Setting items]

Setting item

DTR/DSR (ER/DR), DC control designation

DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) code designation

DC2/DC4 code designation

Communication system designation

CD terminal check designation

Half-duplex communications control designation

Simultaneous transmission priority/non-priority designation

Half-duplex communications control designation

Retransmission time transmission method designation

No-reception monitoring time (timer 0) designation

Response monitoring time (timer 1) designation

Transmission monitoring time (timer 2) designation

Word/byte units designation

RTS (RS) designation

DTR (ER) designation

Transmission control start free area

Transmission control end free area

Send/Recv data monitoring designation

Action for buffer full

Stop by Timer 0 error

Monitor buffer head address

Monitor buffer size

Transmission buffer memory head address designation

Transmission buffer memory length designation

Receive buffer memory head address designation

Receive buffer memory length designation

Transmission transparent code designation 1st

Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 10th

Receive transparent code designation

ASCII-BIN conversion designation

Receive interrupt-issued designation

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

93

H

/133

H

94

H

/134

H

95

H

/135

H

98

H

/138

H

97

H

/137

H

Chapter 7 of

User's Manual (Application)

Section 3.2 of

User's Manual (Basic)

99

H

/139

H

Chapter 8 of

User's Manual (Application)

9A

H

/13A

H

9C

H

/13C

H

9D

H

/13D

H

9E

H

/13E

H

96

H

/136

H

Chapter 6 of

User's Manual (Application)

Chapter 5 of

User's Manual (Application)

Section 3.2.1 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Chapter 7 of

User's Manual (Application)

92

H

/132

H

… b0

92

H

/132

H

… b2

2012

H

/2112

H

2013

H

/2113

H

2018

H

/2118

H

2019

H

/2119

H

… b0

2019

H

/2119

H

… b2

201A

H

/211A

H

201B

H

/211B

H

A2

H

/142

H

A3

H

/143

H

A6

H

/146

H

A7

H

/147

H

11F

H

/1BF

H

2030

H

to 2038

H

/

2130

H

to 2138

H

120

H

/1C0

H

121

H

/1C1

H

Chapter 16 of

User's Manual (Application)

Chapters 6 and 7 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Chapter 12 of

User's Manual (Application)

2010

H

/2110

H

Chapter 13 of

User's Manual (Application)

Chapter 4 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 23 8 - 23

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.6 MC protocol system setting

[Purpose]

For data transmission using the MC protocol, register system setting values.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen CH MC protocol system setting

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen CH MC protocol system setting

[Setting screen]

[Setting items]

Setting item

On-demand function designation

Buffer memory head address designation

Data length designation

First frame No. designation 1st

On-demand user

First frame No. designation 2nd frame

Last frame No. designation 1st designation

Last frame No. designation 2nd

Message wait time designation waiting time units: 10 ms

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

A0

H

/140

H

A1

H

/141

H

A9

H

/149

H

AA

H

/14A

H

AB

H

/14B

H

AC

H

/14C

H

11E

H

/1BE

H

Chapter 10 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 24 8 - 24

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.7 Non procedure system setting

[Purpose]

For data transmission using the non procedure protocol, register system setting values.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen CH Non procedure system setting

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen CH Non procedure system setting

[Setting screen]

[Setting items]

Received data count designation

Receive complete code designation

Receive user frame designation

User frame use enable/disable designation

First frame No. designation 1st to 4th

Last frame No. designation 1st to 4th

Transmission user frame designation

CR/LF output designation

Output head pointer designation

Output count designation

Timeout at No-protocol

Setting item

User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th

Exclusive format-1 received data count 1st to 4th

Setting value storage buffer memory address

A4

H

/144

H

A5

H

/145

H

AD

H

/14D

H

AE

H

to B1

H

/14E

H

to 151

H

B2

H

to B5

H

/152

H

to 155

H

2020

H

to 2023

H

/

2120

H

to 2123

H

2024

H

to 2027

H

/

2124

H

to 2127

H

B7

H

/157

H

B8

H

/158

H

B9

H

/159

H

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Chapter 6 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Chapters 9 and 11 of

User's Manual (Application)

2014

H

/2114

H

Chapters 6 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 25 8 - 25

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.8 Bidirectional system setting

[Purpose]

For data transmission using the bidirectional protocol, register system setting values.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen CH Bidirectional system setting

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen CH Bidirectional system setting

[Setting screen]

[Setting item]

Setting item

Simultaneously transmission data valid/invalid designation

Setting value storage buffer memory address

9B

H

/13B

H

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Section 7.3 of

User's Manual (Basic)

8 - 26 8 - 26

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.9 PLC CPU monitoring system setting

[Purpose]

Register system setting values to use the PLC CPU monitoring function.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen CH Monitoring system setting

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen CH Monitoring system setting

[Setting screen]

8 - 27 8 - 27

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

[Setting items]

Setting item

Cycle time units designation

Cycle time designation

PLC CPU monitoring function designation

PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure designation

Constant cycle transmission

Transmission pointer

Output count designation

Data No. for connection designation

Number of registered word blocks designation

Number of registered bit blocks designation

PLC CPU abnormal monitoring designation

No. n block monitoring device

Monitoring device designation

Head device No. designation

Read point designation

Condition agreement transmission

Monitoring condition designation

Monitoring condition value designation

Transmission pointer designation

Number of output designation

Data No. for connection designation

PLC PCU abnormal monitoring designation

Condition agreement transmission

Transmission pointer

Output count designation

Data No. for connection designation

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

2040

H

/2140

H

2041

H

/2141

H

2042

H

/2142

H

2043

H

/2143

H

2044

H

/2144

H

2045

H

/2145

H

2046

H

/2146

H

204D

H

/214D

H

204E

H

/214E

H

204F

H

/214F

H

2050

H

/2150

H

to

20A1

H

/21A1

H

2051

H

-2052

H

/2151

H

-

2152

H

to 20A1

H

-20A2

H

/

21A1

H

-21A2

H

2053

H

/2153

H

to

20A3

H

/21A3

H

2054

H

/2154

H

to

20A4

H

/21A4

H

2055

H

/2155

H

to

20A5

H

/21A5

H

2056

H

/2156

H

to

20A6

H

/21A6

H

2057

H

/2157

H

to

20A7

H

/21A7

H

2058

H

/2158

H

to

20A8

H

/21A8

H

Chapter 2 of

User's Manual (Application)

20E6

H

/21E6

H

20E7

H

/21E7

H

20E8

H

/21E8

H

8 - 28 8 - 28

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.10 Transmission user frame No. designation system setting

[Purpose]

Register the output frame number to transmit data with the non procedure protocol using the user frame.

[Startup procedure]

• Online operation

[Monitor] screen CH Output frame system setting

• Offline operation

[Flash ROM setting] screen CH Output frame system setting

[Setting screen]

[Setting item]

Setting item

Output frame No. designation 1st to 100th

Setting value storage buffer memory address

BA

H

to 11D

H

/

15A

H

to 1BD

H

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Chapter 11 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 29 8 - 29

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.4.11 Resetting the buffer memory/flash ROM setting values to the default values

This section explains how to reset the values set in the buffer memory/flash ROM to their default values.

[Startup procedure]

[Online] [Monitor/test] "Select monitor/Test module" Monitor/test

[Monitor] screen

[Operating procedure]

(Procedure 1) In the [Monitor] screen, select [Default request] for [System setting default].

(Procedure 2) Click on Execute test .

The setting values in the buffer memory will return to their default values.

(Procedure 3) Change the setting of [Flash ROM write allow/prohibit] to "Allowed."

(Procedure 4) In the [Monitor] screen, select [Write request] for [System setting write].

(Procedure 5) Click on Execute test .

The setting values in the flash ROM will return to their default values.

When confirming the processing results in GX Configurator-SC, perform

Read from module .

(Items subject to this operation in the [Monitor] screen)

8.4.12 Flash ROM write allow/prohibit setting

This section explains the settings to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM.

[Startup procedure]

[Online] [Monitor/test] "Select monitor/Test module" Monitor/test

[Monitor] screen

[Operating procedure]

(Procedure 1) In the [Monitor] screen, select [Flash ROM write allow/prohibit] and set "Allowed" or "Prohibited."

(Procedure 2) Click on Execute test .

[Flash ROM write allow/prohibit] will be set to "Allowed" or "Prohibited," accordingly.

8 - 30 8 - 30

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.5 Auto Refresh Setting

The Auto Refresh Settings are used to automatically store the error information and status information currently stored in the Q series C24's buffer memory in the device specified by the PLC CPU.

For details, see Section 4.6.

8 - 31 8 - 31

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6 Monitor/Test

[Purpose]

The displayed menu screen is used to perform various operations, including the monitoring of the Q series C24's operating status and setting values and the testing of its output signals. The monitor/test operations can be performed only via online operation.

[Startup procedure]

Startup from Intelligent function module utility

(GX Developer Version 4 or later)

[Online] [Monitor/test] "Select monitor/Test module" Monitor/test

[Monitor] screen

Startup from the system monitor (GX Developer Version 6 or later).

[GX Developer] [Diagnostics] [System Monitor] "Select the Q series

C24 by installation status" Diagnostics... [Monitor] screen

[Monitor/test screen]

[Monitor/test items]

The following selection menus for monitor/test operation will be displayed.

Function

Reference section containing explanation

ERR. occurrence

ERR. clear request

(Communication error information, error code information)

X · Y monitor/test

Modem function monitor/test

Transmission control and others monitor/test

MC protocol monitor

Non procedure monitor/test

Bidirectional monitor

PLC CPU monitoring monitor

Transmission user frame No. designation monitor

Monitor/test others

System setting default, system setting write

Flash ROM write allow/prohibit designation

Section 8.6.10

Section 8.6.1

Section 8.6.2

Section 8.6.3

Section 8.6.4

Section 8.6.5

Section 8.6.6

Section 8.6.7

Section 8.6.8

Section 8.6.9

Section 8.4.11

Section 8.4.12

8 - 32 8 - 32

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.1 X · Y monitor/test

[Purpose]

Perform the monitoring of I/O signals and testing of output signals.

[Startup procedure]

[Monitor] screen X · Y monitor/test

[Monitor/test screen]

[Monitor/test items]

Monitor/test items

X00: CH1 Transmission normal completion

X01: CH1 Transmission abnormal completion

X02: CH1 Transmission processing in progress

X03: CH1 Reception data read request

X04: CH1 Reception abnormal detection

X06: CH1 Mode switching

X0E: CH1 ERR. Occurrence

X1A: CH1 Global signal

X07: CH2 Transmission normal completion

X08: CH2 Transmission abnormal completion to

Y18: Flash ROM write request

Y19: Flash ROM system setting request

Y1C: System setting default request

Setting value storage buffer memory address

— to

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Section 3.8.

8 - 33 8 - 33

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.2 Modem function monitor/test

[Purpose for monitor/test]

Monitor/test the operating status and setting values of the modem function.

[Startup procedure]

[Monitor] screen Modem function monitor/test

[Monitor/test screen]

[Monitor/test items]

Monitor/test items

Modem function error code

Modem function sequence status

Number of data registration for connection

Number of data registrations for initialization

Number of notification execution

Data storage area 1 notification execution data No.

Data storage area 2 notification execution data No.

Data storage area 3 notification execution data No.

Data storage area 4 notification execution data No.

Data storage area 5 notification execution data No.

X10: Modem initialization completion

X11: Dial in progress

X12: Connection in progress

X13: Initialization/connection abnormal completion

X14: Modem disconnection completion

X15: Notification normal completion

X16: Notification abnormal completion

Y10: Modem initialization request

Setting value storage buffer memory address

221

H

222

H

223

H

226

H

229

H

22A

H

22E

H

232

H

236

H

23A

H

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Section 3.3 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 34 8 - 34

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

Monitor/test items

Y11: Connection request

Y12: Modem disconnection request

Y14: Notification-issued request

Modem connection channel designation

Notification execution designation

Number of connection retires designation

Connection retry interval designation units: s

Initialization/connection timeout designation units: s

Number of initialization retries designation

Data No. for initialization designation

Data No. for connection designation

GX Developer connection designation

No-communication interval time designation units: min

RS · CS control yes/no designation

Modem initialization time DR signal valid/invalid designation

Wait time of notification units: s

Circuit disconnect wait time (PLC CPU watch use) units: s

Remote password mismatch notification count designation

Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation

Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion

Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion

Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection

Auto modem initialization designation

Callback function designation

Callback denial notification accumulated count designation

Data No. for Callback designation 1 to 10

Callback permit accumulated count

Callback denial accumulated count

Auto (callback) connection permit accumulated count

Auto (callback) connection denial accumulated count

Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

33

H

34

H

35

H

36

H

37

H

38

H

2008

H

200A

H

2F

H

30

H

31

H

32

H

2E

H

200E

H

200C

H

Section 3.3 of

User's Manual (Application)

200D

22FB

22FC

22FF

2007

2001

H

H

H

H

H

H

2002

H

2101

H to 210A

H

22F0

H

22F1

H

22F2

H

22F3

H

22F4

H

8 - 35 8 - 35

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

[Test Items]

The following accumulated count of times counter values can be cleared to "0" by the select test function.

Test items

Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion

Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion

Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection

Callback permit accumulated count

Callback denial accumulated count

Auto (callback) connection permit accumulated count

Auto (callback) connection denial accumulated count

Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

22FB

H

22FC

H

22FF

H

22F0

H

22F1

H

22F2

H

22F3

H

22F4

H

Section 3.3 of

User's Manual (Application)

[Operation procedure]

(Step 1) Display the "Modem function monitor/test" screen.

(Step 2) Click the setting value area of the item to be cleared to "0."

(Step 3) Click the " Execute test ."

The counter value of the selected item becomes "0."

8 - 36 8 - 36

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.3 Transmission control and others monitor/test

[Purpose]

Monitor the RS-232 signal status and the various setting values for data communication.

[Startup procedure]

[Monitor] screen CH Transmission control monitor/test

[Monitor/test screen]

[Monitor/test items]

Monitor/test items

RS-232 control signal status

RTS (RS)

DSR (DR)

DTR (ER)

CD

CS (CTS)

RI (CI)

Communication protocol status

Operation setting

Data bit

Transmission status

Parity bit enable/disable

Even/odd parity

Stop bit

Sum check code

Write during RUM

Setting modification

Setting value storage buffer memory address

254

H

/264

H

… b0

254

H

/264

H

… b1

254

H

/264

H

… b2

254

H

/264

H

… b3

254

H

/264

H

… b4

254

H

/264

H

… b5

252

H

/262

H

253

H

/263

H

… b0

253

H

/263

H

… b1

253

H

/263

H

… b2

253

H

/263

H

… b3

253

H

/263

H

… b4

253

H

/263

H

… b6

253

H

/263

H

… b6

253

H

/263

H

… b7

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Section 4.4.1 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Section 4.5.2 of

User's Manual (Basic)

8 - 37 8 - 37

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

Monitor/test items

Transmission status

Transmission speed

DTR/DSR (ER/DR), DC control designation

DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) code designation

DC2/DC4 code designation

Communication system designation

CD terminal check designation

Half-duplex communications control designation

Simultaneous transmission priority/non-priority designation

Half-duplex communications control designation

Retransmission time transmission method designation

No-reception monitoring time (timer 0) designation units: byte

Response monitoring time (timer 1) designation units: 100 ms

Transmission monitoring time (timer 2) designation

units: 100 ms

Word/byte units designation

RTS (RS) designation

DTR (ER) designation

Transmission control start free area

Transmission control end free area

Send/Recv data monitoring designation

Action for buffer full

Stop by Timer 0 error

Monitor buffer head address

Monitor buffer size

Transmission buffer memory head address designation

Transmission buffer memory length designation

Receive buffer memory head address designation

Receive buffer memory length designation

Transmission transparent code designation 1st

Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 10th

Receive transparent code designation

ASCII-BIN conversion designation

Receive interrupt-issued designation

96

H

/136

H

92

H

/132

H

… b0

92

H

/132

H

… b2

2012

H

/2112

H

2013

H

/2113

H

2018

H

/2118

H

2019

H

/2119

H

… b0

2019

H

/2119

H

… b2

201A

H

/211A

H

201B

H

/211B

H

A2

H

/142

H

A3

H

/143

H

A6

H

/146

H

A7

H

/147

H

11F

H

/1BF

H

2030

H

to 2038

H

/

2130

H

to 2138

H

120

H

/1C0

H

121

H

/1C1

H

Setting value storage buffer memory address

253

H

/263

H

… b8 to b11

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Section 4.5.2 of

User's Manual (Basic)

93

H

/133

H

94

H

/134

H

95

H

/135

H

98

H

/138

H

97

H

/137

H

Chapter 7 of

User's Manual (Application)

Section 4.5.2 of

User's Manual (Basic)

99

H

/139

H

Chapter 8 of

User's Manual (Application)

9A

H

/13A

H

9C

H

/13C

H

9D

H

/13D

H

9E

H

/13E

H

Chapter 6 of

User's Manual (Application)

Chapter 5 of

User's Manual (Application)

Section 3.2.1 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Chapter 7 of

User's Manual (Application)

Chapter 16 of

User's Manual (Application)

Chapters 6 and 7 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Chapter 12 of

User's Manual (Application)

2010

H

/2110

H

Chapter 13 of

User's Manual (Application)

Chapter 4 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 38 8 - 38

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.4 MC protocol monitor

[Purpose]

Monitor the status and setting values of the data communication using the MC protocol.

[Startup procedure]

[Monitor] screen CH MC protocol monitor

[Monitor screen]

8 - 39 8 - 39

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

[Monitor items]

Monitor items

Transmission sequence status

On-demand execution result

Data transmission result

Data reception result

MC protocol transmission error code

X00: CH1 Transmission normal completion

X01: CH1 Transmission abnormal completion

X02: CH1 Transmission processing in progress

X1A: CH1 Global signal

Y00: CH1 Transmission request

On-demand function designation

Buffer memory head address designation

Data length designation

On-demand user

First frame No. designation 1st

First frame No. designation 2nd frame

Last frame No. designation 1st designation

Last frame No. designation 2nd

Message wait time designation units: 10 ms

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

255

H

/265

H

256

H

/266

H

257

H

/267

H

258

H

/268

H

25A

H

/26A

H

A0

H

/140

H

Chapter 10 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Sections 3.10 and 3.11 of

Reference Manual

A1

H

/141

H

A9

H

/149

H

AA

H

/14A

H

AB

H

/14B

H

AC

H

/14C

H

Chapter 10 of

User's Manual (Application)

11E

H

/1BE

H

Chapter 6 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 40 8 - 40

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.5 Non procedure monitor/test

[Purpose]

Monitor the status and setting values of the data transmission using the non procedure protocol. The test operation for the receive data clear is explained in

Section 8.7.

[Startup procedure]

[Monitor] screen CH Non procedure monitor/test

[Monitor/test screen]

8 - 41 8 - 41

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

[Monitor/test items]

Monitor/test items

Data transmission result

Data reception result

Receive user frame nth

User frame being transmitted

X00: CH1 Transmission normal completion

X01: CH1 Transmission abnormal completion

X02: CH1 Transmission processing in progress

X03: CH1 Reception data read request

X04: CH1 Reception abnormal detection

Y00: CH1 Transmission request

Y01: CH1 Reception data read completion

Received data count designation

Receive complete code designation

Receive user frame designation

User frame use enable/disable designation

First frame No. designation 1st to 4th

Last frame No. designation 1st to 4th

User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th

Exclusive format-1 received data count 1st to 4th

Transmission user frame designation

CR/LF output designation

Output head pointer designation

Output count designation

Timeout at No-protocol

Receive data clear request

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

257

H

/267

H

258

H

/268

H

25B

H

/26B

H

B6

H

/156

H

A4

H

/144

H

A5

H

/145

H

AD

H

/14D

H

AE

H

to B1

H

/14E

H

to 151

H

B2

H

to B5

H

/152

H

to 155

H

2020

H

to 2023

H

/

2120

H

to 2123

H

2024

H

to 2027

H

/

2124

H

to 2127

H

B7

H

/157

H

B8

H

/158

H

B9

H

/159

H

Chapter 10 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Chapter 11 of

User's Manual (Application)

Chapter 6 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Chapter 6 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Chapter 9 of

User's Manual (Application)

2014

A8

H

H

/2114

/148

H

H

Chapter 6 of

User's Manual (Application)

Chapter 6 of

User's Manual (Basic)

8 - 42 8 - 42

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.6 Bidirectional monitor

[Purpose]

Monitor the status and setting values of the data transmission using the bidirectional protocol.

[Startup procedure]

[Monitor] screen CH Bidirectional monitor

[Monitor screen]

[Monitor items]

Monitor items

Data transmission result

Data reception result

X00: CH1 Transmission normal completion

X01: CH1 Transmission abnormal completion

X02: CH1 Transmission processing in progress

X03: CH1 Reception data read request

Y00: CH1 Transmission request

Y01: CH1 Reception data read completion

Simultaneously transmission data valid/invalid designation

Setting value storage buffer memory address

257

H

/267

H

258

H

/268

H

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Chapter 10 of

User's Manual (Basic)

Chapter 7 of

User's Manual (Basic)

9B

H

/13B

H

Section 7.3 of

User's Manual (Basic)

8 - 43 8 - 43

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.7 PLC CPU monitoring monitor

[Purpose]

Monitor the operating status and setting values of the PLC CPU monitoring function.

[Startup procedure]

[Monitor] screen CH Monitoring monitor

[Monitor screen]

8 - 44 8 - 44

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

[Monitor items]

Monitor items

PLC CPU monitoring function

Operation status

Execution result

Number of transmission

Monitoring condition arrival block No.

Cycle time units designation

Cycle time designation

PLC CPU monitoring function designation

PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure designation

Transmission pointer

Constant cycle

Output count designation transmission

Data No. for connection designation

Number of registered word blocks designation

Number of registered bit blocks designation

PLC CPU abnormal monitoring designation

No. n block monitoring device

Monitoring device designation

Head device No. designation

Read point designation

Condition agreement transmission

Monitoring condition designation

Monitoring condition value designation

Transmission pointer designation

Output count designation

Data No. for connection designation

PLC PCU abnormal monitoring designation

Condition agreement transmission

Transmission pointer

Number of output designation

Data No. for connection designation

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

2204

H

/2304

H

2205

H

/2305

H

2206

H

/2306

H

2207

H

/2307

H

2040

H

/2140

H

2041

H

/2141

H

2042

H

/2142

H

2043

H

/2143

H

2044

H

/2144

H

2045

H

/2145

H

2046

H

/2146

H

204D

H

/214D

H

204E

H

/214E

H

204F

H

/214F

H

2050

H

/2150

H

to

20A1

H

/21A1

H

2051

H

-2052

H

/

2151

H

-2152

H

to

20A1

H

-20A2

H

/

21A1

H

-21A2

H

2053

H

/2153

H

to

20A3

H

/21A3

H

2054

H

/2154

H

to

20A4

H

/21A4

H

2055

H

/2155

H

to

20A5

H

/21A5

H

2056

H

/2156

H

to

20A6

H

/21A6

H

2057

H

/2157

H

to

20A7

H

/21A7

H

2058

H

/2158

H

to

20A8

H

/21A8

H

Chapter 2 of

User's Manual (Application)

20E6

H

/21E6

H

20E7

H

/21E7

H

20E8

H

/21E8

H

8 - 45 8 - 45

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.8 Transmission user frame No. designation monitor

[Purpose]

Monitor the setting value of output frame number used when transmitting data with the non procedure protocol using the user frame.

[Startup procedure]

[Monitor] screen CH Output frame monitor

[Monitor screen]

[Monitor item]

Monitor item

Output frame No. designation 1st to 100th

Setting value storage buffer memory address

BA

H

to 11D

H

/

15A

H

to 1BD

H

Reference section containing detailed explanation

Chapters 9 through 11 of

User's Manual (Application)

8 - 46 8 - 46

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.9 Monitor/test others

[Purpose]

Monitor the result of access to the flash ROM, the data communication status of each interface, and the result of the intelligent function module switch settings using GX Developer.

[Startup procedure]

[Monitor] screen Monitor/test others

[Monitor/test screen]

8 - 47 8 - 47

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

[Monitor/test items]

Monitor/test items

Flash ROM access register/read/delete result

Station No. (Switch setting)

Station No. (Instruction setting)

SD WAIT status

SIO status

PRO. status

P/S status

CH1

C/N status

NAK status

ACK. status

NEU. LED status

ERR. LED status

Communication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off

SD WAIT status

SIO status

PRO. status

CH2

P/S status

C/N status

NAK status

ACK. status

NEU. LED status

ERR. LED status

Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off

CH1 Communication protocol setting No. error

CH1 Transmission speed setting error

CH1 Mode switching error of setting change prohibit time

CH2 Communication protocol setting No. error

CH2 Transmission speed setting error

CH2 Mode switching error of setting change prohibit time

Station No. out of range error

Linked operation setting error

Number of registered user frame

Number of registered default registration frames

Flash ROM system parameters write result

Setting value storage buffer memory address

Reference section containing detailed explanation

4

H

200

H

24F

H

201

H

… b0

201

H

… b1

201

H

… b2

201

H

… b3

201

H

… b4

201

H

… b5

201

H

… b6

201

H

… b7

202

H

… b15

0

H

202

H

… b0

202

H

… b1

202

H

… b2

202

H

… b3

202

H

… b4

202

H

… b5

202

H

… b6

202

H

… b7

202

H

… b14

1

H

203

H

… b0

203

H

… b1

203

H

… b3

203

H

… b4

203

H

… b5

203

H

… b7

203

H

… b14

203

H

… b15

204

H

21E

H

220

H

Chapter 10 of

User's Manual (Basic)

8 - 48 8 - 48

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.6.10 Display LED off and communication error information/error code initialization

This section explains how to turn off the display LEDs of the Q series C24 and initialize its communication error information and error codes.

(1) CH ERR. clear request on Monitor/Test screen

This is used to turn off the CH ERR. LED of the Q series C24 and to initialize

(clear) the error codes stored in the CH side buffer memory.

Refer to Section 10.1.2 (1) for the buffer memory where the error codes are stored.

[Operation procedure]

1) Display the "Monitor/Test" screen.

2) Select "Clear request" for "CH ERR. clear request".

3) Click on Execute test .

8 - 49 8 - 49

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

(2) Communication error clear request for CH and to turn LED off on

Monitor/test others screen

This is used to turn off the CH LED of the Q series C24 and to initialize (clear) the communication error information.

The CH LED on status and communication error information can be confirmed on the Monitor/test others screen.

[Operation procedure]

1) Display the "Monitor/test others" screen.

2) Select any of "Request 1 to 3" for "Communication error clear request for CH and to turn LED off".

Setting range Target of LED off/communication error information initialization

Request 1

Request 2

SIO, PRO., P/S, C/N, NAK, ERR. LED ( 1)

SD WAIT, ACK., NEU. LED

Request 3 All of Requests 1 and 2

1 The ERR. LED is turned off. (However, it is not turned off if an error has occurred on either the CH1 or CH2 side.)

3) Click on Execute test .

8 - 50 8 - 50

8 UTILITY PACKAGE (GX Configurator-SC)

MELSEC-Q

8.7 Non Procedure Protocol Receive Data Clear

This section explains how to clear the received data using the non procedure protocol.

By using this function, the receive data can be cleared from GX Configurator-SC while the communication with the non procedure protocol is still in progress, without resetting the PLC CPU or turning off the power.

[Operation procedure]

(Procedure 1) Display the [Non procedure monitor/test] screen. (See Section 8.6.5.)

(Procedure 2) Set [Clear request issued] for "Receive data clear request".

(Procedure 3) Click on Execute test .

The received data will be cleared.

POINT

Clear the received data when transmission/reception are not in progress with the external device.

Executing a receive data clear while the data transmission is in progress causes the Q series C24 to stop the data transmission abruptly, resulting in an abnormal completion of the dedicated transmission instruction. (The transmission completion signal will not be lit.)

When the receive data clear is executed while the data reception is in progress, the data received up to that point will be cleared.

8 - 51 8 - 51

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

Dedicated instructions are used to simplify programming when using intelligent function module functions.

This chapter describes the dedicated instructions for the Q series C24, which is part of the functions of the QCPU (in Q mode) explained in this manual.

9.1 Dedicated Instruction List

The following table lists the dedicated instructions explained in this chapter.

Application

Dedicated instruction

Description of function

On-demand function transmission ONDEMAND

Sends data using the on-demand function of the MC protocol.

Non procedure protocol communication

OUTPUT

INPUT

Sends data for the specified data count.

Reads received data.

Bidirectional protocol communication

BIDOUT

BIDIN

Sends data for the designated data count.

Reads received data.

Communication status confirmation SPBUSY

Receive data clear CSET

Reads the status of data transmission/reception via a dedicated instruction.

Perform the receive data clear without stopping the transmission processing during the non procedure protocol.

Explanation page

Section 9.2

Section 9.3

Section 9.4

Section 9.5

Section 9.6

Section 9.7

Section 9.8

POINT

(1) The user should not change data values (control data, request data, etc.) designated by a dedicated instruction until the execution of the dedicated instruction is completed.

(2) Dedicated instructions for the Q series C24 are executed based on the current setting values stored in the buffer memory when the module is started.

When it is necessary to change a setting value, change the value by GX

Configurator-SC before starting up the module.

Alternatively, a setting value can be changed via the sequence program using a CSET instruction before starting up the PLC CPU (See the User's Manual

(Application)).

1) Area of buffer memory assigned as applicable functions for dedicated instructions.

2) Setting values for data communication

• Word/byte units designation

• Receive complete code

• Received data count etc.

9

9 - 1 9 - 1

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

9.2 ONDEMAND Instruction

Set data

(S1)

(S2)

(D)

Internal device

(System, user)

Bit

Word

The ONDEAMAND instruction transmission data using the on-demand function of the

MC protocol.

File register

Applicable device

MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10

Direct J \

Bit Word

Special module

U \G

Index register Zn Constant Others

[Instruction code]

ONDEMAND

[Executing condition]

Command

G.ONDEMAND

Un

(S1) (S2) (D)

Command

GP.ONDEMAND

Un

(S1) (S2) (D)

ONDEMAND

Set data

Set data

Un

(S1)

(S2)

(D)

Description

Start I/O signal of the module

(00 to FE: Top two-digit when I/O signals are expressed in 3-digit.)

Head number of the devices in which control data is stored.

Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored.

Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution.

Set by

User

User, system

User

System

Data type

BIN16 bit

Device name

The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data.

Bit

9

Control data

Device

(S1) + 0

(S1) + 1

(S1) + 2

Item Set data

Transmission channel

• Set transmission channel

1: Channel 1 (CH1 side)

2: Channel 2 (CH2 side)

Transmission result

Transmission data count

• Result read by an ONDEMAND instruction is stored.

0: Normal

Other than 0: Error code

1

• Set the transmission data count.

2

Setting range

1, 2

Set by

3

User

System

1 or more User

1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion, see Chapter 10 of the User's

Manual (Basic).

2 When setting "Word/byte units designation" by GX Configurator-SC, set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated.

3 The settings are done by either of the following:

• User: Data set by the user before executing the ONDEMAND instructions.

• System: The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the ONDEMAND instructions.

9 - 2 9 - 2

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

Function

MELSEC-Q

(1) Data stored in the device designated in (S2) and succeeding devices are sent according to the control data of the device designated in (S1) and succeeding devices, via the on-demand function of the MC protocol of the module designated in

Un.

QCPU Q series C24 to b0

Channel to be used is set by the control data.

(S2)+ 0

+ 1

+ 2 b15

Channel 1

Send

Send

Channel 2

(2) When an ONDEMAND instruction is executed on a channel, other ONDEMAND instructions cannot be executed on that channel at the same time.

If an attempt is made during execution of an ONDEMAND instruction to execute another ONDEMAND instruction, the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the first instruction is completed.

(3) Whether an ONDEMAND instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device ((D)) or status display device at completion

((D)+1).

(a) Completion device : Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ONDEMAND instruction is completed, and turns off at the next END processing.

(b) Status display device at completion : Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ONDEMAND instruction.

• Normal completion : Off with no change.

• Abnormal completion: Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ONDEMAND instruction is completed, and turns off at the next END processing.

[Operation during execution of an ONDEMAND instruction]

END END

Sequence processing processing program

Execution of ONDEMAND instruction

ONDEMAND instruction

END processing

END processing

Completion of reading user frame by ONDEMAND instruction

ON

Completion device

OFF

ON

Abnormal completion

Status display device at completion

OFF

Normal completion

One scan

9 - 3 9 - 3

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Error

(1) When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally, the abnormal completion signal, (D)+1, turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result

(S1)+1.

In case of operation errors, the error flag (SM0) turns on and the error code is stored in the SD0.

See one of the following manuals according to the error code, and check and correct the error.

<Error code>

4FFF

H

or less : QCPU(Q Mode) User's Manual

(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

7000

H

or more: Section 10.2 of the User's Manual (Basic)

Program example

A program that sends data stored in D10 to D11 using an on-demand transmission

When input/output signals of the Q series C24 are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F

On-demand transmission command pulse

Set the transmission channel to CH1.

Set the send data count to 2 words.

Set the transmission data to D10 to D11.

Reset the normal completion flag.

Reset the abnormal completion flag.

Set the transmission ready flag.

On-demand transmission execution

Normal completion

Abnormal completion

Reset the transmission ready flag.

POINT

(1) The status of communication via dedicated instructions can be read by an

SPBUSY instruction.

(2) Designate the storage capacity of transmission data (stored in D10 to D11 in the program example above) and data length (stored in D2 in the program example above) within the range of the buffer memory the user has assigned for an on-demand function.

9 - 4 9 - 4

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

9.3 OUTPUT Instruction

Set data

(S1)

(S2)

(D)

Internal device

(System, user)

Bit

Word

This instruction transmission data in any message format specified by the user using the non procedure protocol.

File register

Applicable device

MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10

Direct J \

Bit Word

Special module

U \G

Index register Zn Constant Others

[Instruction code]

OUTPUT

[Executing condition]

Command

G.OUTPUT

Un

(S1) (S2)

(D)

Command

GP.OUTPUT

Un (S1) (S2)

OUTPUT

(D)

Set data

Set data

Un

(S1)

(S2)

(D)

Description

Start I/O signal of the module

(00 to FE: Top two-digit when I/O signals are expressed in 3-digit.)

Head number of the devices in which control data is stored.

Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored.

Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution.

Set by

User

User, system

User

System

Data type

BIN16 bit

Device name

The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data.

Bit

Control data

Device

(S1) + 0

(S1) + 1

(S1) + 2

Item

Transmission channel

Transmission result

Set data

• Set transmission channel

1: Channel 1 (CH1 side)

2: Channel 2 (CH2 side)

• Transmission result by an OUTPUT instruction are stored.

0: Normal

Other than 0: Error code

1

Setting range

1, 2

Transmission data count

• Set the transmission data count.

2

1 or more

Set by

3

User

System

User

1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion, see Chapter 10 of the User's

Manual (Basic).

2 When setting "Word/byte units designation" by GX Configurator-SC, set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated and set the number of words when words are selected as the unit types.

3 The settings are done by either of the following:

• User: Data set by the user before executing the OUTPUT instructions.

• System: The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the OUTPUT instructions.

9 - 5 9 - 5

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Function

(1) Data stored in the device designated in (S2) and succeeding devices are sent according to the control data of the device designated in (S1) and succeeding devices, via the non procedure protocol of the module specified in Un.

QCPU Q series C24 to b0

Channel to be used is set by the control data.

(S2) + 0

+ 1

+ 2 b15

Channel 1

Send

Send

Channel 2

(2) The following instructions cannot be executed on a channel on which an OUTPUT instruction is being executed.

• Other OUTPUT instructions

• PRR instructions

If an attempt is made during execution of an OUTPUT instruction to execute one of the instructions above, the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the OUTPUT instruction is completed.

(3) Whether an OUTPUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device ((D)) or status display device at completion

((D)+1).

(a) Completion device: Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the

OUTPUT instruction is completed, and turns off at the next END processing.

(b) Status display device at completion : Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the OUTPUT instruction.

• Normal completion : Off with no change.

• Abnormal completion: Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the OUTPUT instruction is completed, and turns off at the next END processing.

[Operation during execution of an OUTPUT instruction]

Sequence program

END processing

END processing

Execution of OUTPUT instruction

OUTPUT instruction

END processing

END processing

Completion of transmission by the OUTPUT instruction

ON

Completion device

OFF

ON

Abnormal completion

Status display device at completion

OFF

Normal completion

One scan

9 - 6 9 - 6

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Error

(1) When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally, the abnormal completion signal, (D)+1, turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result

(S1)+1.

In case of operation errors, the error flag (SM0) turns on and the error code is stored in the SD0.

See one of the following manuals according to the error code, and check and correct the error.

<Error code>

4FFF

H

or less : QCPU(Q Mode) User's Manual

(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

7000

H

or more: Section 10.2 of the User's Manual (Basic)

Program example

The following example shows a program that sends any data stored in D11 to D15 using the non procedure protocol.

When input/output signals of the Q series C24 are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F:

The transmission command is converted into pulse.

Transmission data is stored.

Designate the number of the interface (CH ) that will send the data.

Clear the transmission result storage device to 0.

Designate the transmission data count in word units.

(Designate K10 when the unit is bytes.)

The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent.

After the O UTPUT instruction is executed, the user designated transmission com plete signal (M 0) turns

O N for one scan.

Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory, and issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are all executed by the PLC CPU.

The completion flag is reset by an external instruction.

9 - 7 9 - 7

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

9.4 INPUT Instruction

Set data

(S)

(D1)

(D2)

Internal device

(System, user)

Bit

Word

This instruction receives data in any message format specified by the user using the non procedure protocol.

File register

Applicable device

MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10

Direct J \

Bit Word

Special module

U \G

Index register Zn Constant Others

[Instruction code]

INPUT

[Executing condition]

Command

G.INPUT

Un (S) (D1)

(D2)

Set data

Set data

Un

(S)

(D1)

(D2)

Description

Start I/O signal of the module

(00 to FE: Top two-digit when I/O signals are expressed in 3-digit.)

Head number of the devices in which control data is stored.

Head number of the devices in which receive data is stored.

Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution.

Set by

User

User, system

System

System

Data type

BIN16 bit

Device name

The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data.

Bit

Control data

Device

(S) + 0

(S) + 1

(S) + 2

(S) + 3

Item

Receive channel

Reception result

Receive data count

Allowable number of receive data

Set data

• Set receive channel

1: Channel 1 (CH1 side)

2: Channel 2 (CH2 side)

• Reception result by an INPUT instruction are stored.

0: Normal

Other than 0: Error code

1

• Receive data count is stored.

2

• Set the allowable number of words for received data that can be stored in (D1).

Setting range

1, 2

0 or more

1 or more

Set by

3

User

System

System

User

POINT

(1) The command of G.INPUT cannot be converted into pulse.

(2) G.INPUT should be executed while the read request of the input/output signal is turned on.

9 - 8 9 - 8

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion, see Chapter 10 of the User's

Manual (Basic).

2 When setting "Word/byte units designation" by GX Configurator-SC, set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated.

3 The settings are done by either of the following:

• User: Data set by the user before executing the INPUT instructions.

• System: The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the INPUT instructions.

Function

(1) The function stores in the device designated in (D1) and succeeding devices the data received with the non procedure protocol of the module designated in Un, according to the control data of the device designated in (S) and succeeding devices.

(2) When an INPUT instruction is executed on a channel, other INPUT instructions cannot be executed on the channel at the same time.

If an attempt is made during execution of an INPUT instruction to execute another

INPUT instruction, the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the first INPUT instruction is completed.

(3) In case of reading the receive data to the same interface, it cannot be used along with BUFRCVS instruction (for interrupt programs).

(4) Whether an INPUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device ((D2)) or status display device at completion

((D2)+1).

(a) Completion device: Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the

INPUT instruction is completed, and turns off at the next

END processing.

(b) Status display device at completion : Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the INPUT instruction.

• Normal completion : Off with no change.

• Abnormal completion: Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the INPUT instruction is completed, and turns off at the next END processing.

[Operation during execution of an INPUT instruction]

Sequence program

END processing

END processing

Execution of INPUT instruction

INPUT instruction

END processing

END processing

Completion of reception by an INPUT instruction

ON

Completion device

OFF

ON

Abnormal completion

Status display device at completion

OFF

Normal completion

One scan

9 - 9 9 - 9

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Error

(1) When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally, the abnormal completion signal (D2)+1, turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result

(S1)+1.

In case of operation errors, the error flag (SM0) turns on and the error code is stored in SD0.

See one of the following manuals according to the error code, and check and correct the error.

<Error code>

4FFF

H

or less : QCPU(Q Mode) User's Manual

(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

7000

H

or more: Section 10.2 of the User's Manual (Basic)

Program example

The following example shows a program that stores data received via the nonprocedure protocol in D10 and later.

When the input/output signals of the Q series C24 are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F:

Designate the receive channel.

Clear the reception result and receive data count storage device to 0.

Designate the allowable receive data count.

With normal completion, the receive data within the allowable receive data count (user designated) is read from the receive data storage area in the buffer memory.

• Once the INPUT instruction is executed, the user

designated read completion signal (M0) turns ON for

1 scan.

The reading of receive data and switching of the

ON/OFF status are performed by the PLC CPU.

The abnormal completion flag is reset by an external command.

9 - 10 9 - 10

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

9.5 BIDOUT Instruction

Set data

(S1)

(S2)

(D)

Internal device

(System, user)

Bit

Word

This instruction transmission data using the bidirectional protocol.

File register

Bit

Applicable device

MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10

Direct J \

Word

Special module

U \G

Index register Zn Constant Others

[Instruction code]

BIDOUT

[Executing condition]

Command

G.BIDOUT

Un (S1) (S2)

(D)

Command

GP.BIDOUT

Un (S1) (S2)

BIDOUT

(D)

Set data

Set data

Un

(S1)

(S2)

(D)

Description

Start I/O signal of the module

(00 to FE: Top two-digit when I/O signals are expressed in 3-digit.)

Head number of the devices in which control data is stored.

Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored.

Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution.

Set by

User

User, system

User

System

Data type

BIN16 bit

Device name

The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data.

Bit

Control data

Device

(S1) + 0

(S1) + 1

(S1) + 2

Item

Transmission channel

Transmission result

Set data

• Set transmission channel

1: Channel 1 (CH1 side)

2: Channel 2 (CH2 side)

• Transmission result by a BIDOUT instruction are stored.

0: Normal

Other than 0: Error code

1

Transmission data count

• Set the transmission data count.

2

Setting range

1, 2

1 or more

Set by

3

User

System

User

1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion, see Chapter 10 of the User's

Manual (Basic).

2 When setting "Word/byte units designation" by GX Configurator-SC, set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated.

3 The settings are done by either of the following:

• User: Data set by the user before executing the BIDOUT instructions.

• System: The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the BIDOUT instructions.

9 - 11 9 - 11

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Function

(1) The function sends data stored in the device designated in (S2) and succeeding devices according to the control data of the device designated in (S1) and succeeding devices, via the bidirectional protocol of the module designated in Un.

(2) When a BIDOUT instruction is executed on a channel, other BIDOUT instructions cannot be executed on that channel at the same time.

If an attempt is made during execution of a BIDOUT instruction to execute another

BIDOUT instruction, the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the first instruction is completed.

(3) Whether a BIDOUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device ((D)) or status display device at completion

((D)+1).

(a) Completion device: Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the

BIDOUT instruction is completed, and turns off at the next

END processing.

(b) Status display device at completion : Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the BIDOUT instruction.

• Normal completion : Off with no change.

• Abnormal completion: Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDOUT instruction is completed, and turns off at the next END processing.

[Operation during execution of a BIDOUT instruction]

Sequence program

END processing

END processing

Execution of BIDOUT instruction

BIDOUT instruction

END processing

END processing

Completion of transmission by a BIDOUT

ON

Completion device

OFF

ON

Abnormal completion

Status display device at completion

OFF

Normal completion

One scan

Error

(1) When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally, the abnormal completion signal (D)+1, turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result (S1)+1.

In case of operation errors, the error flag (SM0) turns on and the error code is stored in SD0.

See one of the following manuals according to the error code, and check and correct the error.

<Error code>

4FFF

H

or less : QCPU(Q Mode) User's Manual

(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

7000

H

or more: Section 10.2 of the User's Manual (Basic)

9 - 12 9 - 12

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Program example

The following example shows a program that sends any data stored in D11 to D15 using the bidirectional protocol.

When the input/output signals of the Q series C24 are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F:

Transmission command is converted to pulse.

Transmission data is stored.

Designate the number of the interface (CH ) that will send the data.

Clear the transmission result storage device to 0.

Designate the transmission data count in word units.

(Designate K10 when the unit is bytes.)

The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent.

After the BIDOUT instruction is executed, the user designated transmission complete signal (M1) turns ON for one scan.

Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory, and issuing a transmission request to Q series C24 are all executed by the PLC CPU.

The completion flag is reset by the external command.

9 - 13 9 - 13

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

9.6 BIDIN Instruction

Set data

(S)

(D1)

(D2)

Internal device

(System, user)

Bit

Word

This instruction receives data using the bidirectional protocol.

File register

Bit

Applicable device

MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10

Direct J \

Word

Special module

U \G

Index register Zn Constant Others

[Instruction code]

BIDIN

[Executing condition]

Command

G.BIDIN

Un (S) (D1) (D2)

Command

GP.BIDIN

Un (S) (D1) (D2)

BIDIN

Set data

Set data

Un

(S)

(D1)

(D2)

Description

Start I/O signal of the module

(00 to FE: Top two-digit when I/O signals are expressed in 3-digit.)

Head number of the devices in which control data is stored.

Head number of the devices in which receive data is stored.

Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution.

Set by

User

User, system

System

System

Data type

BIN16 bit

Device name

The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data.

Bit

Control data

Device

(S) + 0

(S) + 1

(S) + 2

(S) + 3

Item

Receive channel

Reception result

Receive data count

Allowable number of receive data

Set data

• Set receive channel

1: Channel 1 (CH1 side)

2: Channel 2 (CH2 side)

• Reception result by a BIDIN instruction are stored.

0: Normal

1

• The number of data received is stored.

• Set the allowable number of words for received data that can be stored in (D1).

Setting range

1, 2

1 or more

1 or more

Set by

2

User

System

System

User

POINT

(1) The command of G (P).BIDIN cannot be converted into pulse.

(2) G (P).BIDIN should be executed while the read request of the input/output signal is turned on.

9 - 14 9 - 14

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

Function

MELSEC-Q

1 When setting "Word/byte units designation" by GX Configurator-SC, set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated as the unit types.

2 The settings are done by either of the following:

• User: Data set by the user before executing the BIDIN instructions.

• System: The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the BIDIN instructions.

(1) The function stores in the device designated in (D1) and succeeding devices the data received via the bidirectional protocol of the module designated in Un, according to the control data of the device designated in (S) and succeeding devices.

(2) When a BIDIN instruction is executed on a channel, other BIDIN instructions cannot be executed on the channel at the same time.

If an attempt is made during execution of a BIDIN instruction to execute another

BIDIN instruction, the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the first instruction is completed.

(3) It cannot be used along with BUFRCVS instruction (for interrupt programs).

(4) Whether a BIDIN instruction was completed normally can be checked by the completion device ((D2)) or status display device at completion ((D2)+1).

(a) Completion device: Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the

BIDIN instruction is completed normally, and turns off at the next END processing.

(b) Status display device at completion: Does not change when left off.

[Operation during execution of a BIDIN instruction]

Sequence program

END processing

END processing

Execution of BIDIN instruction

BIDIN instruction

Completion device

OFF

END processing

END processing

Completion of reception by

BIDIN instruction

ON

Status display device at completion

OFF

One scan

9 - 15 9 - 15

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Error

(1) In case of operation errors, the error flag (SM0) turns on and the error code is stored in SD0.

See one of the following manuals according to the error code, and check and correct the error.

<Error code>

4FFF

H

or less : QCPU(Q Mode) User's Manual

(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

Program example

The following example shows a program that receives any data using the bidirectional protocol and stores that data in D10 or later.

The input/output signals of the Q series C24 are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F:

Designate the receive channel.

Clear the receive data count storage device to 0.

Designate the allowable receive data count.

With the normal completion, the receive data within the allowable receive data count

(user designated) is read from the receive data storage area in the buffer memory.

• After the BIDIN instruction is executed,

• the user designated read completion signal (M0) comes on for 1 scan.

The reading of received data is performed by the PLC CPU.

9 - 16 9 - 16

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

9.7 SPBUSY Instruction

Set data

(D)

Internal device

(System, user)

Bit Word

This instruction reads the status of data transmission and reception executed with dedicated instructions.

File register

Applicable device

MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10

Direct J \

Bit Word

Special module

U \G

Index register Zn Constant Others

[Instruction code]

SPBUSY

[Executing condition]

Command

G.SPBUSY

Un

(D)

Command

GP.SPBUSY

Un (D)

SPBUSY

Set data

Set data

Un

(D)

Description

Start I/O signal of the module

(00 to FE: Top two-digit when I/O signals are expressed in 3-digit.)

Head number of devices in which the read communication status is stored.

Set by

User

System

Data type

BIN16 bit

Device name

Function

(1) The function reads the execution status of a dedicated instruction directed to a module designated by the start I/O signal, and stores it in the device designated by (D) or later.

(2) The execution status is stored in (D) in the form of "1" at the corresponding bit when the processing of each instruction is started, and "0" when the processing is completed.

The processing of each instruction is completed when the completion flag of each instruction is turned from on to off.

(D) + 0 b15 to b4 b3b2b1 b0

(D) + 1 0

Stores the execution status of ONDEMAND, OUTPUT, PRR, and BIDOUT instructions directed to channel 1.

Stores the execution status of INPUT and BIDIN instructions directed to channel 1.

Stores the execution status of ONDEMAND, OUTPUT, PRR, and BIDOUT instructions directed to channel 2.

Stores the execution status of INPUT and BIDIN instructions directed to channel 2.

Stores the execution status of GETE and PUTE instructions.

(Always stores "0".)

(3) The SPBUSY instruction is executed for every scan while the read command is

ON, if the system is executing during ON. And, the instruction will be executed for a single scan when the read command rises from OFF to ON, if the system is starting up.

9 - 17 9 - 17

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Error

(1) In case of operation errors, the error flag (SM0) turns on and the error code is stored in SD0.

See one of the following manuals according to the error code, and check and correct the error.

<Error code>

4FFF

H

or less : QCPU(Q Mode) User's Manual

(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

7000

H or more: Section 10.2 of the User's Manual (Basic)

Program example

A program that reads the communication status of a target module.

When input/output signals of the Q series C24 are from X/Y00 to X/Y1F

The function reads the communication status of a target module and stores it in a device.

9 - 18 9 - 18

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

9.8 CSET (Receive data clear)

Set data

(S1)

(S2)

(D1)

(D2)

Bit

Internal device

(System, user)

Word

File register

Bit

Applicable device

MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10

Direct J \

Word

Special module

U \G

Index register Zn Constant Others

K, H —

[Instruction code]

CSET

[Executing condition]

[Instruction form]

ZP.CSET

"Un" (S1) (S2) (D1) (D2)

Set data

Set data

"Un"

(S1)

(S2)

(D1)

(D2)

Description

Start I/O signal of the module

(00 to FE: Top two-digit when I/O signals are expressed in 3-digit.)

Number of the channel that demands to clear receiving data.

1: Channel 1 (CH1 side)

2: Channel 2 (CH2 side)

Head number of the device that stores the control data.

Set by

User

Dummy

Head number of the bit device at the self-station that turns on for one scan at the completion of the instruction.

(D2) + 1 also turns on at an abnormal completion.

User, System

System

Data type

BIN16 bit

Device name

Device name

Bit

Each of file registers for local device and program cannot be used as the setting data.

Control data

Device

(S2) + 0

(S2) + 1

(S2) + 2

(S2) + 3 to

(S2) + 111

Item

Execution type

Complete status

Request type

For system

Set data

Select 0.

The execution result at the completion of the instruction is stored.

0: Normal

Other than 0: Abnormal (error code)

Specify the request.

4: Receive data clear request

Setting range

0

4

— —

Set by

User

System

User

System

REMARK

(1) See the "Error" explanation on the following page for details on errors caused by wrong data specifications by the user.

(2) The setting sides are partitioned as follows:

• User: Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction.

• System: The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the dedicated instruction.

9 - 19 9 - 19

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Function

Sequence program

CSET instruction

Complete device

Complete device+1

Q series C24

Error

(1) This function clears reception data in the OS area. It does not clear the user data reception area in the buffer memory.

(2) If the CSET instruction is executed while the read request (X03/X0A) or reception abnormal detection signal (X04/X0B) is turned on, the CSET instruction is kept waiting until the signal is turned off.

(3) The status of the CSET instruction, whether it is being executed or completed normally/abnormally, can be checked by the complete device (D2) specified by the setting data.

(a) Complete device ((D2) + 0)

This device turns on at the End processing of the scan at which the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next End processing.

(b) Complete device ((D2) + 1)

It turns on/off by the status at which the CSET instruction is completed.

• At normal completion: It is kept turned off and does not change.

• At abnormal completion: It turns on at the END processing of the scan at which the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing.

[Operation at execution of CSET instruction]

Scan

End processing

Scan

End processing

Scan

Execution of instruction

End processing

Setting processing

At abnormal completion

(1) If the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed, the error flag (SM0) turns on and the error code is stored in SD0.

See the following manuals according to the error code, and check/take action according to the error.

<Error code>

4FFF

H

or less : QCPU User's Manual

(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

7000

H or more: Section 10.2 of the User's Manual (Basic)

9 - 20 9 - 20

9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS

MELSEC-Q

Program example

This is an example of a program that clears reception data on the Q series C24 side.

It is assumed that the input/output signals of the Q series C24 are X/Y00 to X/Y1F.

Set the execution type

Set the request type

(Reception data clear)

Execute the reception data clear

Normal completion

Abnomal completion

Reset the complete flag by external command

9 - 21 9 - 21

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter explains the definitions of errors that may occur during data communication between the Q series C24 and external devices, and the corrective actions.

10.1 Checking the Status of the Serial Communication Module

10.1.1 Checking the LED ON status, communications error status, and switch setting status of the serial communication module

This section explains how to check the status of communication between the Q series

C24 and external devices, the transmission status of the Q series C24, and the switch setting status of the Q series C24.

When a communication problem occurs, check the error status using one of the following procedures:

(1) Checking the module status and error codes in the detailed module information screen of the GX Developer diagnostic functions

[Startup procedure]

GX Developer [Diagnostics] [System monitor]

Module's Detailed Information

10

10 - 1 10 - 1

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

[Displays]

• Module

The following information is displayed:

Module name : The name of the module installed

I/O Address : The start input/output signal (number) of the target module

Implementation Position: The slot position where the module is mounted

Product information : Product information

The last character of the product information indicates the function version of the module.

(Example) If the last character is "B," it means that the module is of function version B.

• Unit access (Module access)

Displays access permissions when the Ready signal (X1E) is turned on and the WDT error signal (X1F) is turned off.

• Status of I/O Address Verify

Displays whether or not the module for which the user set the parameters matches the module installed.

• Remote password setting status

Displays the setting status of the remote password.

• Present Error

Displays the error code of the latest error occurrence.

• Error Display

Displays the error codes for any errors that have occurred in any of the functions being used.

• Error details, corrective action

Displays the error details and corrective action for the error code selected in

Error Display.

(2) Checking using the hardware information screen of the GX

Developer diagnostic functions

[Startup procedure]

GX Developer [Diagnostics] [System monitor]

Module's Detailed Information H/W Information

10

10 - 2 10 - 2

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

[Displays]

1) H/W LED Information Right side (Left side: CH1 information/

Right side: CH2 information)

Displays the transmission status and the communications error status of the Q series C24.

(Displays 201

H

/202

H

of the buffer memory.)

Buffer memory address 201

H b15 to

For system

1: Lit/Communication error

0: not lit/No communication error b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 (Information of CH1 side)

SD WAIT

SIO

PRO.

P/S

C/N

NAK

ACK.

NEU.

b15 b14 b13

Buffer memory address 202

H

1/0 1/0 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 (Information of CH2 side)

For system

SD WAIT

SIO

PRO.

P/S

C/N

NAK

ACK.

NEU.

CH2 ERR.

CH1 ERR.

2) H/W SW Information Parameter

The switch information of the Q series C24 is displayed.

Numbers 1 through 5 correspond to switches 1 through 5 shown in

Section 4.5.2.

(See Section 4.5.2 of the User's Manual (Basic).)

10 - 3 10 - 3

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

(3) Checking by GX Configurator-SC

Display the "Monitor/test others" screen.

For details on display screens, see Section 8.6.9 of the User's Manual (Basic).

No.

Status signal name

(4) Description of LED ON status and communications error status

Description

Description when ON

(when LED is turned on (when LED is turned off

(1))

Description when OFF

(0))

Initial state

MC

Related protocol

Non procedure protocol

Bidirectional protocol

1 SD WAIT Transmission wait status

Waiting for data transmission

2 SIO SIO error status

Overrun or framing error occurred.

OS area is full.

Received data was deleted.

3

4

5

PRO.

P/S

C/N

Communication protocol error status

Status of parity error or sum check error

Access status with the

PLC CPU

(

Error occurred.

Error occurred.

1

)

6

7

8

9 CH2. ERR

10

NAK

ACK.

NEU.

CH1. ERR

Abnormal completion status

Normal completion status

Neutral status

Waiting to receive command

Error occurrence status on CH2 side

Error occurrence status on CH1 side

Abnormal completion transmission

Normal completion transmission

Neutral

Switch setting error

Mode switching error

Transmission error

Reception error

On-demand error

Data transmission start OFF

Normal

Normal

Normal

Normal

Normal completion transmission

Abnormal completion transmission

Command reception

Normal

(

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

2

OFF

OFF

)

1 C/N turns on in the following cases:

• An external device issued a data read request to the PLC CPU when write during RUN is set to prohibit in the switch settings by GX Developer (see

Section 4.5.2).

For functions that cannot be used when write during RUN is set to prohibit, see the explanation section in each command list of the Reference Manual.

• When an error has occurred during access between the Q series C24 and the

PLC CPU.

2 NEU. is valid when a target interface is set to use the MC protocol.

When the target interface is set to other than the MC protocol, the status of NEU.

is off.

10 - 4 10 - 4

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

(a) When a communication error occurs, take corrective action according to

Section 10.3.

(b) The initial status of the LED ON and communications error indicates the status when the Q series C24 starts up by turning on the power or resetting the PLC CPU.

(c) Each of the communications error status, C/N to SIO, CH1 ERR. and CH2

ERR., turns on when an error occurs, and keeps its on-status even after the communication returns to normal.

The PLC CPU can check the aforementioned LED ON status and communications error status, and initialize any error information using read/write to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 and input/output signals.

Initialize the error information according to Section 10.1.2.

(d) NAK to NEU. (No. 6 to 8) turn on/off depending on the status.

(e) SD WAIT turns on when data cannot be sent to the external device by the transmission control of the Q series C24 (waiting for data transmission).

• When transmission cannot be started.

• When a transmission pause request is received during data transmission.

(DSR signal is off, reception by DC3)

SD WAIT turns off when transmission becomes possible and data transmission is started/resumed.

10 - 5 10 - 5

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.1.2 Initializing error information of the serial communication module

This section explains the ERR. LED ON factors and the error code initialization (clear) for the Q series C24.

(1) ERR. LED ON factors

When any of the following errors occurs, its error code is stored in the buffer memory corresponding to the interface (CH) where the error occurred, and the

ERR. LED turns on.

Cause of error

Address

Error code storage buffer memory

Name

CH1 CH2

MC

Applicable protocol

Nonprocedure protocol

Bidirectional protocol

Switch setting error

Mode switching error

On-demand execution error

Data transmission error

Data reception error

MC protocol transmission error

Monitoring device error

256

H

257

H

258

H

203

H

Switch setting error, mode switching error storage area

266

H

On-demand execution result storage area

267

H

Data transmission result storage area

268

H

Data reception result storage area

025A

H

026A

H

MC protocol transmission error code

2205

H

2305

H

PLC CPU monitoring function execution result

(2) Turning off the ERR. LED and initializing the error codes by GX

Configurator-SC (Refer to Section 8.6.10)

(a) When turning off the ERR. LED and initializing the error codes

By making the CH ERR. clear request on the "Monitor/Test" screen, the

ERR. LED of the Q series C24 turns off and the stored error codes are initialized.

(b) When initializing the communication error information

By making the Communication error clear request for CH and to turn LED off on the "Monitor/test others" screen, the LEDs (ERR., NEU.) of the Q series C24 turn off and the communication error information is initialized.

(3) Turning off the ERR. LED and initializing the error codes by sequence program

(a) Input signals used to notify of error occurrences and output signals used to initialize the error code

I/O signal

Input signal

Output signal

Name of status information Description/function

XE Error occurrence on CH1 side

XF Error occurrence on CH2 side

Turns on upon error occurrence in CH1 interface.

Turns on upon error occurrence in CH2 interface.

YE CH1 Error information initialization request Turns on when initializing error code of interface on CH1 side.

YF CH2 Error information initialization request Turns on when initializing error code of interface on CH2 side.

Initialization of error code is continuously performed when output signal (YE/YF) is on.

POINT

The CHn side error information can be initialized by an off request to the LED off request area (address 1

H

) of the buffer memory. By using output signals YE to YF, the error codes stored in the above buffer memory can further be initialized

(cleared).

10 - 6 10 - 6

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

(b) Initializing communication error information by writing

Communication error information can be initialized by writing "1" to the corresponding bit in the buffer memory addresses 0

H

to 1

H

.

The displayed LEDs and communication error information may be turned on/off in the following cases:

• NEU. to NAK turn on/off depending on the status.

• C/N to SIO turn on when errors occur and keep the ON-status even after the operation returns to normal.

1) LED and communications error information initialization request area

(address: 0

H

to 1

H

)

The contents of the error information corresponding to each bit in this request area are the same as those for the LED ON/communication error status storage area (address: 201

H

to 202

H

).

For more details, see Section 10.1.1 (1).

The following describes the correspondence between the LED OFF request areas and the LED ON status storage areas:

• Communication error clear request area for CH1 and to turn LED off

(address: 0

H

) LED ON status and communication error status area on CH1 side (address: 201

H

)

• Communication error clear request area for CH2 and to turn LED off

(address: 1

H

) LED ON status and communication error status area on CH2 side (address: 202

H

)

2) Example of a program for turning off displayed LEDs

The following shows an example of a program that issues an initialization request for all the communication error information of CH1 and CH2.

(Input/output signals X/Y00 to X/Y1F of QC24)

Example of TO instruction

Turn off command

Writes 00FF

H

to address 0

H

and C0FF

H to address 1

H

.

POINT

(1) Initialization requests are valid only when write operation is performed.

The initialization requests clear all data in the LED ON and communication error information storage area (201

H

to 202

H

) at the same time.

Furthermore, when initialization of error information on the CH1 and CH2 sides is requested, XE and XF also turn off.

(2) Data written to the buffer memory address 0

H

to 1

H

is cleared after initialization processing.

(3) If errors persist even after completion of the initialization processing, the corresponding communication error information is stored again and the corresponding bit in the LED ON and communications error status storage area (201

H

to 202

H

) turns on (1).

10 - 7 10 - 7

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

Turn off/clear command

Turn off/clear command

Read command

MELSEC-Q

(c) Examples of programs that initialize displayed LED and communication error information

The following shows examples of a program that reads error codes when errors described in (1) above occur in an interface on the CH1 side and initializes the displayed LED and communication error information.

Incorporate the necessary part of the program.

(Input/output signals X/Y00 to X/Y1F of the Q series C24)

1) When data is communicated using the MC protocol

Reads LED and communication error information from address 201

H

.

Reads switch setting error description from address 203

H

.

Reads data transmission/reception results from address 256

H

to 258

H

.

Requests initialization of error information on the

CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory.

Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory.

Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 10.2.

2) When data is communicated using the non procedure or bidirectional protocol

Reads LED and communication error information from address 201

H

.

Reads switch setting error description from address 203

H

.

Reads data transmission/reception results from address

257

H

to 258

H

.

Writes initialization request such as for displayed LED to address 0

H

.

Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory.

Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 10.2.

REMARK

When data is communicated using the MC protocol, the displayed ERR. LED may not be turned on if the Q series C24 sends an NAK message to the external device in response to the command message.

Error codes (see Section 10.2) corresponding to the error content when the NAK message is sent back to the external device are stored in the following areas. (when communicating with an A compatible 1C frame, the error codes differ from the transmission error code.)

When checking error codes transmitted by the PLC CPU, incorporate the following program (in case of the interface on the CH1 side).

Reads transmission error codes from address 25A

H

.

Clears error codes.

Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 10.2.

10 - 8 10 - 8

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.1.3 Reading the RS-232 control signal status

This section explains how to read the control signal status stored in the buffer memory during communication using RS-232 interface.

When GX Configurator-SC is used, check the status using the "Transmission control and others monitor/test" screen (see Section 8.6.3).

When a transmission problem occurs, read operation is executed to check the signal on/off status of the RS-232 interface.

(1) RS-232 control signal status storage area (address: 254

H

, 264

H

)

The status of the RS-232 signals is stored in buffer memory addresses 254

H

and

264

H

as follows:

Buffer memory address

254

H b15

264

H to

0

0 b6 b5

1/0 b4 b3

1/0 1/0 b2

1/0 b1

1/0 b0

1/0

(Information on CH1 side)

1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

(Information on CH2 side)

1 : ON

0 : OFF

System area for QJ71C24 (-R2)

RS

DSR

DTR

CD

CS

RI

Read command

REMARK

(1) For more details on signals for RS-232, see Section 3.2.1.

(2) Signals output from the Q series C24 side (RTS and DTR) are controlled by the operating system (OS) of the Q series C24.

They cannot be directly controlled by the sequence program.

(3) There is a maximum delay of 100 ms in signal status stored in the buffer memory above.

(2) Example of a program that reads from RS-232 control signal status storage area

The following shows an example of a program that reads the RS-232 control signal status.

(input/output signals X/Y00 to X/Y1F of the Q series C24)

Example of FROM instruction

Reads the status of RS-232 control signal on the CH1 side from address 254

H

.

Reads the status of RS-232 control signal on the CH2 side from address 264

H

.

D0

D1 b15 to b6 b5

0 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 1 0

DTR signal: ON, DSR signal: ON, RTS signal: ON

CD signal: ON, DTR signal: ON, DSR signal: ON

10 - 9 10 - 9

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.1.4 Reading the data communication status (Transmission sequence status)

This section explains how to read the current status of the data communication using the MC protocol stored in the buffer memory.

When GX Configurator-SC is used, check the status using the "MC protocol monitor" screen (see Section 8.6.4).

When a transmission problem occurs, read operation is executed to check the status of the data communication using the MC protocol.

(1) Transmission sequence status storage area (address: 255

H

and 265

H

)

The status of data communication using the MC protocol is stored as a numerical value in buffer memory addresses 255

H

and 265

H

.

Buffer memory address

255

H b15 to

0 to 9 b0

(Information on the CH1 side)

265

H

0 to 9

(Information on the CH2 side)

The following shows the correspondence between the numerical values in the transmission sequence status storage area and the data communication status.

External device

Request from an external device

E

N

Q

Message wait

ACK or

NAK

Q series C24

Request to CPU

Response from

CPU

"6" "1"..."6" is repeated afterward.

Stored value

0 1

2

3 4 5 6

Values 7 to 9 are stored when "mode switching" or "initialization

of transmission sequence" is performed.

REMARK

When the target interface is not set to use the MC protocol, "0" is stored in the transmission sequence status storage area.

(2) Example of a program that reads from transmission sequence status storage area

The following shows an example of a program that reads from the transmission sequence status storage area.

(input/output signals X/Y00 to X/Y1F of the Q series C24)

Example of FROM instruction

Read command

Reads the status of data communication on the CH1 side from address 255

H

.

Reads the status of data communication on the CH2 side from address 265

H

.

D0

D1 b15 to

0

4 b0

The CH1 side is waiting to receive a command message, and is using non procedure or bidirectional protocol.

CH2 is accessing the PLC CPU upon reception of a command message.

10 - 10 10 - 10

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.1.5 Reading the switch setting status

This section explains how to read the switch setting status of the Q series C24.

When GX Configurator-SC is used, check the status in the "Monitor/test others" screen

(see Section 8.6.9).

REMARK

(1) The switch settings can be changed when the mode is switched or when the

UINI instruction is executed. (The station No. setting can be changed only when the UINI instruction is executed.)

For the mode switching, refer to Chapter 15 of the User's Manual (Application).

For the UINI instruction, refer to Chapter 17 of the User's Manual (Application).

(2) For the switch settings, refer to Section 4.5.

(1) Setting status storage area

The switch settings by GX Developer and setting error information are stored in different areas of the buffer memory shown below.

Buffer memory address 200

H b15

1) Station number storage area (address: 200

H

) to

0 to 31 b0

(Station number)

Buffer memory address 203

H

2) Switch setting error/mode switching error storage area (address: 203

H

) b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

Ignore (including b2 and b6)

Station number of the Q series

C24 is outside the range.

Linked operation setting error

(see Section 4.5.2 (2)).

CH2 CH2 CH2 CH1

(1: Error, 0: Normal)

CH1 CH1

Communication protocol number on CH side is outside the range.

Communication rate on CH side is outside the range.

Mode switching request was issued when the setting modification allow/prohibit was set to prohibit.

3) Communication protocol storage area (address: 250

H

and 260

H

) b15 to b0

Buffer memory address 250

H

0 to 8 (Information on the CH1 side)

260

H

0 to 7

(Information on the CH2 side)

4) Transmission setting status storage area (address: 251

H

and 261

H

)

Buffer memory address 251

H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0

1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

(Information on the CH1 side)

261

H

0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 (Information on the CH2 side)

Communication rate setting

Setting modification allow/prohibit

Operation setting

Data bit setting

10 - 11 10 - 11

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

(2) Example of a program that reads from the setting status storage area

The following shows an example of a program that reads the setting of various switches of the Q series C24 from the setting status storage area.

For details on XE and XF of the input/output signals used in the program, see

Section 10.1.2 (3).

(input/output signals X/Y00 to X/Y1F of the Q series C24)

Example of FROM instruction

Reads error description from address 203

H.

Reads station number setting and switch setting description from address 200

H

.

Reads communication protocol setting and transmission setting description on the CH1 side from addresses 250

H

to 251

H

.

Reads communication protocol setting and transmission setting description on CH2 from addresses 260

H

to 261

H

.

Restarts the Q series C24 after checking the error code and resetting switches.

D0 b15b14b13b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Error description (1: Communication protocol number setting error)

D1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

D3

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

D4

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

D5

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

Setting station number of the Q series C24 (0).

CH1 side

CH2 side

Communication protocol setting number (9).

(transmission setting description)

Communication protocol setting number (1).

(transmission setting description)

Displays communication protocol number setting error status on the CH1 side

10 - 12 10 - 12

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.1.6 How to read the current operation status

This section explains how to read the current operation status of the Q series C24.

When GX Configurator-SC is used, check the status in the "Transmission control and others monitor/test" screen (see Section 8.6.3).

REMARK

• The status of the switch settings by GX Developer can be checked by performing read operations as described in Section 10.1.5.

• Refer to Section 4.5 for the switch settings.

(1) Operation mode status storage area

The current operation status of the Q series C24 is stored into the following buffer memory areas.

1) Station No. storage area (address: 24F

H

)

Buffer memory address 24F

H b15 to

0 to 31 b0

(Station No.)

Buffer memory address 252

H b15

2) Communication protocol status storage area (addresses: 252

H

and 262

H

) to

1 to 7 b0

(Information on the CH1 side)

262

H

1 to 7 (Information on the CH2 side)

Mode number currently operating

3) Transmission status storage area (address : 253

H

, 263

H

)

Buffer memory address 253

H b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0

1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

(Information on the CH1 side)

263

H

0 0 0 0

1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0

(Information on the CH2 side)

Communication rate setting Operation setting

Data bit setting

Parity bit setting

Even/odd parity setting

Stop bit setting

Sum check code setting

Write during RUN setting

Setting modification allow/prohibit

10 - 13 10 - 13

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

(2) Example of a program that reads from the current setting status storage area

The following shows an example of a program that reads from the switch setting status storage area for current operation of the Q series C24.

For details regarding XE and XF of the input/output signals used in the program, see Section 10.1.2 (3).

(input/output signals X/Y00 to X/Y1F of the Q series C24)

Example of FROM instruction

Reads error description from address 203

H

.

Reads CH1 side communication protocol status and transmission status from addresses 252

H

to 253

H

.

Reads CH2 side communication protocol status and transmission status from addresses 262

H

to 263

H

.

Reads station No. from address 24F

H

.

After checking error codes and changed setting values, designate the correct setting values and switch mode.

D0 b15b14b13b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Communication protocol

D1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

Error description (2: Communication rate error)

CH1 side

Setting communication protocol number 6

(transmission setting description)

D2

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

D3

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

D4

D5

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0

CH2 side Setting communication protocol number 1

(transmission setting description)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Station No. 1 being set.

While the CH1 side is set to the non procedure protocol and the CH2 side is set to the MC protocol (format 1), this indicates the communication rate setting error on the CH1 side.

10 - 14 10 - 14

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.2 Error Code Tables

The following shows the error codes, error contents, and corrective action for errors that are generated during communication between the Q series C24 and an external device.

The signal name in the following table indicates the CH side LED on status or communication error status that is stored into buffer memory address 201

H

/202

H

when an error occurs.

The CH side LED on status and communication error status can be confirmed by GX

Developer's System monitor or GX Configurator-SC. (Refer to Section 10.1.1.)

For errors without a corresponding signal name entered to errors generated with the

MC protocol communication, “NAK” comes on.

10.2.1 Error code table

The following shows the error codes, error contents, and corrective action for errors generated during communication using MC protocol (excluding A compatible 1C frame), non procedure protocol, and bidirectional protocol.

(" " in the table is the error code when the target CPU is not a Q/QnACPU.)

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

Error

Error Contents

Signal name

Corrective action

MC

Protocol

Non

Procedure

Bidirectional

3E8

H to

3FFF

H

4000

H to

4FFF

H

7101

H

7102

H

System error

(Error detected by the CPU)

(Error detected by the CPU)

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

7103

H

PLC access error

Cannot communicate with the Q series C24 CPU.

C/N

See Troubleshooting of the

QCPU (Q mode) maintenance and inspection user's manual and take corrective action.

See Appendix of the QCPU (Q mode) maintenance and inspection user's manual

(details) and take corrective action.

( 1)

Make the watchdog timer (timer

1) time longer.

Check if the CPU can communicate in communication protocol No. "F".

7104

H to

7116

H

7140

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

Request data error

System error

Device name error

Number of request points exceeds the range for the command.

A word device was designated in a bit units command.

The last device No. exceeds the range.

Given device last No. > Designated head device

No. + Designated number of points

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

A device that cannot be designated by the given command was designated.

— ( 1)

PRO

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

7141

H

7142

H

7143

H

7144

H

7145

H

7146

H

7147

H

Device No. error

The head device No. is out of range.

Monitor data write error

Monitor PLC No.

error

Monitor CPU model name error

Monitoring was requested before the device to be monitored was written.

The written PLC No. and PLC No. in the monitor request are different.

The written CPU model name and the CPU monitor name in the monitor request are different.

Written number of monitoring points overrun error

The written number of monitoring points exceeds the designated range.

PRO

PRO

PRO

( 1)

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Write the device to be monitored before issuing a monitor request.

C/N

Rewrite the monitor data.

C/N

Rewrite the monitor data.

PRO

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

10 - 15 10 - 15

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

Error

Error Contents

7148

H

7149

714A

H

H

Extension R block

No. error

System error

Cannot execute a command during

RUN

A nonexistent extension file register block No. was designated.

A block No. being used as an extension comment area, sampling trace area, or status latch area was designated.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

A write command was designated when "Disable write during RUN" was set.

Parameter or sequence program was written during

RUN.

714B

H to

714D

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

Signal name

C/N

( 1)

Change the setting to "Enable write during RUN" and restart data communications.

Stop the CPU and restart data communications.

( 1)

Corrective action

PRO

Correct the designated block

No. and restart data communications.

714E

H

Monitor network

No. error

7150

H

System error

7151

H

PLC No.

designation error

7152

H

System error

The written monitor network No. and the monitor request network No. are different.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

A PLC No. other than "FF" or "0 to 64(00

H

to 40

H

)" was designated.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

7153

H

Frame length error

The received message length has exceeded the allowable range.

7154

7155

7156

H

H

H

System error

Unwritten monitor data error

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

Monitoring was requested before monitor data was written.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

7160

H

PLC access error

CPU model name cannot be confirmed.

C/N

C/N

CHn

ERR.

PRO

C/N

Check and correct the other station access valid module No.

in the network parameters.

Rewrite the monitor data.

( 1)

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

( 1)

Review the transmission message.

Correct the message format so the number of access points is within the allowable range.

( 1)

Write the device to be monitored before issuing a monitor request.

( 1)

If there is an error in the CPU, remove the CPU error and restart data communications.

7161

H to

7163

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

— ( 1)

7164

H

Request error

7166

7167

7168

H

H

H

System error

Cannot execute a command during

RUN

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

A write command was designated when "Disable write during RUN" was set.

A command that cannot be executed during RUN was designated.

7169

H

CPU error

Either the request or the device designation method is wrong.

Cannot communicate normally with the CPU.

C/N

C/N

C/N

Check the transmission message/request from the external device, make the necessary corrections, and send again.

( 1)

Change the setting to "Enable write during RUN" and restart data communications.

Stop the CPU and restart data communications.

If there is an error in the CPU, remove the CPU error and restart data communications.

716A

H to

716C

H

716D

H

716E

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

Monitor data write error

Monitor data was not written using QnA compatible

2C/3C/4C frame.

Monitor data was not written using A compatible 1C frame.

PRO

PRO

( 1)

Rewrite monitor data.

MC

Protocol

Non

Procedure

Bidirectional

10 - 16 10 - 16

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

Error

Error Contents

Signal name

Corrective action

MC

Protocol

Non

Procedure

Bidirectional

716F

H

Device error

7170

H

A nonexistent device was designated.

Device that cannot be specified by the corresponding command was designated.

Number of access points exceeded the range.

PRO

PRO

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

7171

H

7172

H

7173

H

A compatible 1C frame error

Monitor data write error

A device that cannot be designated was designated.

PRO

Written number of monitoring points is incorrect. For example, [0] was designated.

PRO

Monitor data was written for a CPU other than a

Q/QnACPU using QnA compatible 2C/3C/4C frame.

PRO

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Write the monitor data and use the A compatible 1C frame to a

CPU other than a Q/QnACPU.

7E00

H to

7E05

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

— ( 1)

7E06

H

Buffer memory address setting error

Transmit/receive buffer memory addresses are in the special applications area.

Change the buffer memory addresses so that they are outside the special applications area.

7E07

H to

7E0A

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

— ( 1)

7E40

H

Command error

7E41

H

Data length error

7E42

H

Error count error

7E43

H

Device error

7E44

H

7E46

H

System error

7E47

H

Timer 1 time-out error

A nonexistent command or subcommand was designated.

A data length exceeding the number of points that can communicate during random read/write was designated.

Number of requested points exceeds the range for the command.

A nonexistent device was designated.

Device that cannot be specified by the corresponding command was designated.

A response message was not returned within the response monitoring time (timer 1) monitoring time.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

Continuous request error

The next request was received before a response message was returned for the preceding request.

PRO

PRO

PRO

PRO

C/N

PRO

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Make the timer 1 monitoring time longer.

When accessing another station's CPU, check if the routing parameters match.

( 1)

Do not issue continuous requests from the external device.

Set the timer 1 monitoring time to the external device time-out time.

7E48

H to

7E4C

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

— ( 1)

7E4D

H

7E4E

H

System error

7E4F

H

7E50

H

7E51

H

Error during data transmission

Device point count error

Access point count is incorrect.

User frame No.

designation error

Unwritten user frame error

Mode switching was executed during data transmission.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

CHn

ERR.

A user frame No. outside the range was designated.

PRO

An unwritten user frame No. was designated.

PRO

PRO

Make arrangements between the target device and PLC CPU so that mode switching is not executed during data transmission.

( 1)

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Recheck the frame No..

Write the frame beforehand.

Change the frame No. and restart data communications.

Recheck the frame No..

10 - 17 10 - 17

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

Error

Error Contents

Signal name

Corrective action

MC

Protocol

Non

Procedure

Bidirectional

7E52

H

User frame overwrite error

A written frame No. overwrite request was issued.

PRO

Change the write destination to an unwritten frame No.

When overwriting, delete the given No. beforehand.

7E53

H

7E54

H

7E55

H

User frame access data error

Modification allowed error

A nonexistent command was designated in a subcommand.

Byte count exceeding the number of bytes that can be requested was designated.

Flash ROM write allow/prohibit designation from GX

Configurator-SC is set to OFF.

At the switch setting on GX Developer, modification allowed switch was set to OFF.

User frame data error

7E56

H

System error

7E57

H

7E58

H

7E59

H

Flash ROM write error

Mode modification error

There was an error in the mode No. or transmission specification designated contents when changing the mode.

Flash ROM write count over limit error

There is an error in the user frame variable data.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

Cannot write to Flash ROM normally.

Flash ROM written 1,000 times

PRO

PRO

PRO

PRO

PRO

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Set to ON at GX Configurator-

SC.

Set to ON at GX Developer.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

( 1)

Re-execute the write operation.

If the error is generated again, replace the module.

Check and correct the contents of the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Recheck the switch setting on the Q series C24.

Review the program.

Rewrite the flash ROM area

(address: 2401

H

) of the buffer memory to 0 and restart data communications.

Correct the I/O number of the module to which data is sent.

Cancel the PLC CPU monitoring and perform the PLC CPU monitoring registration again.

Correct the setting value of the cycle time units.

7E5F

H

7E60

H

7E61

H

7E62

H

7E63

H

7E64

H

7E65

H

7E66

H

7E67

H

7E68

H

7E69

H

I/O number error on requested module

Device monitoring duplicate registration error

Cycle time units range error

I/O number of requested module is incorrect.

PLC CPU monitoring registration was performed twice.

Setting value of cycle time units is out of range.

PLC CPU monitoring function error

Setting value of PLC CPU monitoring function is out of range.

Transmission measure setting error

Registration point range error

Setting of transmission measure of the PLC CPU monitoring is incorrect.

Registration point (word/bit) is out of range.

PLC CPU abnormal monitoring number error

Setting value of the PLC CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range.

Monitoring condition error of monitoring device

Setting value of transmission condition is out of range.

CPU abnormal monitoring setting value error

Transmission condition range error of monitoring device

CPU abnormal monitoring setting value error

Setting value (fixed value) of CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range.

Setting value of transmission condition (condition agreement transmission) is out of range.

Setting value (fixed value) of CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range.

Correct the setting value of the

PLC CPU monitoring function.

Correct the setting value of the transmission measure.

Correct the setting value of the registration point (word/byte)

Correct the setting value of the

PLC CPU abnormal monitoring.

Correct the setting value of the transmission condition.

Correct the setting value (fixed value) of the CPU abnormal monitoring.

Correct the setting value of the transmission condition

(condition agreement transmission).

Correct the setting value (fixed value) of the CPU abnormal monitoring.

10 - 18 10 - 18

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

Error

Error Contents

Signal name

Corrective action

7E6A

7E70

H

7E6B

7E6C

H

H

7E6D

H

CPU abnormal monitoring setting value error

7E6E

H

System error

7E6F

H

Setting value (fixed value) of CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

Modem connection error

Modem is connected to an incorrect channel.

H

Monitoring device read point range error

CPU error

Read point of monitoring device is out of range.

The communication with the CPU could not be performed normally.

C/N

Correct the setting value of the read point of the monitoring device.

Correct the setting value (fixed value) of the CPU abnormal monitoring.

( 1)

Correct the C

H

to which notification is sent.

If there is an error in the CPU, eliminate the error on the CPU side and communicate again.

7E81

H to

7E8E

H

7EC1

H

7EC2

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

— ( 1)

7EC3

7EC4

7EC5

7F21

7F22

7F23

H

H

H

Double send request error

Transmission data count error

Transmission/ receipt buffer setting error

Flash ROM access error

A send request was performed while another send request was being processed.

Data larger than the transmit buffer size was transmitted.

Transmission/receipt buffer settings out of range.

Write to Flash ROM was requested when the setting modification enable/disable switch in the GX

Developer was set to OFF.

7EC6

7F00

7F01

H

H

H

Flash ROM access error

There is an error in the Flash ROM read/write request contents.

System error

Buffer full error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

The next data was received before processing of the previous data was completed.

Multiple requests was simultaneously issued for one channel.

7F02

H to

7F06

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

An ASCII code that cannot be converted to binary code was received.

7F20

H

ASCII BIN conversion error

An odd number of bytes of data was received during data communications using ASCII conversion.

BIN

H

H

H

Receive header area error

Command error

MC protocol message error

There is an error in the command (frame) part.

An ASCII code that cannot be converted to binary code was received.

A nonexistent command or device was designated.

The remote password length is wrong.

There is no data (ETX, CR-LF, etc.) following the character area, or designation was incorrect.

(

(

Interlock (handshake) the send requests.

Make the transmission data count smaller than the transmit buffer size.

Make the non procedure protocol transmit buffer size larger.

Designate the first address and size of transmission/receipt buffer in the free area range of the user.

When writing to Flash ROM, set switch shown left of the given interface to ON and restart the

Q series C24.

Check the read/write request data and designate the correct data.

1)

Increase the transmission time by performing handshake with the external device, etc.

Perform handshake with the request source external device.

1)

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

PRO

When communicating using

ASCII BIN conversion, always transmit the data in even number bytes units.

PRO

PRO

PRO

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

MC

Protocol

Non

Procedure

Bidirectional

10 - 19 10 - 19

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

Error

Error Contents

Signal name

Corrective action

7F42

H

7F50

H to

7F54

H

7F60

H to

7F66

H

7F24

7F25

7F26

7F30

7F31

7F32

7F40

7F41

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

Sum check error

Data length error

Command error

System error

Simultaneous transmission error

System error

Time-out error

The sum check calculated by the Q series C24 and the received sum check are not the same.

The length of the received data exceeds the receive area size.

Another command was received before an unlock processing while the remote password is registered.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

The Q series C24 and an external device started transmitting simultaneously.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

No reception watchdog timer (timer 0) time-out occurred.

Response watchdog timer (timer 1) time-out occurred.

Transmit watchdog timer (timer 2) time-out occurred.

P/S

CHn

ERR.

CHn

ERR.

PRO

Recheck the external device sum check.

Correct the "data length" that is transmitted from the external device.

Change the "word/byte units" set by the Q series C24 to byte units.

Increase the receiving area of the Q series C24.

Perform the communication after the unlock processing is normally completed.

( 1)

Process by agreement with the external device.

When necessary, change the simultaneous transmission data valid/invalid designation setting by GX Configurator-SC. (buffer memory addresses 9B

H

/13B

H

)

( 1)

Check if data was dropped from the receive data.

Check if DTR control, etc.

interrupted reception.

Check the status of the message transmission destination and restart data communications, as required.

Check if DTR control, etc.

interrupted transmission.

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

— ( 1)

7F67

7F68

H

H

Overrun error

Framing error

The Q series C24 received the next data before it completed receive processing of the previous data.

Data does not match the stop bit setting.

A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the partner station was on or off.

Noise occurs in the network.

When the multidrop was connected, data was transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices.

SIO

SIO

Decrease the data transmission rate and restart data communications.

Check whether a temporary stop has occurred in the station in which the Q series C24 is installed. (For the QCPU this can be checked using special register

SD1005.) If a temporary stop has occurred, remove its cause.

Match the Q series C24 and external device settings.

Clear the error information according to the error information initialization request

(YE/YF).

In addition, when communicating data with the non procedure protocol, execute the INPUT instruction, and read and discard the unnecessary data.

Measure the noise.

When connecting the multidrop, remove the interlock so that data will not be transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices.

MC

Protocol

Non

Procedure

Bidirectional

10 - 20 10 - 20

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

Error

Error Contents

Signal name

Corrective action

7F9E

H

7FA0

H to

7FA3

H

7FA8

H

7FAA

H to

7FAD

H

7FAF

H to

7FB2

H

7FB5

H

7FB6

H

7FB8

H to

7FBC

H

7F91

H to

7F96

H

7F98

H to

7F9A

H

7F9D

H

7FC0

H to

7FC4

H

System error

7F69

7F6A

7F6B

H

H

H

Parity error

Buffer full error

CD signal control error

7F6C

H

Transmission error

Data does not match the parity bit setting.

A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the partner station was on or off.

Noise occurs in the network.

When the multidrop was connected, data was transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices.

OS receive buffer overflowed and receive data was skipped.

Data was received when CD signal is OFF when

"CD terminal check enabled" was designated.

Data cannot be sent because the line is not connected.

P/S

SIO

CHn

ERR.

CHn

ERR.

Match the Q series C24 and external device settings.

Clear the error information according to the error information initialization request

(YE/YF).

In addition, when communicating data with the non procedure protocol, execute the INPUT instruction, and read and discard the unnecessary data.

Measure the noise.

When connecting the multidrop, remove the interlock so that data will not be transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices.

Use DTR and DC control and perform data communications so that the buffer does not become full. (Perform RS

CS control when the modem function is used.)

If the Read Request signal was turned ON, execute read immediately.

Recheck the CD signal control of the external device.

(Send while the CD signal is ON.)

Set "no CD terminal checking" and perform communication.

Transmit data after line connection processing on the interface side that uses the modem function.

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

— ( 1)

MC

Protocol

Non

Procedure

Bidirectional

10 - 21 10 - 21

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

7FC9

H to

7FCF

H

7FE6

H

Error

System error

Error Contents

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

Signal name

( 1)

Corrective action

7FF8

H

7FFF

H

B000

H to

BFFF

H

C000

H to

CFFF

H

F000

H to

FFFF

H

7FE7

H

Processing disabled

Remote passwords do not match.

The remote password is not registered.

The remote password processing command was received on the interface side where the modem function is not used.

The GX Developer connection is selected in the communication protocol setting on the corresponding CH.

7FE8

H

The number of remote password disagreements exceeded the value designated at the address

200D

H

.

7FEF

H

Switch setting error

There is an error in the switch setting by the GX

Developer

7FF0

H

Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error

Executed dedicated instructions simultaneously.

7FF1

7FF2

H

H

Control data error

Communication protocol setting error

Setting value is incorrect.

Setting value is out of range.

Instruction cannot be executed with the current communication protocol.

7FF3

H to

7FF4

H

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

7FF5

H

Processing canceled due to mode switching/transmiss ion sequence initialization

The processing was canceled due to mode switching or receive data clear executed during the processing.

7FF7

H

Simultaneous access error

Multiple external devices accessed a remote station on the same network at the same time.

CHn

ERR.

CHn

ERR.

CHn

ERR.

Check the remote password and communicate again.

A remote password processing command is not necessary when a remote password is not registered.

Perform a remote password unlock processing through GX

Developer. Alternatively, change the communication protocol setting of the corresponding CH to the MC protocol.

Clear the storage area of the cumulative number of abnormal completions of unlock processing

(address: 22FC

H

) to 0.

Write CPU to the parameter and reboot after correcting the setting value for the switch.

(

Do not use dedicated instructions simultaneously.

Correct the setting value in the control data.

Correct the setting value of the communication protocol.

1)

Do not execute mode switching/receive data clear during any processing.

System error

The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

Errors detected by the CC-Link module

Errors detected by the Ethernet module

Errors detected by the MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10 network system

Multiple external devices must not access a remote station on the same network at the same time.

( 1)

Take corrective action by referring to the CC-Link

Master/Local Module User's

Manual.

Take corrective action by referring to the Ethernet

Interface Module User's Manual.

Take corrective action by referring to MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10 network system reference manual.

MC

Protocol

Non

Procedure

Bidirectional

10 - 22 10 - 22

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

1 Take corrective action in the following procedure.

1) Check whether the Q series C24, power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit.

2) Check whether the operating environment of the Q series C24 is within the general specifications range of the CPU module.

3) Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient or not.

4) Check whether the hardware of the Q series C24, CPU module and base unit are normal according to the manuals of the corresponding modules.

If any module is faulty, please contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative for repair.

5) If the problem cannot be solved through the above steps, please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative, explaining a detailed description of the problem.

10 - 23 10 - 23

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.2.2 A compatible 1C frame communications error code table

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

00

H

01

H

02

H

03

H

04

H

05

H

06

H

07

H

08

H

10

H

11

H

12

H

21

H

42

H

Error

The following table lists the error code, error contents, and corrective action for errors generated during A compatible 1C frame communications.

Error Contents

Signal name

Corrective action

MC

Protocol

Non

Procedure

Bidirectional

Disable during

RUN

Parity error

Sum check error

Protocol error

Framing error

Overrun error

Character area error

Character error

PLC access error

PLC No. error

Mode error

Special function module designation error

Special function module bus error

A write command was designated when "Disable write during RUN" was set.

Parameter or sequence program was written during

RUN.

The data does not match the parity bit setting.

The sum check calculated by the Q series C24 and the transmitted sum check are not the same.

Received message that is different from the control procedure with the communication protocol setting.

The PLC No. is not "FF", or a station No. set in the network parameters.

An error was detected upon access to the PLC

CPU.

A special function module does not exist at the specified position.

An error was detected upon access to a special function module at the specified position.

C/N

P/S

P/S

PRO

SIO

SIO

Change the setting to "Enable write during RUN" and restart data communications.

Stop the CPU and restart data communications.

Match the Q series C24 and external device settings.

Check the external device sum check.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Match the Q series C24 and external device settings.

Decrease the transmission rate and restart data communications.

The data does not match the stop bit setting.

The next data was received before the Q series C24 received all the preceding data.

Designation method error in part of a message.

A command that does not exist was designated.

The number of processing points is outside the range for the command.

A device that does not exist was designated.

Received data that cannot be used.

The CPU cannot communicate with the Q series

C24.

PRO

PRO

C/N

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data transmission.

C/N

C/N

C/N

Replace the CPU with a CPU that can communicate with the Q series C24.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Send again.

Conduct individual station recovery test and check the Q series C24.

Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications.

Check the error and take corrective action according to the manual of the corresponding module.

Other errors

POINT

If an error occurs during A compatible 1C frame communications, the Q series C24 adds a 2-character error code (00

H

to 10

H

, 42

H

) to the "NAK" code and returns the

"NAK" code to the external device and stores the error code (equivalent to QnA compatible 2C/3C/4C frame error code) to buffer memory address 25A

H

(CH1) or

26A

H

(CH2).

The exact error contents can be checked by reading the value stored to the buffer memory.

See Section 10.2.1 for a detailed description of the error codes.

10 - 24 10 - 24

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.2.3 Error code list while modem function is used

The following describes the error codes, contents and corrective actions for errors

(including errors at the abnormal completion) that may occur while the Q series C24 modem function is used.

The error codes for the modem function are stored in the modem function error code storage area (address : 221

H

(545)) of the buffer memory.

The reference pages listed in the table below are found in the User's Manual

(Application).

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

Error

Error Contents

Signal name

Corrective action

7FD0

7FD1

7FD2

7FD3

7FD4

7FD5

7FD6

7FD7

7FD8

7FD9

7FDA

7FDB

7FDC

7FDD

7FDE

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

H

Modern function error

Modern function error

There is an error in the designation of the notification execution.

There is an error in the designation of the number of connection retries.

There is an error in the designation of the connection retry interval.

There is an error in the initialization/connection timeout designation.

There is an error in the designation of the number of initialization retries.

There is an error in the designation of the data number for initialization.

There is an error in the data for connection designated by the data number for connection.

System error The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error.

External destination is connected to network or modem has not been initialized.

There is an error in the designation of the data number for connection.

There is an error in the designation of the GX

Developer connection.

There is an error in the data for connection designated by the data number for connection.

A connection time-out error occurred.

Connection to the modem/TA was unsuccessful, or the modem/TA is not connected.

CHn

ERR.

CHn

ERR.

Set 0 to 1 to the notification execution designation.

Set the number of connection retries in the range of 1 to 5.

Set the connection retry interval in the range of 90 to 300 (s).

Set the initialization/connection time- out in the range of 1 to 60 (s).

Set the number of initialization retries in the range of 1 to 5.

Designate the registered data number for initialization, or 0.

Recheck the pager receiver designation.

Recheck the dialing number of the external line.

( 1)

After the modem has been initialized, connect to the network if the external destination is not connected to the network or report it.

Designate a registered number for the data for connection.

Set 0 to 1 to the GX Developer connection designation.

Recheck the waiting time for the notification-message part of the message transmission.

Recheck the telephone number in the data for connection.

Check if the destination is ready for a connection.

Recheck the set value of the connection time-out.

Recheck the initialization command.

Check if there is any problem with the modem/TA by seeing the operation manual of the modem/TA.

Connect the modem/TA to the Q series

C24.

Check the connection cable by seeing the operation manual of the modem/TA.

7FDF

H

7FE0

H

Modem connection channel number is not designated.

Designated value of modem connection channel is incorrect.

Set 1 to 2 to the modem connection channel designation.

Reference section

Section 3.3.6

Section 3.3.6

Section 3.4.5

Section 3.4.4

Section 3.4.6

Section 3.4.7

Section 3.3.6

Section 3.4.6

Section 3.3.6

Section 3.4.4

Section 3.3.6

Section 3.4.3

Section 3.4.4

Section 3.3.6

10 - 25 10 - 25

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

Error code

(Hexadecimal)

7FE1

H

7FE2

H

Modern function error

7FE3

H

7FE4

H

7FE5

H

7FE8

H

7FE9

H

Error

There is an error in the designation of the user frame number.

There is an error in the designation of the output head pointer.

Callback denial exceeded the value designated at the address 2002

H

Error Contents

There is an error in the designation of the output frame number.

There is an error in the designation of the number of registered data bytes.

There is an error in the data for connection.

There is an error in the designation of the nocommunication interval time.

The number of remote password mismatch exceeded the value designated at the address 200D

H

.

Signal name

Corrective action

CHn

ERR.

Recheck the user frame number.

Designate the registered user frame number.

Register the designated data for initialization.

Designate the output head pointer in the range of 1 to 100.

Designate the position (n-th position) where the data for initialization number is designated.

Designate the data for initialization number at the designated position

(n-th position).

Designate a registered data for initialization number within the range of the designated number of outputs from the location of the output head pointer.

Designate the data for initialization in the range of 1 to 78.

Designate 80 for the data for connection.

Recheck the message length of the message for notification.

Designate the no-communication interval time in the range of 0 to 120.

Clear the storage area of the

Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion (address: 22FC

H

) to 0.

Clear the storage area of the callback denial accumulated count (address:

22F1

H

) to 0.

Reference section

Section 3.4.3

Section 3.4.4

Section 3.4.5

Section 3.4.5

Section 3.4.3

Section 3.4.4

Section 3.4.4

Section 3.3.6

Section 3.3.3

Section 3.3.4

1 Take corrective action in the following procedure.

1) Check whether the Q series C24, power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit.

2) Check whether the operating environment of the Q series C24 is within the general specifications range of the CPU module.

3) Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient or not.

4) Check whether the hardware of the Q series C24, CPU module and base unit are normal according to the manuals of the corresponding modules.

If any module is faulty, please contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative for repair.

5) If the problem cannot be solved through the above steps, please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative, explaining a detailed description of the problem.

10 - 26 10 - 26

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3 Troubleshooting by Symptom

Symptom

This following shows troubleshooting of trouble generated during communications between the Q series C24 and external device according to the trouble symptom.

When trouble occurs, first confirm the status of the Q series C24 and check the relevant item in the table below.

Symptom description

Protocol

Dedicated

Non procedure

Bidirectional

Reference section

(

LED turns on/off (check according to

Section 4.3)

Communication errors occurred

(check according to Section 10.1.1)

Cannot communicate via modem

1

)

The PLC CPU monitoring function does not operate in the designated cycle time.

"RUN" LED turned off.

"RD" does not blink even through an external device is transmitting a message.

An external device transmitted a message and "RD" blinked, but the Q series C24 did not return a response message.

An external device transmitted a message and "RD" blinked, but the Q series C24 did not turn ON the read request.

ERR. LED turns on.

The "NAK" was turned ON.

The "C/N" was turned ON.

The "P/S" was turned ON.

The "PRO" was turned ON.

The "SIO" was turned ON.

The "CH1. ERR. " or "CH2. ERR. " was turned ON.

Communications are intermittently established and lost.

Data that cannot be decoded was transmitted and received.

Whether the cause of the communications error is in the Q series C24 or the external device is unknown.

Cannot communicate via modem.

Cannot communicate with ISDN sub-address.

Does not operate in the cycle time designated in the constant cycle transmission setting.

Does not operate in the cycle time designated in condition agreement transmission setting.

Cannot receive by an interrupt program

Cannot receive data.

Cannot perform initial setting

Cannot write setting value in flash ROM of the Q series C24.

Section 10.3.1

Section 10.3.2

Section 10.3.3

Section 10.3.4

Section 10.3.20

Section 10.3.5

Section 10.3.6

Section 10.3.7

Section 10.3.8

Section 10.3.9

Section 10.3.10

Section 10.3.11

Section 10.3.12

Section 10.3.13

Section 10.3.14

Section 10.3.15

Section 10.3.16

Section 10.3.17

Section 10.3.17

Section 10.3.19

1 If an error occurs while performing data exchange using the modem function described in User's Manual (Application) Chapter 3, first check the following items and confirm whether or not the error is caused by the modem/TA connection.

If an error relating to the modem function is occurring, perform necessary corrective actions for each cause according to the reference sections given below:

• Check the ON/OFF status of current I/O signals of the Q series C24.

• Check the storage status for error codes related to the modem function. (See

Sections 10.2.3.)

• Check the ON/OFF status of the DR terminal of the modem/TA. (See the manual for the modem/TA.)

10 - 27 10 - 27

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

REMARK

The following are precautionary notes when exchanging data with an external device via one of the Q series C24 interfaces.

(1) When the power supply to the Q series C24 or external device is started, the remote device that is connected may generate a reception error.

(2) If the remote device that is connected starts up while data is being transmitted, the remote device side will generate a reception error.

(3) When the Q series C24 error LED lights up because a reception error has occurred, turn off the light if necessary in accordance with Section 10.1.

Also, if a reception error has occurred on the external device side, handle the error by seeing to the operating manual for the external device.

Handle the occurrence of a reception error on the Q series C24 side using the following corrective actions.

• When communicating with the MC protocol

The Q series C24 will disregard the received data or returns a response message indicating an abnormal termination if it detects a reception error after receiving the head data of the command message in the set format.

If the reception error is detected before the head data of the command message in the set format is received, the received data will be disregarded.

• When communicating using non procedure protocol

If the Q series C24 detects a reception error, the reception abnormal detection signal (X4, XB) turns ON.

Perform procedures such as detection of reception error or clearing received data as required by following the explanations found in Sections

6.1.4 and 6.1.5.

• When communicating using bidirectional protocol

When the Q series C24 detects a reception error after the head data of a communication message for bidirectional protocol is received, it returns a response message indicating an abnormal termination.

If the reception error is detected before the head data of the communication message for bidirectional protocol is received, the received data will be disregarded.

10 - 28 10 - 28

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.1 Troubleshooting when "RUN" LED is turned OFF

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• The Q series C24

"RUN" LED turned off.

• A transmission setting switch is set to an unusable position.

• Set the switch by GX Developer correctly and after writing to the CPU reset the CPU.

• PLC CPU error.

• Power module 5 V current capacity is insufficient.

• Extraneous noise caused the Q series

C24 to abnormal operation.

• Remove the cause of the CPU error and reset the CPU.

Note

• During the Q series C24 and external device loopback test, the minimum parameters file must be written to the CPU beforehand.

• Calculate the 5 V current drain of each installed module. If the current capacity is insufficient, check power module selection.

Note

• Whether or not the current capacity is insufficient can be checked by disconnecting the expansion base and installing only the Q series C24 to the basic base.

• Check if the shield wire is 2-point ground.

• When ground is used with other devices, ground the Q series C24 independently.

MC

10 - 29 10 - 29

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.2 Troubleshooting when "RD" LED does not blink even though an external device is transmitting a message

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• "RD" does not blink even through an external device is transmitting a message.

• Signal lines are not connected correctly.

• External device transmission control signals are not turned

ON.

• Check if the Q series C24 and external RD and

SD signal lines are cross connected.

• Use the external device OPEN statement to check if the opened port and the cable connection port are matched.

• Connect the wiring so that the "DSR", "CS", and other transmission control signals are ready.

Note

• Since the control signal specifications depend on the device, connect the wiring by seeing the instruction manual of the device used.

• If the message passes through an RS-232

RS-422 converter, modem, etc., the signal is interrupted at one of the intervening devices.

• Check the specifications of the converter and modem and recheck the settings and wiring

MC

10 - 30 10 - 30

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.3 Troubleshooting when the Q series C24 does not return a response message even though an external device transmitted a message and the "RD" LED blinked

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• An external device transmitted a message and "RD" blinked, but the Q series C24 did not return a response message. ("NEU" remains on and "SD" does not blink)

• Communication protocol

• Check if the communication protocol is set correctly.

• Check if the mode was switched without using the buffer memory mode switching area.

Note is set incorrectly.

• The communication protocol setting contents and the communication protocol in the current operation can be checked at buffer memory addresses 250

H

to (CH1) and 260

H

(CH2).

• When "Check CD terminal" was set, the CD terminal was turned OFF.

• Since the message is initialized (skipped reading) when the CD terminal is turned OFF when "Check

CD terminal" is set, change the wiring so that the

CD terminal remains on all the time.

• The header byte of the

• Check if the external device sent a message matched to the protocol and format.

Note message is not data needed by the set protocol and format.

• The Q series C24 station No. switch

• The Q series C24 skips all the messages transmitted until the header byte set for each protocol and format (for example, "ENQ

(05

H

)" for format 1) is received.

• Check the Q series C24 station No. setting and message station No. designation.

Note setting and message station No. designation do not match.

• When the station No. designation is local station after the header byte set for each protocol and format is received, the Q series

C24 performs receive processing.

• Set, or shorten, the monitoring time and retransmit the message from the external device and determine the trouble from the contents of the time-out error.

• The Q series C24 data communications monitoring time is set to

"infinite", or the monitoring time is too long.

Note

• Error detection by watchdog timers (timer 0 to timer 2) is possible in the following cases.

• When part of a message is skipped.

• When transmission from an external device is interrupted.

• When a link error was generated while accessing another station over a

MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10.

See Chapter 6 of User's Manual (Application) for a detailed description of the monitoring time.

• The path setting of the

PLC CPU to be accessed is incorrect.

Check the path of the PLC CPU to be accessed and set the path again.

MC

10 - 31 10 - 31

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.4 Troubleshooting when an external device transmitted a message and "RD" LED blinked, but the Read Request signal was not turned ON

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• An external device transmitted a message and "RD" blinked, but the read request signal

(X0) was not turned

ON.

Check if the communication protocol is set correctly.

Check if the mode was switched without using the

• Communication protocol buffer memory mode switching area.

Note

The communication protocol setting contents and is set incorrect.

the communication protocol in the current operation can be checked at buffer memory addresses 250

H

• When "Check CD terminal" was set, the CD terminal was turned off.

to (CH1) and 260

H

(CH2).

Since messages are skipped when the CD terminal is turned OFF when "Check CD terminal" is set, change the wiring so that the CD terminal remains on all the time.

• When DC control is selected, the necessary

DC codes are not transmitted.

• The end code was not received, or fixed length data was not received.

• The Q series C24 setting and message format do not match.

• The Q series C24 data communications monitoring time is set to

"infinite", or the monitoring time is too long.

• Check if a message is transmitted without transmitting

"DC1 (11

H

)" after the external device transmits "DC3

(13

H

)" during DC1/DC3 external control.

• Check if the next message is transmitted without adding "DC2 (12

H

)" after the external device transmits

"DC4 (14

H

)" during DC2/DC4 external control.

Check if the end code set at the Q series C24 and the end code transmitted from the external device are the same.

Check if the external device transmitted the fixed length designated at the Q series C24.

Check if the trailer frame was transmitted during communications by user frame.

Note

When the send data from the external device is correct, take the corrective action described in

Sections 10.3.10 and 10.3.11.

• The data count basics, message format, etc. depend on the following settings.

ASCII-BIN conversion enable/disable

Transparent code setting

User frame setting

See the relevant section for a description of operation according to the set contents and setting of each item.

Set, or shorten, the monitoring time and retransmit the message from the external device and determine the trouble from the contents of the time-out error.

Note

Error detection by the watchdog timer (timer 0 to timer 2) is possible in the following cases.

When part of a message is skipped.

When transmission from an external device is interrupted.

See Chapter 6 of User's Manual (Application) for a detailed description of the monitoring time.

MC

10 - 32 10 - 32

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.5 Troubleshooting when communication error "NAK" generates

Symptom Cause Corrective action MC

• Communication error signal "NAK" turned on.

• See section that describes the communication error signal ("C/N", "P/S",

"PRO", "SIO") that are turned on simultaneously when the

"NAK" signal is turned

• Take corrective action corresponding to the contents of the error.

on.

Note

Since the error code is added to "NAK" and is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device when the "NAK" signal is turned on, take the corrective action described in the error code table (see Section 10.2).

Since the error code added when "NAK" is transmitted is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory shown below, it can also be checked at the Q series C24.

Error code storage buffer memory address

CH1 side

CH2 side

25A

26A

H

H

10.3.6 Troubleshooting when communication error "C/N" generates

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• Communication error signal "C/N" turned on.

• The Q series C24 cannot be installed in the CPU.

• PLC No. designated local station (FF), or a station other than a station No. set with the network parameters.

• Change to a CPU to which the Q series C24 can be installed.

• Change the PLC No. to local station (FF), or a station No. set with the network parameter and restart data communications.

• Routing parameters between CPU with the Q

• Check the routing parameters and set them up to the communications destination CPU.

series C24 loaded and communications destination CPU are not set.

MC

10 - 33 10 - 33

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• Communication error signal "C/N" turned on.

• An error was generated on the MELSECNET/ H,

• Check the error contents from the state of SB and SW related to the MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10.

• The local station CPU

MELSECNET/10 with the GX Developer monitor, etc. and perform the checks and take on the MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10 generated an error.

the corrective action described in the

MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 reference manual.

• Change the transmit message designation data.

• Module installation address designation during communications with intelligent function module is incorrect.

• A command that cannot be transmitted during

RUN (sequence program, parameters, etc.) was transmitted, or

"Disable write during

RUN" is set.

• Stop the CPU and restart data communications.

• Set the "Enable/disable write during RUN" switch to "Enable" by command.

10.3.7 Troubleshooting when communication error "P/S" generates

MC

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• Data does not match the • Check the Q series C24 and external device parity bit setting.

data format and match the settings.

• Sum check codes do not • Check if the sum check code transmitted from match.

the external device is correct. (Recalculate)

• Communication error signal "P/S" turned on.

• When CH1 and CH2 are • When using CH1 and CH2 independently, check used in the linked mode, the cable is not that the Q series C24 is not in the linked mode.

• When using CH1 and CH2 in the linked mode, connected to one of the interface.

also connect the cable to both of the interfaces.

Note

• If the cable is not connected to one of the interfaces when CH1 and CH2 are used in the linked mode, noise may enter and the data may be destroyed and "Data cannot be decoded" or "Communications error cause" may occur.

MC

10 - 34 10 - 34

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.8 Troubleshooting when communication error "PRO." generates

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• Communications were performed with a control procedure different from the Q series C24 communication protocol setting.

• Check the Q series C24 communication protocol setting and the message from the external device and match the settings, or correct the message and restart data communications.

• Communication error signal "PRO" turned on.

• Some of the data are different from the control procedure.

• Designated command does not exist.

• The device No.

designation is not the character count corresponding to the command.

• The characters in the message include a data other than the "A to Z",

"0 to 9", " ", and control data.

• Check and correct the external device message and restart data communications.

Note

• Only the data "0 to 9" and "A to F" can be handled as character area data during communications using an MC protocol (ASCII mode). Therefore, when transmitting a character string as data, convert the ASCII code of each character string to 2-byte binary code.

Examples)

• Transmitting the character "G"

The ASCII code for the character "G" is 47

H and is transmitted as the two bytes 34

H

, 37

H

.

• Transmitting the character "A"

The ASCII code for "A" is 41

H

and is transmitted as the two bytes 34

H

, 31

H

.

If the ASCII code 41

H

for the character "A" is transmitted unchanged, the Q series C24

ASCII-BIN conversion will convert it to A

H

(10) and pass it to the PLC CPU.

• A device No. outside the designated range was designated.

• When designating a device, check "Device setting" of the parameters written to the CPU and correct it to a device No. within the designated range and restart data communications.

• A remote RUN/STOP request was issued while remote STOP was applied from another module.

• Check if remote STOP is applied from another module and restart data communications.

MC

10 - 35 10 - 35

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.9 Troubleshooting when communication error "SIO" generates

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• Data does not match the • Check if the Q series C24 and external device stop bit setting.

settings are the same.

• Communication error signal "SIO" turned on.

• Transmission rate is too fast and the next data is

• Decrease the transmission rate and restart data communications.

transmitted before the Q series C24 completes processing of the receive data.

• Data larger than the receive buffer size was received.

• Use DTR and DC control and interrupt transmission before the buffer becomes full.

Perform RS and CS control when the modem function is used.

• Increase the transmission interval and provide an ample PLC CPU read processing time.

Note

• With a multidrop link, two or more devices transmitted data at the same time.

• The non procedure protocol stores the data received up to first the end code received, or fixed length data, to the non procedure receive buffer memory and turns on the Read

Request signal to the PLC CPU.

If the next data is sent while the Read

Request signal is ON, the data is temporarily stored to the OS receive buffer. When the OS receive buffer becomes full, the Q series C24 skips the rest of the data and turns on the

"SIO" LED.

• Connect the external devices and the Q series

C24 in a 1:1 configuration and perform a communications test. Since data is transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal communications among all the devices is possible, interlock the devices so that cannot transmit simultaneously.

MC

10 - 36 10 - 36

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.10 Troubleshooting when communication error "CH1 ERR.", "CH2 ERR." generate

Symptom Cause Corrective action MC

• "ERR." LED turned on.

• There is an error in the communication protocol

• Read the error code from the buffer memory and check the error contents and change the or transmission setting.

switch setting to the correct setting.

• There is an error in the on-line mode switching designation.

• On-demand execution generated an error.

• Read the error code from the buffer memory and check the error contents and correct the designation contents.

• Read the error code from the buffer memory

• The Q series C24 detected an error while transmitting data.

• The Q series C24 detected an error while receiving data.

Note and check the error contents and correct the designation contents.

• Read the error code from the buffer memory and take the corrective action corresponding to the error contents.

• Read the error code from the buffer memory and take the corrective action corresponding to the error contents.

• When the "ERR." LED is turned on, the error code is stored to the following buffer memory.

Error code storage buffer memory

Error cause Address

Name

CH1 CH2

Switch setting error

Mode switching error

On-demand execution error

Data transmission error

Data receive error

Modern function error

MC protocol transmission error

Monitoring device error

256

H

257

H

258

H

025A

H

203

H

221

H

266

H

267

H

268

H

026A

H

Switch setting error, mode switching error storage area

On-demand execution result storage area

Data transmission result storage area

Data receive result storage area

Modern function error code storage area

MC protocol transmission error code

2205

H

2305

H

PLC CPU monitoring function execution result

See Section 10.2 for a detailed description of the error codes.

10 - 37 10 - 37

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.11 Troubleshooting when communications is intermittently established and lost

Symptom Cause Corrective action MC

• With a multidrop link, two or more devices transmitted data at the same time.

• Connect the external devices and the Q series C24 in a

1:1 configuration and perform a communications test.

Since data is transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal communications among all the devices is possible, interlock the external devices so that they do not transmit simultaneously.

• The signal cable wiring connection is faulty.

• Replace the cable, or make the connections firm.

• Communications are intermittently established and lost.

( 1)

• When "Check CD terminal" is set, the CD signal is turned on/off repeatedly.

• Change the wiring so that the CD signal remains ON all the time, or change the setting to "Do not check CD terminal".

• When half-duplex communications is selected,

• Control the external device so that the ON/OFF timing of each signal is matched.

the ON/OFF timing of each

See Chapter 8 of User's Manual (Application).

signal is not matched.

• Requested processing of the next transmission before the processing of the current transmission is completed.

• Requested processing of the next reception before the

• Make sure to obtain handshake in the sequence program.

processing of the current reception is completed.

1 The following explains how to take corrective actions when a normal exit response message cannot be received upon sending of a command message.

1) When a response message of abnormal end is received

When an external device sent a command message and received an abnormal end response message, take corrective action with the error according to the error code in the response message (see Section 10.2).

2) When response messages cannot be received

Change the setting value for the response monitoring time (timer 1, default value is 5 seconds).

(See Section 6.2 of the User's Manual (Application).)

If response messages still cannot be received after changing the setting value, check the communication protocol setting of the corresponding interface, the

ON status of the displayed LED, and the connection cable.

3) When the first part of a response message cannot be received

Increase the setting value of the message wait time (the default value is 0 ms).

(See Section 6.4 of the User's Manual (Application).)

If response messages still cannot be received after increasing the setting value, it is necessary to reduce the processing time from the end of transmission processing to the start of reception processing on the external device side.

10 - 38 10 - 38

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.12 Troubleshooting when data that cannot be decoded is transmitted and received

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• Data that cannot be decoded was transmitted and received

• With a multidrop link, two or more devices transmitted data at the same time.

• Connect the external devices and the Q series

C24 in a 1:1 configuration and perform a communications test.

Since data is transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal data communications among all the devices is possible, interlock the external devices so that they do not transmit simultaneously.

• Data does not match the • Match the Q series C24 and external device parity bit setting.

parity bit settings.

Note

• Data does not match the parity bit setting.

• If the setting of one side is data bit length 7 bits and with parity and the setting of the other side is data length 8 bits and without parity, the number of transmission/receive bits will be the same and the data will sent and receive without generating an error.

• Transmission rate settings do not match.

• Match the Q series C24 and external device transmission rates.

• With a multidrop link, the • Check if the terminal resistor (110 or 330 terminal resistor is not connected correctly.

in case of the Q series C24) is connected to the stations at both ends of the link.

• When CH1 and CH2 are • When using CH1 and CH2 independently, used to the linked mode, there is an interface check that the Q series C24 is not in the linked mode.

without cable connection.

• When using CH1 and CH2 in the linked mode, also connect the cable to both of the interfaces.

Note

• If the cable is not connected to one of the interfaces when CH1 and CH2 are used in the linked mode, noise may enter and destroy the data and "Data cannot be decoded" or

"Communication error cause" may occur.

MC

10 - 39 10 - 39

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.13 Troubleshooting when it is unclear whether the communication error cause is in the

Q series C24 or an external device

Symptom

• Whether the communications error cause is in the Q series

C24 or an external device is unclear.

Cause

Corrective action

• Test the Q series C24 as described below to check where the cause is.

1) Check the hardware.

• The Q series C24 must be installed firmly.

• The pins of the Q series C24 must not be bent or otherwise abnormal.

2) Test the Q series C24 alone. (See Section

4.7.)

• ROM/RAM/switch test must not generate any errors.

• Self loopback test must not generate any errors.

3) Check the state of the PLC CPU.

• There must not be any errors that stop

PLC CPU operation.

Note

• The following methods are available for testing if normal communications are possible with the Q series C24 alone.

1) With one the Q series C24, set CH1 and

CH2 to the non procedure protocol and connect the wiring the same as for the self loopback test and transmit data from one channel and receive the transmitted data at the other channel. If the transmitted data and the received data are the same, transmit and receive processing is performed normally.

2) When two Q series C24 are available, set one Q series C24 to the non procedure protocol and the other Q series C24 to a dedicated protocol and transmit an MC protocol message from the non procedure protocol station. If the MC protocol station returns the transmit message normally, transmit and receive processing is normal.

MC

10 - 40 10 - 40

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.14 Troubleshooting when data cannot be communicated via modem

Symptom Cause Corrective action

• Auto modem initialization cannot be executed.

• A modem initialization error occurs.

• Modem connection channel designation is not performed.

• Check the error code and execute processing accordingly.

• Set Modem connection channel designation.

• There is an error in the switch settings in the

GX Developer.

• Review the switch settings. Set it to match the local station modem and the TA.

• Communication protocol setting is incorrect.

• Set the communication protocol to MC protocol, format 5.

• Data cannot be communicated with GX

Developer supporting the Q series C24.

• Transmission setting does not match the external device.

• Communication rate does not match the external device.

• The product is not supported by the GX

Developer.

• Review the transmission setting.

• Review the communication rate setting.

• Confirm the GX Developer’s S/W version.

• The GX Developer does not

• There was an error in the GX Developer receive the callback signals from the Q Series C24.

connection system.

• Check the GX Developer’s connection system.

• Set the connection system on “callback reception waiting” and connect.

• There is an error in the GX Developer side’s modem settings.

• Set the modem’s settings on "Auto

Reception."

• Callback connections from the GX Developer are refused by the Q Series

C24.

• When performing Auto

(callback: during fixed/ during designated number) from the GX Developer, connection to the Q Series

C24 is refused.

• It is possible to connect from the GX Developer, but callback from the Q Series

C24 cannot be performed.

• There s an error in the GX Developer’s connection system.

• There is an error in the connection system’s telephone No.

• There is an error in the Q Series C24 setting value.

• There is an error in the GX Developer’s connection system.

• There is an error in the telephone No. of the connection system.

• The timer value for the status of the modem used or the line is short.

• There is a problem with the modem specifications or settings.

• Check the GX Developer’s connection system.

• Correct the Q Series C24’s settings.

• Check the telephone No.

• Change the telephone No. to the data for callback.

• Set the callback function designation on the setting 1 to 3.

• Check the GX Developer’s connection system.

• Check the Q Series C24’s settings.

• Check the telephone No.

• Change the telephone No. to the data for callback.

• Adjust each of the timer values for the callback function on the GX Developer side.

(Line callback cancel wait time, callback delay time)

• Check the modem’s specifications and settings.

MC

Non procedure protocol

Bidirection al protocol

10 - 41 10 - 41

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.15 Troubleshooting when data cannot be communicated with the ISDN sub-address

Circumstance Cause

• Data cannot be communicated with ISDN sub-address

• Sub-address is incorrect.

• Modem does not support ISDN subaddress.

• Sub-address is incorrectly partitioned.

Corrective action

• Review the sub-address.

• Use modem that supports ISDN subaddress.

• Review how to partition the sub-address using the TA manual.

MC

Non procedure protocol

Bidirection al protocol

10.3.16 Troubleshooting when constant cycle transmission does not operate normally

Circumstance Cause Corrective action

• Does not operate in the cycle time designated in the constant cycle transmission setting

• The setting value of the constant cycle transmission is incorrect.

• Review the constant cycle transmission setting.

• The cycle time is affected by some causes.

• Remove the causes or designate the cycle time anticipating the causes.

MC

Non procedure protocol

Bidirection al protocol

10.3.17 Troubleshooting when condition agreement transmission does not operate normally

Circumstance Cause Corrective action

• Does not operate in the cycle time designated in condition agreement transmission setting

• The setting value of the condition agreement transmission is incorrect.

• Review the condition agreement transmission setting.

• The cycle time is affected by some causes.

• Remove the causes or designate the cycle time anticipating the causes.

MC

Non procedure protocol

Bidirection al protocol

10.3.18 Troubleshooting when data cannot be received by an interrupt program

MC

Non procedure protocol

Bidirection al protocol

Circumstance Cause Corrective action

• Cannot receive data with the interrupt program

• Interrupt issuance was not designated.

• Receiving by instruction other than

BUFRCVS.

• "Parameter setting" - "PC system setting" or "Interrupt pointer setting" are not set on the PLC CPU side, or the settings are incorrect.

• Designate interrupt issuance.

• Use BUFRCVS instruction to receive interrupt data.

• Review "Parameter setting" - "PS system setting" - "Interrupt pointer setting" on the

PLC CPU side

10.3.19 Troubleshooting when data cannot be written to Flash ROM

MC

Non procedure protocol

Bidirection al protocol

Circumstance Cause Corrective action

• Cannot write data to Flash

ROM

• Flash ROM overwrite allow/prohibit was not set to allow.

• Setting change was not set to allow in the switch settings by GX Developer.

• Set Flash ROM overwrite allow/prohibit to allow.

• Set setting change to allow in the switch setting by GX Developer.

10 - 42 10 - 42

10 TROUBLESHOOTING

MELSEC-Q

10.3.20 Troubleshooting when the "ERR" LED is lit

Circumstance

• "ERR" LED is lit

Cause

• A communication error has occurred.

• Switch settings of the Q series C24 are incorrect.

Corrective action

• Check the error and remove the cause according to Section 10.1.1.

• Review the switch settings of the Q series

C24.

MC

Non procedure protocol

Bidirection al protocol

10 - 43 10 - 43

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

APPENDIX

Appendix 1 Functional Improvements of the Q Series C24

The Q series C24 of function version B has several functions that have been added or changed from the conventional product (function version A).

This chapter explains a comparison of the functions of Q series C24/GX Configurator-

SC accompanied by the change/addition of functions, and explains how to utilize programs created for function version A as well as how to incorporate function version

B modules into the existing system.

Appendix 1.1 Comparison of the Functions of Q Series C24/GX Configurator-SC

(1) Comparison of the functions of Q series C24

The following table shows the functions of Q series C24.

Function

Q series C24

(function version)

QJ71C24N

(-R2/R4)

B

QJ71C24

B

(-R2)

A

Communication using the MC protocol

Communication with ASCII code

Communication with binary code

Read/write of device memory

Communication with QnA compatible 2C/3C/4C frame

Communication with A compatible 1C frame

Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame

Batch read/write in bit/word units

Monitoring of device memory

Batch read/write of multiple blocks

Read/write by extension designation

Accessing other stations via network system

Reading/writing from/to the buffer memory of the Q series C24

Reading/writing from/to the buffer memory of intelligent function modules

Reading/writing from/to sequence program files

Monitoring the PLC CPUs (PLC CPU monitoring function)

Transmission of the monitoring information using the modem function.

Status control of the PLC CPUs (remote RUN/STOP, etc.)

Turning on/off input signals of the Q series C24 from an external device (global function)

Data transmission from a PLC CPU to an external device (on-demand function)

Communication using non-procedure protocol

Data transmission/reception in any format

Data transmission/reception using user frames

Data reception using format-0 (

2

)

Formats 1 to 4 exist for each.

Format 5

Data reception using format-1

Data reception by interrupt programs

Monitoring the PLC CPUs (PLC CPU monitoring function)

Transmission of the monitoring information using the modem function.

ASCII data transmission/reception by ASCII-BIN conversion

Data transmission/reception by specifying transparent code

Specification of Receive transparent code

Specification of Transmission transparent 1st (

3

)

Multiple specification of Transmission transparent 2nd to 10th

Reception data clear by dedicated instruction (CSET instruction)

App.

App. - 1 App. - 1

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

App.

Function

Communication using bidirectional protocol

Data transmission/reception in any format

Data reception by interrupt programs

ASCII data transmission/reception by ASCII-BIN conversion

Data transmission/reception by specifying transparent code

Specification of Receive transparent code

Specification of Transmission transparent 1st (

3)

Multiple specification of Transmission transparent 2nd to 10th

Registration of user frame for data communication

Registration of changeable data (added 05

H

, 0B

H

, 11

H

, and 17

H

)

Registration of changeable data (added 04

H

and 0A

H

)

Registration of changeable data (added E5

H

and EB

H

)

Communication via public network, etc. (modem function)

Automatic initialization of modem

Remote password check

Callback (

4

)

DC code control (including Xon/Xoff control)

Transmission control

DTR/DSR (ER/DR) control

Mode switching

Switch to GX Developer connection mode

Independent/linked operation of each interface

Support for 230400 bps

Data transmission/reception at low speed (transmission speed: 50 bps)

Control of RS and DTR signal states

Data communication monitoring time

Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format designation

Transmission control start/end free area designation

Communication data monitoring function

UINI instruction

Monitoring/testing of initial settings and setting values with utility package

Startup from the system monitor (

5

)

Addition to the setting items

GX Developer and GOT connection

Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT to the Q series C24 (

6

)

Support for multiple CPU system

Communication with non-control CPU using the MC protocol

Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame (ASCII code) Formats 1 to 4

Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame (binary code) Format 5

Multiple CPU setting using GX Developer (I/O assignment, switch setting, interrupt pointer setting, etc.)

: Usable

: Usable (Model serial no. [production date] limited)

: Usable

Q series C24

(function version)

QJ71C24N

(-R2/R4)

B

QJ71C24

(-R2)

B A

(

(

1

1

)

)

(See (2))

(

(

1

1

)

)

App. - 2 App. - 2

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

1 There is a limitation in the production date of the Q series C24 that contains functions that are usable.

For version verification, see section 2.6.

2 The data reception using format-0 refers to the method of receiving data by user frame, which was supported in the Q series C24 of function version A.

3 The Q series C24 of function version A is capable of setting one pair of transparent code and additional code per interface for both transmission and reception.

4 This function can be used when connecting with GX Developer.

5 This function is available in GX Developer Version 6 or later.

6 GX Developer can only be connected to the CH1 side in case of the Q series C24 of function version A.

It is not possible to connect both GX Developer and the GOT to the two interfaces at the same time.

App. - 3 App. - 3

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

(2) List of added setting items for GX Configurator-SC

The following table lists the setting items added to the GX Configurator-SC due to a software version upgrade.

GX Configurator-SC

Software version

Screen

(System setting/monitor)

Additional setting item

Version

2.06G

Version

2.00A

Version

1.10L

SW0D5C-QSCU-E

Reference section

40E,

30D,

20C

10B,

00A

Modem function monitor/test

Modem function system setting

Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion

Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion

Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnect

Callback permit accumulated count

Callback denial accumulated count

Auto (callback) connection permit accumulated count

Auto (callback) connection denial accumulated count

Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel

Circuit disconnect wait time (PLC CPU watch use)

Remote password mismatch notification count designation

Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation

Auto modem initialization designation

Callback function designation

Callback denial notification accumulated count designation

Data No. for callback designation 1 to 10

Transmission control and other monitoring/tests

RS-232 control signal status CS (CTS)

Transmission control and other system settings

Non procedure system setting

Non procedure monitor/test

RTS (RS) designation

DTR (ER) designation

Transmission control start free area

Transmission control end free area

Send/Recv data monitoring designation

Action for buffer full

Stop by Timer 0 error

Monitor buffer head address

Monitor buffer size

Transmission transparent code designation (2nd to 10th)

User frame receive format designation (1st to 4th)

Exclusive format-1 received data count (1st to 4th)

Timeout at No-protocol

Monitor/test others

Communication error clear request for CH and to turn

LED off

Auto refresh setting

Station. No. (Instruction setting)

Section

8.4.4

Section

8.6.2

Section

8.4.5

Section

8.6.3

Section

8.4.7

Section

8.6.5

Section

8.6.9

Section

8.6.9

Section

8.6.10

Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion

Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion

Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnect

Section

4.6

: Setting possible : Setting impossible

POINT

(1) GX Configurator-SC SW0D5C-QSCU-E 20C or later supports the Q series

C24 of function version B.

(2) See Section 2.6 of this manual for how to check the software version of GX

Configurator-SC.

App. - 4 App. - 4

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 1.2 Precautions when Updating the Module from Function Version A to B

This section explains how to utilize programs created for the Q series C24 of function version A for the Q series C24 of function version B and how to incorporate function version B into the existing system.

(1) Program utilization

Programs created for the Q series C24 of function version A can be used as they are for the Q series C24 of function version B.

(2) Incorporation into the existing system

The wiring used for function version A can be used as is for the Q series C24 of function version B.

App. - 5 App. - 5

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2 QnA/A Series Module

This section explains a comparison of the functions of the Q series C24 and QnA/A series modules, and explains how to utilize programs created for A series modules as well as how to install the Q series C24 into the existing system.

QnA/A modules refer to the following products.

Model name

QC24N

QC24

UC24, C24-S8

Product name

AJ71QC24N (-R2,R4), A1SJ71QC24N (-R2)

AJ71QC24 (-R2,R4), A1SJ71QC24 (-R2)

AJ71UC24, A1SJ71UC24 (-R2,R4,PRF), AJ71C24-S8

Appendix 2.1 Functional Comparison with the Q series C24 and the QnA/A Series Modules

The following shows a functional comparison between the Q series C24 and the

QnA/A series modules.

The symbol in the model name columns indicates that the corresponding functions are compatible between the applicable models (for more information, see the manual for each module).

Indicates functions that have been added to or modified from the QnA/A series modules.

Function

Communication using MC protocol

Communication in QnA compatible 3C frame

Communication in QnA compatible 4C frame

Communication in QnA compatible 2C frame

Communication with ASCII code

Communication in A compatible 1C frame

Communication in QnA compatible 4C frame

Communication with binary code

Read/write of QCPU device memory

Batch read/write of device memory ( 5)

Excluding multiple block batch read/write.

Multiple block batch read/write ( 5)

Accessing other stations (via network/data link)

Transmission from the PLC CPU (on-demand)

Arbitrary data

Using user frame

Communication with m:n connection between the PLC CPU and external devices

Communication using non procedure protocol

Transmitted/received with arbitrary format

Transmitted/received with user frame

Transmitted/received with ASCII-BIN conversion

Transmitted/received with transparent code designation

Communication using bidirectional protocol

Transmitted/received with arbitrary format

Transmitted/received with ASCII-BIN conversion

Transmitted/received with transparent code designation

Q series C24

( 2)

( 3)

QC24N

QC24

( 2)

UC24

( 1)

( 4)

C24-S8

( 1)

App. - 6 App. - 6

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Function

Accessing other stations with link dedicated instructions

Interrupt processing

(at data reception)

Non procedure protocol

Bidirectional protocol

Communication via public lines using modem function

Communication using the PLC CPU monitoring function

Auto refresh directed to the PLC CPU

DC code control

Transmission control

DTR/DSR signal control

Half-duplex communication control

Mode switching

Independent operation of two interfaces

Linked operation of two interfaces

Registering initial setting values of the buffer memory

Registering user frame

Setting the same protocol

Setting different protocols

Connection forms with external devices

1:1, 1:n m:n

I/O signal transmission/receive by multi drop link function

Connection of GX Developer

Communication data monitoring

Registering and monitoring of setting values by the utility package

Q series C24

(Flash ROM)

QC24N QC24

(via QC24 (N))

(EEPROM)

UC24 C24-S8

PLC that can be mounted

Data transmission rate (bps)

QCPU

MELSECNET/H remote I/O station

230400 maximum

( 6)

QnACPU

MELSECNET/10,

Remote I/O station

115200 maximum

19200 maximum

ACPU

AnACPU

AnUCPU

QnACPU

ACPU

AnACPU

AnUCPU

QnACPU

19200 maximum

19200 maximum

: Function exists/possible

: Function exists/possible

(specification is different depends on the function version (see Appendix 1)

: No function/impossible

1 Access is possible only within the range of an AnACPU device.

2 A multiple block batch read/write function can be used for the local station QCPU to which the Q series

C24 is mounted and the next CPU module, which will be another station, via MELSECNET/H,

MELSECNET/10.

Function

QCPU

PLC CPU

QnACPU Q2AS(H) Q4AR

Multiple block batch read/write (All allowed) (9707B or later products) (All allowed)

This function is added to modules showing 9707B or later in the package indication and the DATE column of the rating plate.

3 Access to other stations cannot be performed via data link system (MELSECNET(II), MELSECNET/B).

4 Transmission is only possible using the printer function.

5 When the Q series C24 is used, it is possible to read/write a maximum of 960 words (in case of QC24(N), it is possible to read/write a maximum of 480 words.)

6 230400 bps can be used via CH1 of QJ71C24N (-R2/R4) only.

The maximum transmission speed of QJ71C24 (-R2) is 115200 bps.

App. - 7 App. - 7

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.2 Using Programs Designed for the QC24 (N) and Installing the Q Series C24 into Existing Systems

This section explains how to use programs designed for serial communication modules in the QnA series and the installation of the Q series C24 into an existing system.

POINT

When using the Q series C24, make sure to set the operation mode, station number, and transmission specifications with the following parameter setting screen of GX Developer.

• "Intelligent function module switch setting" screen

The Q series C24 does not have the setting switches to set the operation mode, station number, and transmission specification that are available in the serial communication modules for QnA series.

Appendix 2.2.1 Using programs designed for the QC24 (N)

The data communication between the QnACPU and external devices as well as other

QnACPU which has been performed by QC24(N) can also be performed by the Q series C24.

The following explains how to use programs designed for QC24(N) during data communication using the Q series C24.

(1) The communication programs directed to the QC24(N) on the external device side and the communication programs on the QnACPU (self-station) side to which the

QC24(N) is mounted can be used for the Q series C24.

However, note the following points.

• There is no function that allows data communication with other station's PLC

CPUs by a data link instruction.

Delete the part of data communication program by data link instructions.

• When using a new function, create a new program.

(2) Make sure to check operation when using communication programs for QC24(N) on the external device side and the QnACPU (self-station) side.

(3) The notes during data communication by RS-422/485 interface also apply to the Q series C24.

• Take measures against data error reception on the external device side (see

Section 3.3.3).

• Operation of RS-422/485 interface on the PLC side.

App. - 8 App. - 8

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.2.2 Installing on existing systems

The following explains the Installation of the Q series C24 on an existing system.

(1) Installing on a multidrop connection system

The Q series C24 can be installed on an existing system to which the PLC CPU and external devices are connected as 1:n or m:n multidrop connection ( 1).

1 This is when a QC24(N) or a computer link module (such as AJ71UC24) is used as the PLC CPU module of the multidrop connection.

However, there are frame restrictions when data communication is performed.

(See the Reference Manual.)

(2) Replacing the QnACPU module with a QCPU

The wiring used by the QC24(N) can be used as is.

POINT

The functional use is the same, except for the functions added by the Q series C24 to the conventional module. However, with the introduction of high-speed QCPUs, there may be cases in which communication cannot be performed normally when a

PLC module in the QnA series is replaced by a Q series PLC. When a module is changed to a Q series PLC module, make sure to perform an operation check.

App. - 9 App. - 9

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.3 Using Programs Designed for the Computer Link Module and Installing the Q

Series C24 into Existing Systems

This section describes how to use programs created for A series computer link modules and installing the Q series C24 into an existing system.

POINT

When using the Q series C24, make sure to set the operation mode, station number, and transmission specifications with the following parameter setting screen of GX Developer.

• "Intelligent function module switch setting" screen

The Q series C24 does not have the setting switches to set the operation mode, station number, and transmission specification that are available in the computer link module for A series.

Appendix 2.3.1 Using programs designed for the computer link module

The data communication between the PLC CPU and external device as well as other

PLC CPU that has been performed by A series computer link modules (hereinafter abbreviated as UC24/C24-S8) can also be performed using the Q series C24.

However, UC24/C24-S8 and the Q series C24 have major differences in the following points.

For PLC CPU side, create a new program according to the explanation in the section of the function used.

(Differences between UC24/C24-S8 and the Q series C24)

• Initial setting items and the setting method of addresses and special application areas of the buffer memory

• Input/output signals for handshake

• Dedicated instructions of the PLC CPU

(1) Initial settings for special application area in buffer memory

1) In the Q series C24 the addresses for special application areas in the buffer memory are different from those of UC24/C24-S8. The Q series C24 has more initial setting items.

The setting method is different such that the settings are performed using the utility package (GX Configurator-SC).

2) Register necessary initial setting values according to Chapter 8.

3) The default value for the CD terminal check setting is changed to "No check".

(2) Data communication using the MC protocol (identical to the communication functions of the dedicated protocol of UC24/C24-S8)

(a) Communication protocol setting

Data communication is performed using an A compatible 1C frame by setting the communication protocol setting of the Q series C24 specified by

GX Developer to the same form as set in the mode setting switch of

UC24/C24-S8.

App. - 10 App. - 10

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

(b) Command message and response message

1) The message format used in the data communication using the A compatible 1C frame is the same as the message format of UC24/C24-S8.

2) Check available commands and devices that can be accessed in

Chapter 8 of the Reference Manual, and access the PLC CPU from the external device.

3) For the QCPU, only read/write of device memory is possible.

For the range of devices that can be accessed, see Section 5.2.1 of the

Reference Manual.

The devices added to the QCPU, i.e. the latch relay (L), step relay

(S), and file register (R) devices, are accessed using commands for

QnA compatible 2C/3C/4C frames. It is necessary to create new programs.

(c) Accessing other stations

1) When accessing other station's PLC CPU via the MELSECNET/10,

"Valid module during other station access" must be designated in the parameter setting by GX Developer.

2) Check the stations that can be accessed in Chapter 5 of the Reference

Manual, and access the PLC CPU from the external device.

3) When it is necessary to access other stations on other MELSECNET/10, data communication must be performed in a QnA compatible 3C/4C frame.

Create a new program for the external device side according to Chapter

3 of the Reference Manual.

4) It is not possible to access other stations via the MELSECNET(II)/B.

(d) Transmitting data to the external device by the on-demand function

1) The program for data transmission on the PLC CPU side is different from when UC24/C24-S8 is used.

Create a new program on the PLC CPU side according to Section 3.11

in the Reference Manual.

2) Data to be sent to the external device is identical to when the UC24/C24-

S8 is used.

(3) Data communication using the non procedure protocol

(a) Data transmission/reception

1) The same data transmission/reception as used by UC24/C24-S8 can be performed.

2) Create a new program for data communication upon checking functions and instructions used on the PLC CPU side in Chapter 6 of this manual and Chapter 11 of the User's Manual (Application).

Data transmission/reception is performed using dedicated instructions.

App. - 11 App. - 11

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

3) When data is received by a reception end code, the external device side must send the end code data (the default is CR+LF (code: 0D

H

and 0A

H

) at the end of the data sent to the PLC CPU side.

Once any end code is registered, data can be transmitted in the same way as for the UC24/C24-S8.

4) The external device side can receive data from the Q series C24 in the same ways as UC24.

(b) Message transmission by printer function (when using programs designed for UC24)

1) Message transmission using the printer function of the UC24 can be implemented by the data transmission function that uses a user frame.

2) For the PLC CPU, register and send messages according to the User's

Manual (Application).

Messages handled by the UC24 will become user frames in the Q series

C24.

(4) Data communication using the bidirectional protocol

(a) Setting to add a sum check code to a message

The setting to add a sum check code to a message has been changed. It is set during switch setting operation by GX Developer.

(b) Data transmission/reception

1) The same data transmission/reception as used by UC24/C24-S8 can be performed.

2) Create a new program for data communication upon checking functions and instructions used on the PLC CPU side in Chapter 7.

Data transmission/reception is performed using dedicated instructions.

3) The external device can transmission/receive data in the same way as the UC24/C24-S8.

(5) Others

1) The Q series C24 has other functions that are equivalent to those of

UC24/C24-S8, which are not mentioned above.

2) Check functions and specifications in this manual and the manuals listed below, and use the applicable functions.

• User's Manual (Application)

• Reference Manual

App. - 12 App. - 12

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 2.3.2 Installing the Q series C24 into existing systems

This section shows the notes when installing the Q series C24 into an existing system that uses UC24/C24-S8.

(1) Data communication using m:n connection

When the Q series C24 is installed into an existing system that has an m:n system structure between the PLC CPU and external devices, and data communication is performed using the MC protocol, the following notes should be considered:

(a) Accessing the PLC using a frame for form 5

When the UC24/C24-S8 is connected on the line, it is not possible to access the PLC in the QnA compatible 4C frame (form 5) for binary code communication.

(b) Data communication between external devices

1) When data communication is performed in order to link with an external devices to perform a 1:1 communication with the PLC CPU, it is necessary to change the station number (80

H

to A0

H

00

H

to 1F

H

) designated in the "Station number" and "Local station number" items in the messages on the external device side. (It is not necessary to specify this when an A compatible 1C frame is used.)

Alternatively, it is necessary to change the message frame so that it has a data order different from that of the MC protocol.

• Station number: Designate the number of device to which data is sent

• Local station number: Designate the number of the device that sends data

2) Perform the data communication according to Chapter 14 of the User's

Manual (Application).

(c) Processing reception data on the external device side

Set the external device so that it ignores the following reception messages that are unrelated to the local station.

• The command message and the corresponding response message that are sent from other stations when accessing the PLC CPU using the MC protocol.

• Messages when accessing between external devices.

(2) Data communication using 1:n connection

When the UC24/C24-S8 is connected on the line, it is not possible to access the

PLC in the QnA compatible 4C frame (format 5) for binary code communication.

POINT

Since performances and response speeds are different between the Q series C24 and the UC24/C24-S8, communication may not be performed normally when a

PLC module in the A series is replaced by a Q series PLC.

When a module is changed to a Q series PLC module, make sure to check operation.

App. - 13 App. - 13

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 3 Processing Time

(1) Time required to process communication using the non procedure protocol (guideline)

The processing time for the Output and Input instructions can be estimated by the following formula. Note, however, that the processing time may become longer depending on other communication functions (e.g., communication using the MC protocol) and special functions (e.g., ASCII-binary conversion, transmission control) that are used at the same time.

The value obtained from the following formula should be used as a guideline for the processing time when reception or transmission only is performed using only

CH1 (RS-232 connection).

(a) Output instruction

Tp = St + (D le

/Cr 1000 + 0.07) Ds + T1

Tp (

1

) : The time from the start of execution of the Output instruction to the End processing of the sequence scan at the completion of the Output instruction execution (ms)

St

D le

Cr

Ds

T1

: Scan time

: Data length of 1 byte at data transmission (number of bits)

: Communication rate (bps)

: Number of bytes of transmission data

: QJ71C24N (-R2/R4)

QJ71C24 (-R2)

T1 = 3.0

T1 = 4.86

1 This stands for the time range of processing (Tp).

Start of the Output instruction execution

Start of the End processing of the scan at the completion of the Output instruction execution

Step 0 END

Tp

Sequence program

Transmission command

Output instruction

Output instruction complete device

OUTPUT

One scan

Q series C24 side

Transmission data

External device side

[Calculation example]

Estimate the time required to process the Output instruction when transmitting 100 bytes of data using the non procedure protocol with the

QJ71C24N. (Unit: ms)

• Scan time

• Data length

: 10 ms

: 10 bits (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity bit)

• Communication rate : 19200 bps

10 + (10/19200 1000 + 0.07) 100 + 3.0 72.08 (ms)

App. - 14 App. - 14

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Sequence program

(b) Input instruction

Tp = Sr + 0.09 Dr + T2

Tp ( 1) : Time from the start of execution of the Input instruction to the

End processing of the sequence scan at the completion of the Input instruction execution (ms)

Sr

Dr

T2

: Scan time

: Number of bytes of reception data

: QJ71C24N (-R2/R4) T2 = 7.0

QJ71C24 (-R2) T2 = 14.91

1 This stands for the time range of processing (Tp).

Step 0

Start of the Input instruction execution

END

Tp

Start of the End processing of the scan at the completion of the Input instruction execution

Reception data read request (X3)

Input instruction

Input instruction complete device

(DX3)

Q series C24 side

External device side

Reception data

INPUT

1 scan

2ms ( 2)

[Calculation example]

Estimate the time required to process the Input instruction when receiving

100 bytes of data using the non procedure protocol with the QJ71C24N.

(Unit: ms)

• Scan time : 10 ms

10 + 0.09 100 + 7.0 26.00 (ms)

2 When only using CH1 of the Q series C24 and when processing only

30 bytes of data received, the time until the reception data read request

(X3) comes on is displayed after the Q series C24 receives data from the network.

App. - 15 App. - 15

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

2) Processing time of dedicated instructions

The following table shows the operation processing time (rough standard) of each dedicated instruction.

The operation processing time differs slightly depending on the system configuration and communication protocol.

Processing time (unit: ms)

Instruction name

Q02H/Q06H/Q12H/

Q25H/Q12PH/Q25PH

CPU

QJ71C24N

(-R2/R4)

QJ71C24

(-R2)

ONDEMAND

OUTPUT

48.0

23.4

51.5

24.8

Q02CPU

QJ71C24N

(-R2/R4)

48.6

23.8

QJ71C24

(-R2)

52.2

25.3

Q00J/Q00/ Q01CPU

QJ71C24N

(-R2/R4)

49.7

25.6

QJ71C24

(-R2)

53.6

26.7

PRR 23.3

26.8

24.2

27.0

25.1

28.3

Transmission speed

19200 bps

Data size: 8

Stop bit: 1

Parity: none

INPUT

BIDOUT

BIDIN

PUTE

GETE

SPBUSY

CSET

BUFRCVS

3.4

28.6

26.4

881.9

1.1

0.1

1.0

0.3

9.9

47.0

29.1

881.9

1.1

0.1

1.2

0.3

3.9

30.5

27.6

884.4

1.5

0.2

1.6

0.5

9.9

47.1

29.9

884.4

1.5

0.2

1.7

0.5

4.9

32.6

29.8

871.4

3.1

0.3

3.4

10.0

49.6

31.7

899.5

3.2

0.3

3.9

19200 bps

Instruction execution condition

Transmission/receive

(registered) data count

40 bytes

40 bytes

40 bytes

8 bytes

40 bytes

40 bytes

40 bytes

40 bytes

40 bytes

40 bytes

5 frames

Others

Send in form 3

Execute instruction after

40 bytes have been received.

Transmission/ receipt buffer setting

App. - 16 App. - 16

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

LSD

B

C

D

E

F

8

9

6

7

A

2

3

0

1

4

5

Appendix 4 ASCII-Code Table

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

1011

1100

1101

1110

1111

0000

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

MSD 0

000

ACK

BEL

BS

HT

LF

VT

FF

CR

SO

SI

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

The ASCII-code table is shown below. (7-bit code)

The codes 00

H

to 1F

H

indicated by the are used as Q series C24 control codes. (DC codes 11

H

to 14

H

can be changed by the user.)

1

001

ESC

FS

GS

RS

US

SYN

ETB

CAN

EM

SUB

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

5

101

\

[

]

V

W

X

Y

Z

P

Q

R

S

T

U

4

100

K

L

M

N

O

F

G

H

I

J

@

A

B

C

D

E

3

011

=

>

;

<

?

8

9

6

7

:

2

3

0

1

4

5

2

010

*

)

(

&

/

+

,

.

/

SP

!

"

#

$

%

7

111

}

~

{

|

DEL x y v w z r s p q t u

6

110 d e b c

‚ a h j i f g m n k l o

App. - 17 App. - 17

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 5 External Dimensions

(1) QJ71C24N, QJ71C24

The following diagram shows the QJ71C24 and QJ71C24N. The dimensions of the QJ71C24 are the same as QJ71C24N (except for model name).

Cable diameter 4 + 10

QJ71C24N

RUN

CH1

NEU.

SD

RD

ERR.

NEU.

SD

RD

CH2

CH1

RS-232

R2

( 2)

R1

( 1)

SDA

SDB r1

( 3)

(FG)

RDA

RDB

CH2

RS-422

/485

6

5

7

1

3

90 (3.54) 4.5

(0.18)

27.4 (1.08)

(Unit: mm (in.))

1: R1 (Bending radius near terminal block): Cable diameter 4

2: R2 (Bending radius near connector) : Cable diameter 4

3: r1 (Bending radius near crimp contact) : Connectable as long as not bended extremely

App. - 18 App. - 18

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

(2) QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24-R2

The following diagram shows the QJ71C24-R2 and QJ71C24N-R2. The dimensions of the QJ71C24-R2 are the same as QJ71C24N-R2 (except for model name).

Cable diameter 4 + 10

QJ71C24N-R2

CH1

RUN

NEU.

SD

RD

ERR.

NEU.

SD

RD

CH2

CH1

RS-232

R2

( 1)

CH2

RS-232

QJ71C24N-R2

90 (3.54)

4.5

(0.18)

1: R2 (Bending radius near connector) : Cable diameter 4

(3) QJ71C24N-R4

27.4 (1.08)

(Unit: mm (in.))

QJ71C24N-R4

RUN ERR.

CH1

NEU.

SD

NEU.

SD

RD RD

CH2 r2

( 2)

R3

( 1)

CH1

RS-422/485

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

(FG)

CH2

RS-422/485

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

(FG)

QJ71C24N-R4

90 (3.54)

11.5

(0.45)

27.4 (1.08)

(Unit: mm (in.))

1: R3 (Bending radius near the plug-in socket block): Cable diameter 4

2: r2 (Bending radius near the wire connection) : Connectable as long as not bended extremely

App. - 19 App. - 19

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 6 Example of Connection when a Converter is Used

The following shows an example of a connection where the RS-232 to RS-422/485 converters are used in order to communicate data using data communication functions with the MC, non-procedure, or bidirectional protocol.

The converters covered in the Appendix are as follows:

Manufacturer

Model name

(Recommended product)

Contact

Tel No.

Fax No.

EL Engineering Ltd.

System Sacom Co., Ltd.

EL-LINE-II

KS-1

KS-10P

KS-485

Funato-cho 7-16, Nakagawa-ku,

Nagoya, 454-0805

Shibuya Property West Bldg 12F,

Higashi 1-32-12 , Shibuya-ku,

Tokyo, 150-0011

Tel: (052) 361-2290

Fax: (052) 363-1050

Tel: (03) 3797-0211

Fax: (03) 3797-0231

A recommended product is a product that this company has verified and has found to satisfy this company’s standards.

When using this products, use it so that it conforms to the recommended product’s specifications (standards).

Q series C24 side connection interface

RS-232

RS-422/485

(1) Combination between available converters and connections

System configuration with external devices

External device interface

Available converter

Description No. of connection example

Connection example 1

1:1

1:1, 1:n, m:n

RS-422

RS-485

RS-232

EL-LINE-II

KS-1

KS-10P

KS-485

KS-485

Connection example 2

Connection example 3

Connection example 4

App. - 20 App. - 20

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

(2) Connection example

(Connection example 1)

(EL-LINE-II)

Q series C24 side RS232 signal RS422 signal External device side

CD

RD

SD

DTR

SG

DSR

RS

CS

RI

1

2

1

2

FG

TXD

1

SW1

OFF 1

SW2

OFF

TX

2

15

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

3

4

5

20

6

8

7

RXD

RTS

CTS

DTR

DSR

CD

SG

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

2

3

4

5

6

7

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

RX

RTS

CTS

SG

6

19

3

16

7

20

1 or 14

DTRA

DTRB

RTSA

RTSB

CTSA

CTSB

• The CD terminal check setting should be set to "No check" according to the explanation in Section 3.2.1 (1).

• DC code control or DTR/DSR control becomes possible for transmission control.

SG

FG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

DSRA

DSRB

R

R

(Connection example 2)

(KS-1/KS-10P)

Q series C24 side

CD

1

2

RD

SD

3

DTR

4

SG

5

6

DSR

RS

7

CS

8

9

RI

RS232 signal

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

FG

RD

SD

CS

RS

ER

SG

CD

DR

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

SW1

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

1

SW2

ON

RS485 signal

FG

(+)

DATA

OUT

(-)

(+)

DATA

IN

(-)

(+)

CONT

OUT

(-)

(+)

CONT

IN

(-)

SG

1

19

14

16

21

23

7

25

15

17

External device side

FG

RDA

RDB

SDA

SDB

DSRA

DSRB

DTRA

DTRB

RTSA

RTSB

CTSA

CTSB

SG

• The CD terminal check setting should be set to "No check" according to the explanation in Section 3.2.1 (1).

• DC code control or DTR/DSR control becomes possible for transmission control.

R

R

App. - 21 App. - 21

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

External device side

FG

SD

RD

RS

CS

DSR

SG

CD

DTR

Q series C24 side

CD

1

RD

2

SD

3

4

DTR

5

SG

DSR

6

RS

7

8

CS

9

RI

(Connection example 3)

7

20

24

25

3

5

1

2

6

RS232 signal

FG

RD

SD

CS

ER

SG

DR

TC

CNT

5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

SW1

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

(KS-485)

RS485 signal

SG

1

2

TRD+

TRD-

3

FG

9

External device side

FG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

R

• Data communication can be made in half-duplex communication.

• The CD terminal check setting should be set to "No check" according to the explanation in Section 3.2.1 (1).

• Transmission control cannot be used.

(Connection example 4)

(KS-485)

20

24

6

7

3

5

1

2

RS232 signal

FG

RD

SD

CS

ER

SG

DR

TC

25

CNT

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

SW1

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

RS485 signal

SG

1

TRD+

2

TRD-

3

FG

9

These switches should be ON when the KS-485 is at the terminal of the line.

Q series C24 side

FG

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

SG

R

When connecting with other stations

• Data communication can be made

in half-duplex communication.

• Transmission control cannot be used.

App. - 22 App. - 22

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 7 Communication Support Tool (MX Component)

MX Component is an ActiveX control library that supports any types of communication paths between IBM PC/AT compatible personal computers and PLCs. It allows the users to establish communication using simple processing only, without having to know about the different communication protocols used in the individual communication.

It also supports various programming languages, allowing for a wide range of application development.

This section provides the overview of the functions provided by MX Component and explains the procedure up to creation of applications.

See Operating Manual and Programming Manual of MX Component for the details.

Appendix 7.1 Overview of MX Component

This section provides the overview of MX Component.

Different communication paths, operating systems, programming languages, and functions are supported depending on the version of MX Component used.

(1) Support for a wide range of communication paths to PLCs

MX Component supports a wide range of communication paths to PLCs. It is possible to construct systems according to the needs of the users.

<Example of communication using MX Component>

MELSECNET/H communication

Ethernet communication

GOT

Gateway function communication

Modem communication

(2) Dramatic improvement of application development efficiency

MX Component provides wizard-style communication setting utilities.

The user only needs to select settings from menus displayed on the screen in an interactive manner to achieve the communication settings required to access the target PLC CPU.

Moreover, once the communication setting has been performed, it is possible to access the PLC CPU simply by specifying the logical station number that is stored via the communication setting utilities.

App. - 23 App. - 23

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

(3) Support for wide choice of basic operating systems

MX Component can run on IBM PC/AT compatible personal computers running the following basic operating systems:

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

95 Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

98 Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows NT

®

Workstation Operating System Version 4.0

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

Millennium Edition Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

2000 Professional Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

XP Professional Operating System

• Microsoft

®

Windows

®

XP Home Edition Operating System

(4) Support for a wide variety of programming languages

MX Component supports the following programming languages.

It allows the user to develop a wide range of customized applications.

Programming language

Visual Basic

®

Visual C++

®

Development software

Microsoft

®

Visual Basic

®

6.0

Microsoft

®

Visual C++

®

6.0

VBScript

VBA

Text editors and commercially available HTML tools

Microsoft

®

Excel 2000, Microsoft

®

Excel 2002,

Microsoft

®

Access 2000 or Microsoft

®

Access 2002

(5) Support for functions dedicated for data communication with PLCs

MX Component provides the functions necessary for data communication with

PLCs, including functions for opening/closing communication lines and reading/writing devices.

Multi-function communication programs can thus easily be developed with MX

Component.

Function name

Connect

Open

Close

Disconnect

GetErrorMessage

ReadDeviceBlock

WriteDeviceBlock

ReadDeviceBlock2

WriteDeviceBlock2

ReadDeviceRandom

WriteDeviceRandom

ReadDeviceRandom2

WriteDeviceRandom2

SetDevice

GetDevice

SetDevice2

GetDevice2

Function

Connects a telephone line.

Opens a communication line.

Closes a communication line.

Disconnects a telephone line.

Displays error definition and corrective action.

Batch-reads data from devices. (LONG type)

Batch-writes data to devices. (LONG type)

Batch-reads data from devices. (SHORT type/INT type)

Batch-writes data to devices. (SHORT type/INT type)

Randomly reads data from devices. (LONG type)

Randomly writes data to devices. (LONG type)

Randomly reads data from devices. (SHORT type/INT type)

Randomly writes data to devices. (SHORT type/INT type)

Sets one device. (LONG type)

Acquires the data of one device. (LONG type)

Sets one device. (SHORT type/INT type)

Acquires data of one device. (SHORT type/INT type)

App. - 24 App. - 24

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Function name

ReadBuffer

WriteBuffer

GetClockData

SetClockData

GetCpuType

SetCpuStatus

EntryDeviceStatus

FreeDeviceStatus

OnDeviceStatus

Function

Reads from buffer memory.

Writes to buffer memory.

Reads clock data from PLC CPU.

Writes clock data to PLC CPU.

Reads a PLC CPU type.

Remote RUN/STOP/PAUSE of PLC CPU

Registers device status monitor.

Deregisters device status monitor.

Announces event.

(6) Collecting data on Excel without programming

Using MX Component and MX Sheet (SWnD5C-SHEET-E) allows users to collect PLC device data on Excel with only simple setting and without any programming.

App. - 25 App. - 25

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 7.2 Usage Procedure of MX Component

This section explains the procedure for creating programs and sample programs using

MX Component.

(1) Procedure for creating programs

The procedure for creating programs is outlined below.

The usage procedure below uses Visual Basic

®

as an example.

1) Perform the communication settings from a IBM

PC/AT compatible personal computer to the PLC by following the wizard. (Some types of controls are set only by programs without using the wizard.)

The wizard allows the user to perform the settings required for the communication such as logical station number, connected module type, and PLC to be connected.

2) Paste the ACT control icon onto the form and assign the logical station number set in step 1 to the property of the pasted control.

3) Use the functions provided by the software to write a program that reads the device data.

Completed

App. - 26 App. - 26

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

(2) Sample program

The following sample program reads D0 to D4 (five points) of the target PLC using the logical station number.

(a) When Visual Basic

®

is used

1) Screen example (Form1)

Text1

' Enter the logical station number.

Command1

' Connect to the communication line.

Command2

' Read the device data.

Command3

' Cut the communication line.

ACT control (ActEasy IF)

' ACT control for utility setting type

2) Program example

Private Sub Command1_Click()

'

' Connection

'

Dim rtn As Long

' Get LogicalstationNumber

ActEasyIF1. ActLogicalStationNumber = Val(Text1.Text)

' Connection

rtn = ActEasyIF1. Open()

If rtn = 0 Then

MsgBox "The connection was successful"

Else

MsgBox "Connection Error:" & Hex(rtn)

End If

End Sub

Private Sub Command2_Click()

'

' Read

'

Dim rtn As Long

Dim idata(5) As Integer

' D0-D4 are read

rtn = ActEasyIF1. ReadDeviceBlock2 ("D0", 5, idata(0))

If rtn = 0 Then

MsgBox "D0-D5 = " & idata(0) & ", " & idata(1) & ", " & idata(2) & ", " & idata(3) & "," & idata(4)

Else

MsgBox "Read Error:" & Hex(rtn)

End If

End Sub

App. - 27 App. - 27

APPENDIX

Private Sub Command3_Click()

'

' Disconnection

'

Dim rtn As Long

' Disconnection

rtn = ActEasyIF1. Close()

If rtn = 0 Then

MsgBox "The disconnection was successful"

Else

MsgBox "Disconnection Error:" & Hex(rtn)

End If

End Sub

(b) When Visual C++

®

is used

//

// Connection

// void CVCDlg::OnOpen()

{

long lRet;

CString szMessage;

UpdateData();

// Get LogicalStationNumber

m_actEasyIF. SetActLogicalStationNumber ( m_lLogicalStationNumber ):

// Connection

lRet = m_actEasyIF. Open();

if ( lRet == 0) {

MessageBox ( "The connection was successful" )

} else {

szMessage. Format ( "Connection Error: %x", lRet );

MessageBox ( szMessage )

}

}

MELSEC-Q

App. - 28 App. - 28

APPENDIX

//

// Read

// void CVCDlg::OnRead()

{

long lRet;

short sData[5];

CString szMessage;

// D0-D4 are read

lRet = m_actEasyIf. ReadDeviceBlock2 ( "D0", 5, sData );

if ( lRet == 0) {

szMessage. Format ( "D0-D5 = %d, %d, %d, %d, %d",

sData[0], sData[1], sData[2], sData[3], sData[4] );

MessageBox ( szMessage );

} else {

szMessage. Format ( "Read Error: %x", lRet );

MessageBox ( szMessage )

}

}

//

// Disconnection

// void CVCDlg::OnOpen()

{

long lRet;

CString szMessage;

// Disconnection

lRet = m_actEasyIF. Close();

if ( lRet == 0) {

MessageBox ( "The disconnection was successful" )

} else {

szMessage. Format ( "Disconnection Error: %x", lRet );

MessageBox ( szMessage )

}

}

MELSEC-Q

App. - 29 App. - 29

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 8 Example of Clear Process Program for Receive Data

When performing data communications with non procedure protocol, use the receive data clear request shown in 6.1.4. and display the sequence program example if clearing the receive data from external device. (If the Q series C24 input/output signal is X/Y000 to X/Y01F.)

The following I/O signals (X) and internal relays (M) are used in the program.

App. - 30 App. - 30

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

POINT

When a function version A for the Q Series C24 is used, add the partial circuit

(shown with 1) shown in the program example in Section 6.1.4 (3).

(Communications are possible when M19 is ON.)

App. - 31 App. - 31

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9 Program Examples for Using Q Series C24 at MELSECNET/H Remote I/O

Station

Appendix 9.1 System configuration and program conditions

(1) System configuration

The system configuration used in the program examples of this section is shown below.

QJ71LP21-25

Remote master station

( 2)

Control target

QJ72lP25-25

Remote I/O station

(Station No.1)

GX Developer

MELSECNET/H (remote I/O net) network No.1

QJ71C24N( 1)

1 It is assumed that the QJ71C24N is mounted on Slot 0 of the base unit and the starting I/O No. is "0".

2 Set the network parameters of the remote master station as shown below.

1) Network type : MNET/H (Remote master)

2) Starting I/O No.

3) Network No.

4) Total stations

5) Mode

: 0000

: 1

: 1

H

: Online

6) Network range assignment (XY setting)

7) Refresh parameters

App. - 32 App. - 32

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

(2) Program example for interlocking the remote master station and remote I/O station

Interlocks should be applied to the programs according to the link status of the remote master station (host station) and remote I/O station (other station).

The following example shows an interlock in the communication program that uses the link status (SB47, SB49) of the remote master station and the link status

(SW70 bit 0, SW74 bit 0, SW78 bit 0) of the remote I/O station (Station No. 1).

SB47: Baton pass status of host

SB49: Data link status of host

SW70: Baton pass status of other station

SW74: Data link status of other station

SW78: Parameter communication

status of other station

SB20: Network module status

Sample programs (Refer to Appendix 9.2 and later)

Set the following values for the timer constant K .

Baton pass status

(T0, T2)

Cyclic transmission status

Parameter communication status

(T1, T3, T4)

More than (sequence scan time 4)

More than (sequence scan time 3)

Reason: This way the control is not stopped even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a faulty cable condition and noise interference.

Also, the multipliers of 4 and 3 should only be considered as a guideline.

(3) REMFR/REMTO instruction

Perform programming so that the next instruction is executed after the

REMFR/REMTO instruction is executed and then completed.

The completion of the REMFR/REMTO instruction can be confirmed by the completion device.

POINT

(1) After the execution of the REMFR/REMTO instruction, several scans are required before the read/write of the actual data is completed.

(2) For the interlock program for the remote master station and remote I/O station of the MELSECNET/H and details of the REMFR/REMTO instruction, refer to the "Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual

(Remote I/O Network)".

App. - 33 App. - 33

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.2 When accessing buffer memory using sequence program

In the following program example, data are read from or written to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 using the REMFR/REMTO instruction.

POINT

Use GX Configurator-SC to change the default value of the buffer memory. Using

GX Configurator-SC, save the new setting value to the flash ROM of the Q series

C24. (Refer to Chapter 8.)

(1) Program conditions

The following program reads data from or writes data to the QJ71C24N buffer memory (CH1 side word/byte units designation area) when the read/write command (X1020, X1021) turns ON.

(a) Devices used

:

• Read/write command.............................................................. X1020, X1021

• Read/write command pulse signal ......................................... M10, M11

• Completion device for REMFR/REMTO instruction .............. M100 to 103

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMFR/REMTO instruction................................................................................ M200 to 203

• Read from word/byte units designation area ......................... D0

• Write to word/byte units designation area.............................. D1

(2) Program examples

(a) Read from buffer memory

<Read command>

Changes the read command into pulses.

Reads the word/byte units designation area data of the buffer memory to D0.

Normal completion of

REMFR instruction

Abnormal completion of

REMFR instruction

(b) Write to buffer memory

Changes the write command into pulses.

Sets the word/byte units designation to byte.

Transfers the setting value to the word/byte units designation area of the buffer memory.

Normal completion of

REMTO instruction

Abnormal completion of

REMTO instruction

App. - 34 App. - 34

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.3 When sending on-demand data

Switch No.

Switch 1

The following program example sends on-demand data using the REMFR/REMTO instruction and I/O signals.

For the on-demand function, refer to Section 3.11 of the Reference Manual and

Chapter 10 of the User's Manual (Application).

(1) Program conditions

The following program sends on-demand data from the CH1 side when the transmission command (X1022) turns ON.

(a) Devices used

:

• Transmission command ............................................................ X1022

• Transmission command pulse signal........................................ M10

• On-demand function designation command............................. M11

• On-demand data transmission flag ........................................... M12

• On-demand execution result acquisition command ................. M13

• LED ON status acquisition command ....................................... M14

• Completion device for REMFR/REMTO instruction ................. M100 to 107

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMFR/REMTO instruction................................................................................... M200 to 204

• Normal/abnormal completion of on-demand data transmission............................................................................... M300, M301

• Transmission data...................................................................... D0, D1

• Buffer memory head address designation for on-demand function....................................................................................... D2

• Data length designation for on-demand function...................... D3

• On-demand execution result ..................................................... D8

• LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side

................................................................................................... D9

Position b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 to b15

(b) Intelligent function module switch settings (Refer to Section 4.5.2)

Bit

Designated value

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

Description

Operation setting

Data bit

Transmission setting

Parity bit

Even/odd parity

Stop bit

Sum check code

Write during RUN

Setting modifications

Communication rate setting

Communication protocol setting

Station number setting

Independent

8 bits

No

Odd

1 bit

Yes

Enabled

Enabled

19200bps

MC protocol format 1

Station 0

Setting value

07E2

H

0001

H

0000

H

Switch 2

Switch 5

(c) Buffer memory settings used in this example

Address Decimal (Hexadecimal)

CH1

150 (96

H

)

160 (A0

H

)

161 (A1

H

)

513 (201

H

)

598 (256

H

)

Name

Word/byte units designation

Buffer memory head address designation for on-demand function designation

Data length designation for on-demand function designation

LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side

On-demand execution result

Setting value

Word units

0C00

H

2

App. - 35 App. - 35

APPENDIX

<Transmission command>

<Setting of transmission data>

(2) Program example

<Setting of buffer memory head address and data length>

<On-demand transmission>

<Processing for normal completion>

<Processing for abnormal completion>

<Abnormal completion: Read of on-demand execution result>

<Abnormal completion: Read of LED ON status>

MELSEC-Q

Changes the transmission command into pulses.

Sets the transmission data.

Transfers the transmission data to the transmission area address of the buffer memory.

On-demand function designation command

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Buffer memory head address for on-demand function

Data length for on-demand function

Transfers the setting value to the on-demand function designation area of the buffer memory.

Sets the on-demand data transmission flag.

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Turns ON the transmission request signal.

Resets the on-demand data transmission flag.

Normal completion of on-demand data transmission

Turns OFF the transmission request signal.

Abnormal completion of on-demand data transmission

On-demand execution result acquisition command

Reads the on-demand execution result of the buffer memory to D8.

LED ON status acquisition command

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Reads the LED ON status of the buffer memory to D9.

Normal completion of REMFR instruction

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Turns OFF the transmission request signal.

App. - 36 App. - 36

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.4 When receiving data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol

The following program example receives data under the nonprocedural protocol (or bidirectional protocol) using the REMFR instruction and I/O signals.

Refer to Chapter 6 for the communication using the nonprocedural protocol.

Refer to Chapter 7 for the communication using the bidirectional protocol.

Refer to Chapter 11 of the User's Manual (Application) for data communication using the user frames.

Switch No.

Switch 1

(1) Program conditions

The following program receives data from the external device by communication using the nonprocedural protocol, then turns ON the receive read request signal

(X1003), and reads the received data from the QJ71C24N buffer memory to the

PLC CPU.

(a) Devices used

:

• Error code read signal ............................................................ X1023

• Receive read request signal ................................................... M10

• Received data acquisition command ..................................... M11

• Receive result acquisition command...................................... M12

• Completion device for REMFR instruction............................. M100 to 105

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMFR instruction ..... M200 to 203

• Normal/abnormal completion of receive ................................ M300, M301

• Received data count ............................................................... D0

• Received data (when 5-word data are received)................... D1 to D5

• Data reception result............................................................... D8000

Position b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 to b15

(b) Intelligent function module switch settings (Refer to Section 4.5.2)

Bit

Designated value

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Description

Operation setting

Data bit

Parity bit

Transmission Even/odd parity setting

Stop bit

Sum check code

Write during RUN

Setting modifications

Communication rate setting

Communication protocol setting

Station number setting

Independent

7 bits

No

Odd

1 bit

No

Enabled

Enabled

19200bps

Non-procedure protocol

Station 0

Setting value

07C0

H

0006

H

0000

H

Switch 2

Switch 5

(c) Buffer memory settings used in this example

Address Decimal (Hexadecimal)

CH1

150 (96

H

)

164 (A4

H

)

165 (A5

H

)

166 (A6

H

)

167 (A7

H

)

600 (258

H

)

Name

Word/byte units designation

Received data count designation

Receive complete code designation

Receive buffer memory head address designation

Receive buffer memory length designation

Data reception result

Setting value

Word units

01FF

H

0D0A

H

0600

H

0200

H

App. - 37 App. - 37

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

(2) Program example

<Receive read request>

<Read of received data count>

<Read of received data>

<Receive error detection>

<When receive error detected: Read of data reception result>

Changes the receive read request signal into pulses.

Reads the received data count from the communication area of the buffer memory to D1.

Received data acquisition command

Abnormal completion of

REMFR instruction

Reads data as many as the received data count from the communication area of the buffer memory to D1.

Normal reception completion

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Turns ON the receive read completion signal.

Abnormal reception completion

Reception result acquisition command

Reads the data reception result of the buffer memory to D8000.

Normal completion of REMFR

instruction

Abnormal completion of REMFR

instruction

Turns ON the receive read completion signal.

Turns OFF the receive read completion signal.

REMARK

When data reception is executed by the bidirectional protocol, the area enclosed by the dotted line shown above must be removed.

Set the intelligent function module switches as indicated below. (Refer to Section

4.5.2.)

Switch No.

Switch 1

Switch 2

Setting value

07C0

H

0007

H

App. - 38 App. - 38

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.5 When sending data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol

The following program example sends data under the nonprocedural protocol (or bidirectional protocol) using the REMFR/REMTO instruction and I/O signals.

Refer to Chapter 6 for the communication using the nonprocedural protocol, and to

Chapter 7 for the communication using the bidirectional protocol.

Switch No.

Switch 1

Switch 2

(1) Program conditions

The following program sends data from the CH1 side when the transmission signal (X1024) turns ON.

(a) Devices used

:

• Transmission command ......................................................... X1024

• Transmission command pulse signal..................................... M10

• Transmission result acquisition command............................. M11

• Completion device for REMFR/REMTO instruction .............. M100 to 103

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMFR/REMTO instruction................................................................................ M200 to 202

• Normal/abnormal completion of transmission........................ M300, M301

• Transmission data count ........................................................ D10

• Transmission data (5 words) .................................................. D11 to D15

• Data transmission result ......................................................... D20

Position b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 to b15

(b) Intelligent function module switch settings (Refer to Section 4.5.2)

Bit

Designated value

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Description

Operation setting

Data bit

Parity bit

Transmission Even/odd parity setting

Stop bit

Sum check code

Write during RUN

Setting modifications

Communication rate setting

Communication protocol setting

Station number setting

Independent

7 bits

No

Odd

1 bit

No

Enabled

Enabled

19200bps

Non-procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol

Station 0

Setting value

07C0

H

0006

H or

0007

H

0000

H

Switch 5

(c) Buffer memory settings used in this example

Address Decimal (Hexadecimal)

CH1

150 (96

H

)

162 (A2

H

)

163 (A3

H

)

599 (257

H

)

Name

Word/byte units designation

Transmission buffer memory head address designation

Transmission buffer memory length designation

Data transmission result

Setting value

Word units

0400

H

0200

H

App. - 39 App. - 39

APPENDIX

<Transmission command>

<Setting of transmission data>

(2) Program example

<Transmission request>

<Processing for normal completion>

<Processing for abnormal completion>

<Abnormal completion: Read of data transmission result>

MELSEC-Q

Changes the transmission command into pulses.

Sets the transmission data.

Sets the transmission data count.

Transfers the setting value to the communication area of the buffer memory.

Turns ON the transmission request signal.

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Normal completion of transmission

Turns OFF the transmission request signal.

Abnormal completion of transmission

Transmission result acquisition instruction

Reads the data transmission result of the buffer memory to D20.

Normal completion of REMFR instruction

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Turns OFF the transmission request signal.

App. - 40 App. - 40

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.6 When clearing received data

The following program example uses the receive data clear request area of the buffer memory.

Refer to Section 6.1.4 for received data clear.

Switch No.

Switch 1

(1) Program conditions

The following program clears the received data in the OS area of the QJ71C24N when the receive clear command (X1025) turns ON.

(a) Devices used

:

• Receive clear command ......................................................... X1025

• Receive clear processing execution command ..................... M10

• Receive processing flag.......................................................... M11

• Transmission processing flag................................................. M12

• Receive clear command pulse signal .................................... M15

• Receive clear acceptance flag ............................................... M16

• Receive clearing flag............................................................... M17

• Communication disable flag ................................................... M18

• Communication enable flag .................................................... M19

• Completion check flag ............................................................ M20

• Receive clear processing execution status acquisition command ................................................................................ M21

• Receive clear processing execution status judgment command ................................................................................ M22

• Completion device for REMFR/REMTO instruction .............. M100 to 103

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMFR/REMTO instruction................................................................................ M200, M201

• Receive data clear request area information ......................... D0

• Clear request........................................................................... D1

Position b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 to b15

(b) Intelligent function module switch settings (Refer to Section 4.5.2)

Bit

Designated value

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Description

Operation setting

Data bit

Parity bit

Transmission Even/odd parity setting

Stop bit

Sum check code

Write during RUN

Setting modifications

Communication rate setting

Communication protocol setting

Station number setting

Independent

7 bits

No

Odd

1 bit

No

Enabled

Enabled

19200bps

Non-procedure protocol

Station 0

Setting value

07C0

H

0006

H

0000

H

Switch 2

Switch 5

(c) Buffer memory settings used in this example

Address Decimal (Hexadecimal)

CH1

168 (A8

H

) Receive data clear request

Name

Setting value

0, 1

App. - 41 App. - 41

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

<Receive clear command>

<Receive clear processing execution>

<Read of receive clear status>

( 1)

(2) Program example

( 1)

Changes the receive clear command into pulses.

Sets the receive clear acceptance flag.

Receive clear processing execution command

Sets the clear request.

Transfers the setting value to the receive data clear request area of the buffer memory.

Sets the receive clearing flag.

Sets the completion check flag.

Receive clear processing execution status acquisition command

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Reads data of the receive data clear request area of the buffer memory to D0.

Receive clear processing execution status judgment command

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Resets the receive clear acceptance flag.

Resets the receive clearing flag.

Resets the completion check flag.

Sets the communication disable flag.

( 1)

Receive clear processing execution status acquisition command

Timer start

Resets the communication disable flag.

( 1)

Outputs the communication enable flag.

1 When using the Q series C24 of function version A, add the areas enclosed by the dotted lines to the sequence program. (Make communication when

M19 is ON.)

App. - 42 App. - 42

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.7 When sending data using user frames

The following program example sends data by the user frames using the

REMFR/REMTO instruction and I/O signals.

Refer to Section 11.4 of the User's Manual (Application) for the transmission using the user frames.

Switch No.

Switch 1

Switch 2

Switch 5

(1) Program conditions

The following program sends data using the user frames from the CH1 side when the transmission signal (X1026) turns ON.

(a) Devices used

:

• Transmission command ......................................................... X1026

• Transmission command pulse signal..................................... M10

• Transmission user frame designation command................... M11

• Transmission result acquisition command............................. M12

• Completion device for REMFR/REMTO instruction .............. M100 to 105

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMFR/REMTO instruction................................................................................ M200 to 203

• Normal/abnormal completion of transmission........................ M300, M301

• Transmission data count ........................................................ D0

• Transmission data................................................................... D1, D2

• CR/LF output designation....................................................... D5

• Output head pointer designation ............................................ D6

• Output count designation........................................................ D7

• Output frame No. designation ................................................ D8 to D12

• Data transmission result ......................................................... D20

Position b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 to b15

(b) Intelligent function module switch settings (Refer to Section 4.5.2)

Bit

Designated value

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Description

Operation setting

Data bit

Parity bit

Transmission Even/odd parity setting

Stop bit

Sum check code

Write during RUN

Setting modifications

Communication rate setting

Communication protocol setting

Station number setting

Independent

8 bits

No

Odd

1 bit

No

Enabled

Enabled

19200bps

Non-procedure protocol

Station 0

Setting value

07C2

H

0006

H

0000

H

App. - 43 App. - 43

APPENDIX

(c) Buffer memory settings used in this example

Address Decimal (Hexadecimal)

CH1

150 (96

H

)

162 (A2

H

)

163 (A3

H

)

183 (B7

H

)

184 (B8

H

)

185 (B9

H

)

186 (BA

H

)

187 (BB

H

)

188 (BC

H

)

189 (BD

H

)

190 (BE

H

)

6912 (1B00

H

)

6913 (1B01

H

)

Name

Word/byte units designation

Transmission buffer memory head address designation

Transmission buffer memory length designation

CR/LF output designation

Output head pointer designation

Output count designation

First output frame No. designation

Second output frame No. designation

Third output frame No. designation

Fourth output frame No. designation

Fifth output frame No. designation

For registration Registered data byte count designation

No. 8001

H

User frame storage

MELSEC-Q

Setting value

Byte units

0400

H

0200

H

0

1

5

03F2

H

03F3

H

8001

H

8000

H

041B

H

2

012D

H

App. - 44 App. - 44

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

<Transmission command>

<Setting of transmission data>

(2) Program example

The user frames No. 3F2

H

, 3F3

H

, 41B

H

and 8001

H

are assumed to have been registered in advance.

Changes the transmission command into pulses.

Sets the transmission data count.

<Transmission user frame designation command>

<Transmission request>

<Processing for normal completion>

<Processing for abnormal completion>

<Abnormal completion: Read of data transmission result>

Sets the transmission data.

Transfers the setting value to the communication area of the buffer memory.

Transmission user frame designation command

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Sets the CR/LF output.

Sets the output head pointer.

Sets the output count.

First output frame No. designation

Second output frame No. designation

Third output frame No. designation

Fourth output frame No. designation

Fifth output frame No. designation

Transfers the setting values to the transmission user frame designation area of the buffer memory.

Turns ON the transmission request signal.

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Normal completion of transmission

Turns OFF the transmission request signal.

Abnormal completion of transmission

Transmission result acquisition instruction

Reads the data transmission result of the buffer memory to D20.

Normal completion of REMFR instruction

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Turns OFF the transmission request signal.

App. - 45 App. - 45

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.8 When performing initial setting

The following program example performs initial setting using the REMTO instruction.

Execute this program when changing the default values of the Q series C24 buffer memory.

Refer to Chapter 8 when changing the default values of the Q series C24 buffer memory using GX Configurator-SC.

(1) Program conditions

The following program performs initial setting on the CH1 side when the initial setting command (X1027) turns ON.

(a) Devices used

:

• Initial setting command ........................................................... X1027

• Initial setting command pulse signal ...................................... M10

• Initial setting command 2 ........................................................ M11

• Initial setting command 3 ........................................................ M12

• Completion device for REMTO instruction............................. M100 to105

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMTO instruction..... M200 to 203

• Word/byte units designation ................................................... D0

• Buffer memory head address designation for on-demand transmission............................................................................ D1

• Buffer memory length designation for on-demand transmission............................................................................ D2

• Transmission buffer memory head address designation ...... D3

• Transmission buffer memory length designation................... D4

• Receive buffer memory head address designation ............... D5

• Receive buffer memory length designation ........................... D6

(b) Buffer memory settings used in this example

Address Decimal (Hexadecimal)

CH1

150 (96

H

)

160 (A0

161 (A1

162 (B2

163 (A3

166 (A6

167 (A7

H

H

H

H

H

H

)

)

)

)

)

)

Name

Word/byte units designation

Buffer memory head address designation for on-demand function designation

Data length designation for on-demand function designation

Transmission buffer memory head address designation

Transmission buffer memory length designation

Receive buffer memory head address designation

Receive buffer memory length designation

Setting value

Byte units

0400

H

0000

H

0C00

H

0400

H

0600

H

0200

H

App. - 46 App. - 46

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

<Initial setting command>

<Setting of word/byte units designation>

(2) Program example

<Setting of on-demand function designation and transmission area designation>

<Setting of receive area designation>

Changes the initial setting command into pulses.

Sets the word/byte units designation to byte.

Transfers the setting value to the word/byte units designation area of the buffer memory.

Initial setting command 2

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Sets 400

H

to the buffer memory head address for on-demand transmission.

Sets 0

H

to the buffer memory length for on-demand transmission.

Sets 0C00

H

to the transmission buffer memory head address.

Sets 400

H

to the transmission buffer memory length.

Transfers the setting values to the on-demand function designation and transmission area designation areas of the buffer memory.

Initial setting command 3

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Sets 600

H

to the receive buffer memory head address.

Sets 200

H

to the receive buffer memory length.

Transfers the setting value to the receive area designation area of the buffer memory.

Initial setting completion

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

REMARK

When changing the default values of the following buffer memory areas, refer to above (2) Program example to perform programming.

• DTR/DSR (ER/DR), DC control designation

• DC1/DC3 (Xon/Xoff) code designation

• DC2/DC4 code designation

• CD terminal check designation (for RS-232)

• Communication system designation (for RS-232)

• Simultaneous transmission priority/non-priority designation

• Retransmission time transmission method designation

• Simultaneously transmission data valid/invalid designation

• No-reception monitoring time (timer 0) designation

App. - 47 App. - 47

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.9 When registering user frame

The following program example registers a user frame to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR/REMTO instruction and I/O signals.

Refer to Section 9.4 of the User's Manual (Application) for the registration of the user frame.

POINT

It is recommended to use GX Configurator-SC when registering a user frame to the flash ROM of the Q series C24. (Refer to Chapter 8.)

(1) Program conditions

The following program registers a user frame to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N when the registration command (X1028) turns ON.

(a) Devices used

:

• Registration command............................................................ X1028

• Registration command pulse signal ....................................... M10

• Registration command 2......................................................... M11

• Registration flag ...................................................................... M12

• Registration result acquisition command ............................... M13

• Completion device for REMFR/REMTO instruction .............. M100 to 105

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMFR/REMTO instruction................................................................................ M200 to 203

• Registration instruction ........................................................... D0

• Frame No. ............................................................................... D1

• Registration result ................................................................... D2

• Number of data bytes registered ............................................ D3

• User frame .............................................................................. D4 to 8

(b) Buffer memory settings used in this example

Address Decimal (Hexadecimal)

CH1

2 (2

H

)

3 (3

H

)

4 (4

H

)

5 (5

H

)

6 (6

H

)

7 (7

H

)

8 (8

H

)

9 (9

H

)

10 (A

H

)

User frame

Name

For flash ROM access

Register/read/delete instructions

Frame No. direction

Registration/read/delete result storage

Number of data bytes registered designation

Setting value

1

03E8

H

10

3946

H

3030

H

3030

H

4646

H

3030

H

App. - 48 App. - 48

APPENDIX

<Registration command>

<Setting of user frame>

(2) Program example

<Registration command 2>

<Flash ROM write request>

<Read of registration result>

MELSEC-Q

Changes the registration command into pulses.

Sets the registration instruction.

Sets the frame No.

Sets the number of data bytes registered.

Sets the user frame.

Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory(registration instruction and frame No.).

Registration instruction 2

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory(number of registered data bytes and later).

Sets the registration flag.

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Turns ON the flash ROM write request signal.

Registration result acquisition command

Reads the registration result from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2.

Normal completion of REMFR instruction

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Turns OFF the flash ROM write request signal.

Resets the registration flag.

App. - 49 App. - 49

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.10 When reading user frame

The following program example reads a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the

Q series C24 using the REMFR/REMTO instruction and I/O signals.

Refer to Section 9.4 of the User's Manual (Application) for details.

POINT

It is recommended to use GX Configurator-SC when reading a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24. (Refer to Chapter 8.)

(1) Program conditions

The following program reads a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the

QJ71C24N when the read command (X1029) turns ON.

(a) Devices used

:

• Read command....................................................................... X1029

• Read command pulse signal .................................................. M10

• Read flag ................................................................................. M11

• Registration result acquisition command ............................... M12

• Number of data byte registered acquisition command.......... M13

• User frame acquisition command........................................... M14

• Completion device for REMFR/REMTO instruction .............. M100 to 107

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMFR/REMTO instruction................................................................................ M200 to 204

• Read instruction ...................................................................... D0

• Frame No. ............................................................................... D1

• Read result .............................................................................. D2

• Number of data bytes registered ............................................ D3

• User frame .............................................................................. D4 or later

• Number of registered data...................................................... D50, D100

(b) Buffer memory settings used in this example

These settings are used to read the user frame registered in Appendix 9.9.

Address Decimal (Hexadecimal)

CH1

2 (2

H

)

3 (3

H

)

4 (4

H

)

5 (5

H

)

6 (6

H

)

7 (7

H

)

8 (8

H

)

9 (9

H

)

10 (A

H

)

User frame

Name

For flash ROM access

Register/read/delete instructions

Frame No. direction

Registration/read/delete result storage

Number of data bytes registered designation

Setting value

2

03E8

H

10

3946

H

3030

H

3030

H

4646

H

3030

H

App. - 50 App. - 50

APPENDIX

<Read command>

<Setting of read instruction>

(2) Program example

<Flash ROM read request>

<Read of read result>

<Read of the number of data bytes registered >

<Read of user frame>

MELSEC-Q

Changes the read command into pulses.

Sets the read instruction.

Sets the frame No.

Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory.

Sets the read flag.

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Turns ON the flash ROM read request signal.

Registration result acquisition command

Reads the read result from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2.

No. of data byte registered acquisition command

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal.

Sets the read flag.

Reads the number of registered data bytes from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D3.

Converts the number of registered data bytes into the word units.

Adds 1 word when the number of registered data bytes is odd.

User frame acquisition command

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal.

Sets the read flag.

Reads the user frame from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D4 and higher.

Normal completion of REMFR instruction

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Sets the read flag.

App. - 51 App. - 51

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.11 When deleting user frame

The following program example deletes a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR/REMTO instruction and I/O signals.

Refer to Section 9.4 of the User's Manual (Application) for details.

POINT

It is recommended to use GX Configurator-SC when deleting a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24. (Refer to Chapter 8.)

(1) Program conditions

The following program deletes a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the

QJ71C24N when the delete command (X1030) turns ON.

(a) Devices used

:

• Delete command..................................................................... X1030

• Delete command pulse signal ................................................ M10

• Delete flag ............................................................................... M11

• Delete result acquisition command ........................................ M12

• Completion device for REMFR/REMTO instruction .............. M100 to 103

• Normal/abnormal completion flag for REMFR/REMTO instruction................................................................................ M200 to 202

• Delete instruction .................................................................... D0

• Frame No. ............................................................................... D1

• Delete result ............................................................................ D2

(b) Buffer memory settings used in this example

These settings assume that the user frame registered in Appendix 9.9 is deleted.

Address Decimal (Hexadecimal)

CH1

2 (2

H

)

3 (3

H

)

4 (4

H

)

Name

For flash ROM access

Register/read/delete instructions

Frame No. direction

Registration/read/delete result storage

Setting value

3

03E8

H

App. - 52 App. - 52

APPENDIX

<Delete command>

<Setting of delete instruction>

(2) Program examples

<Flash ROM write request>

<Read of delete result>

MELSEC-Q

Changes the delete command into pulses.

Sets the delete instruction.

Sets the frame No.

Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory.

Sets the delete flag.

Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction

Turns ON the flash ROM read request signal.

Delete result acquisition command

Reads the delete result from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2.

Normal completion of REMFR instruction

Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction

Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal.

Sets the delete flag.

App. - 53 App. - 53

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 9.12 When changing the communication protocol and transmission setting

Address, Decimal

(Hexadecimal)

CH1 CH2

114 (90

H

) 304 (130

H

)

145 (91

H

) 305 (131

H

)

515 (203

H

)

This section provides a program example that changes the communication protocol and transmission setting using the REMFR/REMTO instructions and I/O signals.

(When the module is used on a MELSECNET/H remote I/O station, the station No.

cannot be changed because the UINI instruction is unavailable.)

For changing the communication protocol and transmission setting, refer to Chapter 15 of the User's Manual (Application).

(1) Program conditions

When the change command (X1031) turns on, the communication protocol and transmission setting are changed.

b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 to b11

B12 to 14

(a) Devices used by user

• Change command .................................................................. X1031

• Changing flag .......................................................................... M300

• Change completion flag .......................................................... M301

• CH1 change command pulse signal ...................................... M10

• CH1 change command........................................................... M11

• CH1 mode switching completion............................................ M12

• CH1 receive processing.......................................................... M13

• CH1 send processing ............................................................. M14

• CH2 change command pulse signal ...................................... M20

• CH2 change command........................................................... M21

• CH2 mode switching completion............................................ M22

• CH2 receive processing.......................................................... M23

• CH2 send processing ............................................................. M24

• REMFR/REMTO instruction completion device..................... M100 to 107

• REMFR/REMTO instruction abnormal completion flag......... M200 to 205

• Switching mode No. designation............................................ D0, D10

• Transmission specifications after switching designation ....... D1, D11

• Switch setting error and mode switching error status............ D2, D12

(b) Buffer memory settings used in this example

Bit

Description Set value

Position

Specified value

B15

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

All OFF

ON

Switching mode No. designation

MC protocol

(Format 1)

Transmission specifications after switching designation

Operation setting

Data bit

Parity bit

Even/odd parity

Stop bit

Sum check code

Write during

RUN

Setting modifications

Independent

7 bits

No

Odd

2 bits

Yes

Prohibited

Allowed

Communication rate setting

For system

9600bps

Transmission specifications after switching designation

Make setting as set in this area.

Switch setting error and mode switching error status

0001

H

85B0

H

App. - 54 App. - 54

APPENDIX

<Change command>

(2) Program examples

<Change processing of CH1>

<Change processing of CH2>

MELSEC-Q

Sets the changing flag.

Starts the change processing of CH1.

Sets the switching mode No. designation.

Sets the transmission specifications after switching designation.

Transfers the set values to the mode switching designation area.

Sets the CH1 change command.

REMTO instruction abnormally completed

Sets the CH1 mode switching request.

Resets the CH1 mode switching request.

CH1 mode switching completed

Transfers the mode switching error status.

Starts the change processing of CH2.

Reexamines the modifications.

REMFR instruction abnormally completed

Sets the switching mode No. designation.

Sets the transmission specifications after switching designation.

Transfers the set values to the mode switching designation area.

Sets the CH2 change command.

REMTO instruction abnormally completed

Sets the CH2 mode switching request.

Resets the CH2 mode switching request.

CH2 mode switching completed

Transfers the mode switching error status.

App. - 55 App. - 55

APPENDIX

Resets the changing flag.

Sets the change completion flag.

Reexamines the modifications.

REMFR instruction abnormally completed

MELSEC-Q

App. - 56 App. - 56

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

Appendix 10 Setting Value Recording Sheet

The following sheet is for recording parameter setting values set by GX Developer.

Use as many copies as needed.

In order to review the setting values of the utility package (GX Configurator-SC), print out the content of the file generated by the "Make text file" function of GX

Configurator-SC which can be used as the setting value recording sheet.

[Module No. ]

Recording sheet 1 (Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting)

Set data

GX Developer setting screen

Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting

CPU side

Intelligent module side

Data item name

Interrupt pointer start No.

Interrupt pointer No. of modules

Start I/O number

Start SI number

Setting value

2 (fixed)

0 (fixed)

Remarks

Input format: Decimal

Input format: Hexadecimal

Input format: Decimal

GX Developer setting screen

Remote password settings

Recording sheet 2 (Remote password setting)

Password settings

Password active module settings

Data item name

Password

Model name

Start XY

Setting value

QJ71C24/CMO

Set data

Remarks

Input format: Character strings

Input format: Selection

Input format: Hexadecimal

Switch number

Recording sheet 3 (Intelligent function module switch setting)

Description

CH1 Communication rate setting CH1 Transmission setting b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Switch 1

Switch 2

H

CH1 Communication protocol setting =

CH2 Communication rate setting CH2 Transmission setting b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Switch 3

Switch 4

Switch 5

H

CH2 Communication protocol setting =

Station number setting =

Check the setting values in the next page and record them.

App. - 57 App. - 57

APPENDIX

MELSEC-Q

(GX Developer "Intelligent function module switch setting" setting values recording check sheet)

(1) Transmission setting (Enter "0" or "1" in the bit position field) b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

CH1 side

CH2 side

Bit Description OFF (0) ON (1) b0 b1 b2 b3

Operation setting Independent

Data bit

Parity bit

Odd/even parity

7

No

Odd b4 b5

Stop bit

Sum check code

1

No b6 Write during RUN Prohibit b7 Setting modification Prohibit

Linked

8

Yes

Even

2

Yes

Allow

Allow

Remarks

Always set to OFF on

CH1 side.

Do not include parity bit.

Vertical parity

Valid only when parity bit is set to Yes.

CH1 CH2

(2) Communication rate setting (Enter check marks in the CH1 and

CH2 fields)

Setting value

8

H

9

H

A

H

B

H

C

H

5

H

6

H

7

H

2

H

3

H

4

H

F

H

0

H

1

H

Communication speed (unit: bps)

50

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

14400

19200

28800

38400

57600

115200

230400

CH1 CH2

(3) Communication protocol setting (Enter check marks in the CH1 and

CH2 fields)

Setting value

4

H

5

H

6

H

7

H

8

H

0

H

1

H

2

H

3

H

9

H

to D

H

E

H

F

H

Setting data

GX Developer connection

MC protocol

Format 1

Format 2

Format 3

Format 4

Format 5

Non procedure protocol

Bidirectional protocol

For linked operation setting

Setting prohibited

ROM/RAM/Switch test

Individual station recovery test

App. - 58 App. - 58

INDEX

[A]

Applicable modules ..................................... 2-1

ASCII-code table ...................................App-17

Auto refresh .............................................. 4-22

[B]

BIDIN.......................................................... 9-14

Bidirectional protocol ................................... 7-1

BIDOUT ..................................................... 9-11

[C]

C/N ........................................................... 10-33

CH1.ERR, CH2.ERR............................... 10-37

Checking the function version................... 2-12

Checking the LED ON status, communications error status ..................... 10-1

Checking the software version

(GX Configurator-SC)................................ 2-13

Communication protocol setting................ 4-16

Communication rate .................................. 4-16

Communication support tool .................App-23

Communication system............................... 3-1

Computer link module ...........................App-10

Connecting the RS-232 interface................ 4-6

Connecting the RS-422/485 interface ........ 4-8

Comparison of the function .....................App-1

CSET (Receive data clear) ..............6-14, 9-19

[D]

Data bit....................................................... 4-14

Data communication functions.................... 2-5

Data format .................................................. 3-1

Data reception by receive complete code .. 6-3

Dedicated instruction list ............................. 9-1

Dedicated instructions ................................. 9-1

[E]

ERR. LED .................................................. 10-6

Error code table ....................................... 10-15

Explanation of utility package operation ..... 8-6

External dimensions ..............................App-18

[F]

Full-duplex communications ......................7-24

Function lists of the Q series C24..............3-11

Functions available with utility package ......8-2

[G]

[H]

GX Configurator-SC....................A-20, 2-2, 8-1

GX Configurator-SC function list ...............3-13

GX Developer..................................... A-20, 2-2

H/W gate OFF time ......................................3-9

How to detect reception error

(bidirectional)..............................................7-13

How to detect reception error

(non procedure)..........................................6-17

How to detect transmission errors

(bidirectional)..............................................7-22

How to detect transmission errors

(non procedure)..........................................6-28

How to read the setting status of switches....................................................10-11

[ I ]

I/O assignment settings .............................4-12

Individual station loopback test..................4-28

Individual station test..................................4-25

Initializing error information .......................10-6

INPUT...........................................................9-8

Installing utility package ...............................8-3

Interrupt pointer ..........................................4-20

[L]

LEDs displayed ............................................4-4

Linked operation.........................................4-17

List of applications and assignments of the buffer memory......................................3-17

List of input/output signals for the

PLC CPU ....................................................3-15

Ind

Index - 1 Index - 1

Ind

[M] m:n ............................................................... 2-4

Monitor/test ................................................ 8-32

Multiple CPU system ............................ 1-7, 5-3

[N] n:1 ................................................................ 2-3

NAK.......................................................... 10-33

Non procedure protocol............................... 6-1

[O]

ONDEMAND................................................ 9-2

Operation mode....................................... 10-13

OUTPUT ...................................................... 9-5

[P]

P/S ........................................................... 10-34

Parity bit ..................................................... 4-14

Part names and functions .......................... 4-3

PRO. ........................................................ 10-35

Processing time .....................................App-14

[Q]

QnA/A series module ..............................App-6

[R]

Reading the data communication status........................................................ 10-10

Reading the RS-232 control signal status.......................................................... 10-9

Reading the signal status (RS-232).......... 10-9

Receive area (bidirectional) ........................ 7-4

Receive area (non procedure) .................... 6-6

Receive complete code setting ................. 6-20

Receive data (bidirectional)......................... 7-6

Receive data (non procedure) .................... 6-8

Receive data clear (bidirectional).............. 7-14

Receive data clear (non procedure) ......... 6-14

Received data count.................................. 6-20

Receiving methods (bidirectional)............... 7-6

Receiving methods (non procedure)........... 6-8

ROM/RAM/switch tests ............................. 4-25

RS-232 interface specification .................... 3-3

RS-422/485 interface specification ............. 3-6

"RUN" LED............................................... 10-29

Remote password check...................... 1-9, 5-4

[S]

Serial communication module .....................1-1

Setting and procedures prior to operation...4-1

Setting for GX Developer...........................4-12

Simultaneous transmissions......................7-24

SIO............................................................10-36

SPBUSY.....................................................9-17

Starting the utility........................................8-10

Station number setting ...............................4-17

Sum check code.........................................4-15

Switch setting .............................................4-13

System configuration ...................................2-3

System registration to flash ROM..............8-16

[T]

Transmission area (bidirectional) ..............7-16

Transmission area (non procedure) ..........6-23

Transmission data (bidirectional)...............7-18

Transmission data (non procedure) ..........6-25

Transmission methods (bidirectional)........7-15

Transmission methods (non procedure) ...6-22

Transmission setting ..................................4-14

Transmission specification...........................3-1

Troubleshooting .........................................10-1

[U]

Uninstalling utility package ..........................8-3

Utility package ..............................................8-1

[1]

1:1 system configuration ..............................2-3

1:n .................................................................2-4

Index - 2 Index - 2

WARRANTY

Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service

Company.

However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer’s discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing onsite that involves replacement of the failed module.

[Gratis Warranty Term]

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place.

Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.

[Gratis Warranty Range]

(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.

(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.

1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or software design.

2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.

3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.

4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.

5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.

6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.

7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.

Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.

(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service

Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA

Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not , compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

6. Product application

(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device, and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.

(2) The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications.

In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications.

However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at the users discretion.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporation.

Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox. Co., Ltd in the United States.

Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective owners.

VS-VIEW

Copyright (c) 2001 ComponentOne LLC

VS-FlexGrid Pro

Copyright (c) 2000 VideoSoft Corporation

SPREAD

Copyright (c) 1996 FarPoint Technologies, Inc.

Q Corresponding Serial

Communication Module

User's Manual (Basic)

U

Q Corresponding Serial

Communication Module

User's Manual

(Basic)

MODEL

QJ71C24-U-KI-E

MODEL

CODE

13JL86

SH(NA)-080006-H(0409)MEE

HEAD OFFICE : 1-8-12, OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO-KU 104-6212,JAPAN

NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the

Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Mitsubishi Programmable

Logic Controller

QJ71C24N

QJ71C24N-R2

QJ71C24N-R4

QJ71C24

QJ71C24-R2

GX Configurator-SC

(SW2D5C-QSCU-E)

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents